Home

Handbook AS-508-A - Section 508 Technical

1. 239 9 3 2 3 FO PDAS qv 239 9 3 3 eaae gee ccs odes E E foes EE E E E E 2s EE oes reste ged E Sey aslo E EE ees 239 9 3 4 FACTOVENCES ossa eor e ors reor a cos oed or ar S Pac ee Sco c ur S an 240 9 4 Touch Screens or Contact Sensitive Controls 20 0 ccc eee ens 240 9 4 1 Rationale teuwsstewnew ue rbeseadeugecxquwreuagsuicx eger enc beuwewCkeugcr eege 240 9 4 2 Techniques lleeeeeeeeeeee hh hh s 241 9 4 2 1 god o cT T 241 9 4 2 2 For Copiers Printers Calculators and Fax Machines 242 9 4 2 3 modb c C m 242 9 4 3 1 m 242 9 4 4 References 01 eee hh nnns 242 9 5 Biometric Forms of User Identification or Control 0 243 9 5 1 Rationale llleeleeeeeeeeee ehh hh nsns 243 9 5 2 Techniques 0 0 0 0 ccc cece me e nes SP MEMINI 9 5 4 References 60 e ees Handbook AS 508 A Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Contents 9 6 PUCO OULOUT TP rC 9 6 1 FAUNA Sk r 9 6 2 Techniques 0 ce eee eee hn 9 6 2 1 FOTOO MCT rrr 9 6 2 2 For Copiers Printers Calculators and Fax Machines 9 6 2 3 FO ub c uv C m 9 6 3 o sete eee eee 9 6 4 Referentes audisse cones don veto wisn
2. 202 8 1 3 Structure and Use lssueeeeeeeeeeee ehh 202 8 1 4 Introduction to Video and Multimedia Accessibility 0 0 cee eee 203 8 1 5 General Requirements 0 000 ccc cece Ins 8 1 6 Alternate Formats Alternate Access Methods and Reasonable ACCOMMOGANON 25x ura m dre d a aux eter eto eubes babes 555684559508 bbe C Rd 205 8 2 Analog and Digital Video Caption Receivers Decoders and Displays 206 8 2 1 aiue TC E ae ee heed amaee awe cated sawed acees asec aes 206 8 2 2 D eunpeu qe 207 8 2 2 1 Ensure That all Analog Displays Have Caption Decoders 207 8 2 2 2 Ensure That all Digital Televisions and Displays Have Caption Decoders 207 8 2 2 3 Ensure That all Computer Media Players Support Open Standard Captioning and Audio Visual Synchronization Methods 207 8 2 2 4 Where Practical Use Real Time Captioning Systems for Live Events 208 8 2 3 MSEC ses ecco ee eres ere anne aii Eek reek ae ec oe eee aed eee ete eh are ee ea aera 208 8 2 4 References ec oeselpsenice sePOSIe ReOFda C VP ede staeesiasensubsunedeeueesads 209 8 3 Television Tuners and Secondary Audio Playback Circuitry 000 00 eee eee 210 8 3 1 RAUNA suos dae PEINE E RNEIIEN RS UNE RUE EDEN ERN HANE ERU NE EE 210 8 3 2 VOCHMIGUGS 211 8 3 2 1
3. eseeeeeeeee Rh nn 123 6 7 3 WGSUNG 2eccetecneageteteeheaeeketeereanenwanee semen etmet cae ete ENEE ER ee 126 6 7 4 FOOL Oll OS suu aacacs etic reine NEE ARR CAE ARCU aren Up ORTU NECARE dap addat deca 126 6 8 aiu RT 127 6 8 1 aculeo 127 6 8 2 ie ac rerresania deana mani a daaa a a A a da a a a aaa A a Ea aa AAA a aa a a a 127 6 8 2 1 Avoid Using Frames lt ccitesdecast ban decGebataddcondseeetdedeed inks ides 127 6 8 2 2 Provide Frame Titles ie away aiaterw wd naa 127 6 8 3 TOSUN seca er meee eens E a a E a REE a E E EE E 128 6 8 4 REITEN COS ars pr I Ende dambrd A a r S EC db d ex E A 128 6 9 Sr OFI KO oue aua decia acide REOR RE Be Soe ee ee eee ee 129 6 9 1 BUC EE EEE TT IT 129 6 9 2 Techniques suse serre nananana annaa 129 6 9 3 TG eee te ecco teste a as E E att E e eal A ered E avin E E eat T 130 6 9 4 PeIClENCeS arara e re O NEE 70107 7 0100007 0127 1T ERN 130 6 10 Equivalent Text Content 0 turra ananena rE 131 6 10 1 RANON Ea uu 34 ads tra ai dead e d dao d ih ce mt Sagi o M end tha he A 131 6 10 2 Techniques useless hrs 131 6 10 2 1 Use Standard Accessible Formats 0 0 ccc eens 131 6 10 2 2 Descriptive Hyperlinks 0 0 0 0 eens 132 viii Handbook AS 508 A Contents G02 MENI cop 132 6 11 SCHDBUDG Languages 2 59 27x 9 252 80 219 2 d 2d vii BO Ea ara ed nre qa eU enun OR eee Qoo OR HR Wen 133
4. Techniques Ensure That all Analog Displays Have Caption Decoders Analog televisions or video displays larger than 13 inches diagonal must include caption decoder circuitry that appropriately receives decodes and displays closed captions from broadcast cable videotape and DVD signals Decoders are included in all televisions with screens greater than 13 inches built after July 1 1993 Televisions and monitors without built in decoders must have an add on decoder for closed captioning to work Note that it is often less expensive to purchase a new monitor or television than to add on a decoder Ensure That all Digital Televisions and Displays Have Caption Decoders Digital televisions DTVs or digital video receivers tuners and displays including those in computer equipment and kiosks must include caption decoder circuitry that appropriately receives decodes and displays captions from broadcast cable videotape and DVD signals This includes widescreen digital television DTV displays measuring at least 7 8 inches vertically DTV sets with conventional displays measuring at least 13 inches vertically stand alone DTV tuners whether or not they are marketed with display screens and computer equipment or kiosks that includes DTV receiver or display circuitry Ensure That all Computer Media Players Support Open Standard Captioning and Audio Visual Synchronization Methods Digital media player software used on computer or
5. UTUMTT 176 7 7 1 meiiens Pa E eee ee ee E E E E eee ee ee 176 7 7 2 esi ucc ELTE 176 7 7 3 IESU 2 ccoeaseagacuewedueeut scene E T E EE E E ESOS TERME secu es 177 7 7 4 PICTON CNG CS REF 177 7 8 Automatic Volume Reset 000 eee nnns 178 7 8 1 aiu L ES 178 7 8 2 ice gigs aa ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 179 7 8 2 1 Provide Acceptable In Range Default Volume Settings 179 7 8 2 2 Provide Automatic Reset of Volume Level and User Override Functions 179 7 8 2 3 Provide Visual Indicator of Volume Setting 00 ccc eee eee eee 180 7 8 3 ecn e tance aye omens era Suara oat eee ae ere oe nna ean eK ae oe ee ee eee 180 7 8 4 acci Le ace P 180 7 9 Hearing Aid Compatibility 0 0 ee een Rn 181 7 9 1 aii 181 7 9 2 WECRNIQUGS MT ETE 182 7 9 2 1 Provide Support for Inductive Coupling 0 ccc eee ee eee 182 7 9 2 2 Cellular Telephones Must Support Hearing Aid Compatibility 183 7 9 3 Testing 0 ccc cece mh me he ere nnns 7 9 4 References i c hee ees 7 10 Minimized Interference seeeeeeeee RR hrs 185 7 10 1 Rationale usen prep ERR debe secure raped eens ee eet Gees arbe i ewenss 185 74102 TECNNIQUCS ER 186 TIDS T Urra a a are E A REC edP EEN 187 7 10 4 References nuanann anaana nu
6. Computers With Telecommunications Functions Must Support or Emulate TTYs Desktop or portable computers with telecommunications functions must provide TTY support or offer TTY emulating software in addition to providing microphone disablement When telephone functions are provided on a desktop or portable computer you must provide TTY support or offer TTY emulating software a microphone and speakers Some software and modems desktop or portable computers to function as a TTY telephone lines or over the Internet e g VoIP For such systems to comply with this requirement they must allow speech and TTY tones to be intermixed i e they must support VCO and HCO for both inbound and outbound calling and they must allow the microphone to be disabled For VolP systems use software or transmission or configuration techniques that enable full access to telephone functions VoIP systems offer new possibilities for access to telephone functions by people with disabilities They can be made accessible using various software components or configurations For example some software applications can be loaded onto the telephone server and configured to achieve accessibility often without requiring any changes to the telephone hardware Other techniques are currently being developed that would allow every telephone in an organization to be instantly capable of text communication with and without voice carryover by simply installing a software prog
7. Yes No Requirement Number and Summary or N A Comments TTY Connections and Microphones Telecommunications products or systems that provide telephone functions i e 2 way voice communication and which do not themselves provide TTY functionality must provide a standard non acoustic connection point for TTYs Microphones must be capable of being turned on and off to allow the user to intermix speech with TTY use 81194 23 Provision a TTY Signal Protocols Telecommunications products that provide telephone functions i e 2 way voice communication must support all commonly used cross manufacturer nonproprietary standard TTY signal protocols 81194 23 Provision b Voice Mail Auto Attendant and Interactive Voice Response IVR Systems Voice mail auto attendant and interactive voice response telecommunications systems must be usable by TTY users with their TTYs 81194 23 Provision c Time Interval Alerts for IVR Systems Voice mail messaging auto attendant and interactive voice response telecommunications systems that require a response from a user within a time interval must give an alert when the time interval is about to run out and must provide sufficient time for the user to indicate more time is required 1194 23 Provision d Caller ID and Similar Functions Where provided Caller ID and other telephone function information that is available to other users of the same system must be provided to TTY users of tha
8. 3 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 3 4 Guiding Principles 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 18 Three overarching concepts that should always be considered when applying Section 508 Integrate multiple technical standards When functions span technical standards e g a Java application launched from a Web browser the provisions for keyboard access color etc must be as consistent as possible Since a Java application is software the provisions of two standards Software Applications and Operating Systems Web based Intranet and Internet Information and Applications apply Both usability and accessibility are best achieved when user interfaces follow best practices in a consistent manner Consider both information itself and authoring tools that create information For some software products specifically development environments e g Dreamweaver for websites or Eclipse as a Java development environment there are two separate issues a X Accessibility of the tool itself b Accessibility of the output that the tool generates For some high end complex tools usage in the authoring mode may not be fully compliant and a legitimate exception may be made For the output of all tools text files HTML pages Java applications accessibility is mandatory Consider all available techniques for access For more complex EIT solutions Section 508 includes the following techniques to use to achieve compliance a Assis
9. Overview TTY Connection and Microphones Provision 1194 23a E Rationale E Techniques m Testing E Heferences 153 7 1 4 154 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide TTY Signal Protocols Provision 1194 23b Voice Mail Auto Attendant and Interactive Voice Response IVR Systems Provision 1194 23c Time Interval Alerts for IVR Systems Provision 1194 23d Caller ID and Similar Functions Provision 1194 23e Volume Control Provision 1194 23f Automatic Volume Reset Provision 1194 23g Hearing Aid Compatibility Provision 1194 23h Minimized Interference Provision 1194 23i Transmission Conducting Information Provision 1194 23 Controls and Keys Provision 1194 23k Checklist Introduction to Telecommunications Accessibility While looking at telecommunications barriers it is helpful to understand the challenges that people with various disabilities face in using telephone functions voice mail auto attendant interactive voice response IVR systems and other covered technologies The need for a solution to these challenges resulted in the development of specific telecommunications product accessibility standards in Section 508 Here is a summary of those challenges People with hearing disabilities are typically faced with challenges such as E Lack of adequate TTY connections and signal support m Interference with hearing technologies i e hearing aids E Lack of adequate volume con
10. Provides Postal Service technology and development standards for the design development use and maintenance of Section 508 compliant information technology systems Identifies and assigns the organizational roles and responsibilities necessary to ensure Postal Service compliance with Section 508 Designates a Section 508 Program Manager to lead the corporate wide section 508 initiative 2 2 Section 508 Program Manager Information Technology September 2004 The Section 508 Program Manager as designated by the VP CTO does the following a Coordinates overall activities undertaken by the Postal Service in guiding our response to Section 508 b Develops and disseminates Postal Service policies procedures and requirements related to achieving implementation of compliance with and institutionalization of Section 508 C Provides high level technical guidance on the Electronic Information Technology EIT accessibility standards 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Identifies functional organization stewardships that correspond to the following Section 508 technical specification standards in the following products and services areas 1 Software applications and operating systems 2 Web based intranet and Internet information and applications 3 Telecommunications 4 Video and multimedia 5 Self contained closed products 6 Desktop and portable computers Identifies functional orga
11. etc must be visually discernible and discernible either through touch or sound For example adding audio patterns such as ascending and descending pitch tones that indicate when a control is turned on or off would alleviate the problem of a person who is blind inadvertently pressing the locking or toggle controls Buttons that remain depressed when activated and switches with distinct positions may also meet this provision It should be noted that the rationale for physical access is also repeated in the desktop and portable computer standard discussed in Chapter 10 Desktop and Portable Computers of this handbook 942 Techniques 9 4 2 1 For Kiosks ITM Kiosk without full PC interface For kiosks that have no full PC functionality e g an ATM if a touch screen is used an accessible set of controls also must be provided a ITM Kiosk with full PC interface Some kiosk implementations are created by placing a PC in a kiosk enclosure Such implementations pose a challenge in that they provide access to operating system functions application functions and Web site access See section 9 2 above for details September 2004 241 9 4 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 9 422 For Copiers Printers Calculators and Fax Machines m COTS without PC interface For simple devices that have no interface via a connected PC either directly attached or on the network all functions must be controllable by controls and keys that
12. m Access Board International Telecommunications Union ITU Recommendation v 18 http www access board gov telecomm marketrep appendices v 18 htm m Access Board Using a TTY http www access board gov publications usingAT T Y A2 html Telecommunications http Wwww trace wisc edu docs 2002 508 collation index shtml style default telecomm E Telecommunications Industry Association Inc TIA Standards related to TTYs http www tiaonline org standards search cfm keyword TTY Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 4 1 m ANSI TIA 825 A 2003 Standard A Frequency Shift Keyed Modem for Use on the Public Switched Telephone Network http www tiaonline org standards search results2 cfm document nozTIA9 962D825962DA Gallaudet University s Technology Access Program V 18 New Modem Standard with TTY Capacity http tap gallaudet edu v18 htm E Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions TTY Forum htto www atis org atis tty ttyforum htm E FCC Order Federal government must provide toll free telecommunication relay service TRS Access htto www fcc gov Bureaus Common_Carrier Orders 2000 fcc00056 txt E FCC Order Wireless cellular providers must be able to transmit 911 calls made from TTYs http www fcc gov Bureaus Common_Carrier Orders 2000 fcc00436 txt m Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Telecommunications Products 1194 23 Updated June
13. m he Telecommunications Act of 1996 http www access board gov about Telecomm Act htm m he Television Decoder Circuitry Act of 1990 http www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 24 decoderact htm World Wide Web Consortium s list of SMIL Players htto www w3 org Audio Video SMIL September 2004 209 8 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 8 3 Television Tuners and Secondary Audio Playback Circuitry Television tuners including tuner cards for use in computers must be equipped with secondary audio program playback circuitry Section 508 Provision 81194 24b 8 31 Rationale Whereas section 8 2 addresses the reception decoding and display elements necessary to display captions this requirement addresses elements of televisions displays and computer monitors that are required to play secondary audio programs tracks that can be encoded in video or multimedia This requirement does not address the techniques used to author or encode the secondary audio in the video or multimedia itself see section 8 5 Most new TVs and computer tuner cards PEE include a feature called Multi channel vm NS Television Sound MTS The standard television broadcast contains three audio channels the right stereo left stereo and secondary audio program SAP MTS includes the secondary audio program SAP playback circuitry so that it can receive and display all three The SAP channel can contain alternative audio such
14. For Kiosks E ITM Kiosk without full PC interface For kiosks that have no full PC functionality e g an ATM the device should not only allow user input with limited mobility but should also include a headset jack that provides speech output of all screen instructions data and key press locations Handbook AS 508 A Self Contained Closed Products 9 2 3 m ITM Kiosk with full PC interface Some kiosk implementations are created by placing a PC in a kiosk enclosure Such implementations pose a challenge in that they provide access to operating system functions application functions and Internet access These systems can have assistive technology software speech synthesis screen magnification voice recognition installed However they are not configured for a specific person with a specific disability as is the case of a personal workstation allocated to a specific Postal Service employee Their public multi user access makes disability specific configuration difficult One solution is to add a large print and voice output menu selection at the start of each session The menu would be similar to the language choice menu on ATMs which enables the user to select an assistive device configuration for the session 9 222 For Copiers Printers Calculators Fax Machines m COTS without PC interface For simple Commercial Off The Shelf devices that have no interface via a connected PC either directly attached to the device or ind
15. General Use SoundS entry if you want Windows to ger warnings when your system makes a sound cae Sounds sent to the internal PC speaker An example of the audio accessibility options Sound in the Windows XP control panel This control panel allows the user to set two kinds of preferences for audio accessibility allowing software applications to convey information visually rather than by sound alone The first preference Use SoundSentry supports operating system visual indicators or cues when any sound is generated by the system The possible visual indicators are a flashing of the active caption bar the active window or the entire desktop The second preference Use ShowSounds supports an operating system function that allows software applications to display captions textual information for the speech and sounds they make With the ShowSounds accessibility feature it is up to the software application to determine the current ShowSound setting and how to respond appropriately The SoundSentry on the other hand automatically provides a visual indicator for all 5 3 2 4 Testing 52 Manual inspection based testing using the methods described in this chapter must accompany any automated tests Some of these manual tests may be automated using testing tools or Integrated Development Environment IDE features as long as testing occurs in the context of usage by assistive technology users C
16. W UNITED STATES P POSTAL SERVICE Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Handbook AS 508 A September 2004 Transmittal Letter A Purpose Using technology to enhance value is an integral part of the Postal Service s Transformation Plan As we increase our reliance on electronic information systems to help us manage information and costs improve service and carry out our mission more efficiently we have an even greater responsibility to provide full access for our customers our employees and those with whom we do business This handbook provides the tools to help each of us do that All functional organizations should use the information in this handbook to understand achieve and maintain Section 508 compliance By achieving the goals of this law we fulfill our mission of binding the nation together in the 21st century This is a technical reference guide in support of Handbook AS 508 It breaks out the details of each of the sections of that handbook and how they are tied to the law B Scope Providing access to electronic forms of Postal Service information products and services is both efficient and economic The techniques in this handbook have an effect on employees customers suppliers and business partners Given the broad scope of the 508 law and its pervasive impact on information technology collaborative efforts are needed to successfully achieve organization wide compliance Consequently the audience for this
17. When Developing or Maintaining an EIT Solution When the Postal Service develops a new system the design must include Section 508 accessibility as an explicit requirement For maintenance to existing systems the enhancement and modification requirements must also include improvement in access for people with disabilities To achieve these goals the Postal Service does the following a Assesses the requirements to identify the applicable Section 508 standards b Includes Section 508 requirements for the people who are involved in the design process to insure the inclusion of these requirements in the relevant ISM steps exhibit 4 5 2 C Verifies solution accessibility with appropriate methodologies including using assistive technology during the development and acceptance testing phases Complex Systems Many business solutions are complex and often combine commercial off the shelf COTS products custom code by a supplier custom code by Postal Service developers and content from various sources In comprehensive technology solutions more than one technical standard may apply An obvious example is e learning The table below shows the diverse functions enabled by various technology mechanisms for the creation of instructional material and access to education services 23 Exhibit 4 2 5 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Example of Complex Business Solution Involving Various Section 508 Standards Software and
18. gt 131 25 lt td gt lt td header al0 a3 5218 00 td td header al0 a4 572 00 td lt td gt 421 25 lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt b gt Totals lt b gt lt td gt lt td gt 196 27 lt td gt lt td gt 442 00 lt td gt lt td gt 162 00 lt td gt lt td gt 800 27 lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt September 2004 125 6 7 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 6 7 2 2c Example of a Complex Table Figure C Complex table The following is an example of a complex table This example does not have HTML code provided but instead illustrates how tables can have multiple headings 6 7 3 Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable E For data tables ensure that all of the relevant data row headers and column headers have been properly tagged and can be interpreted correctly E For data tables test the tables with JAWS to ensure that they read logically left to right and top to bottom and that the content reads in the same order as intended by the author a Ensure that layout tables contain proper summary attributes or CAPTION tags e g this table is for layout o
19. lt body gt ed hrefs chart html title Description of Toll Fees Pie Chart gt D lt a gt lt img src ScreenSnapshots DlinkGraphic gif alt Toll Fees by vehicle types for 1997 gt lt br gt br img src ScreenSnapshots starl gif alts style width 18px height 18px Trucks up from 10 percent over last years figures br lt body gt lt html gt 6 2 25 Appropriate Use of Blank Alternates The example in Figure B in exhibit 6 2 2 4 also shows the proper use of the blank alt attribute The code illustrates how images used in Web content that may have no real meaning should be tagged with a blank alt attribute in the image tag Make sure that you do not put a blank space between the quotation markes in the a t attribute 110 Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 3 1 6 2 3 Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory as it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable m Manually test for valid HTML markup E Use automated tools to test for valid HTML markup E Mouse over the image to verify that descriptive text appears for each image m Ensure that images not used for comprehension and navigation used for
20. means that the keys are locatable and distinguishable from the product surface and adjacent keys by touch through use of various shapes spacing or tactile markings The normal desktop computer keyboard for example would meet this provision because the tactile marks on the j and P keys permit a user to locate all other keys tactilely from these landmarks and the edges of the keyboard In addition the physical spacing of the function num pad and cursor keys make them easy to locate by touch Many telephones also have a raised dot on the number 5 button enabling them to orient their fingers around the 12 keys Because touch is necessary to discern tactile features this provision requires keyboards to allow exploration by touch that will not automatically activate a function based on mere contact Fortunately most keyboards require some pressure on individual keys in order to enable a keystroke Therefore capacitance keyboards would not meet this provision because they react as soon as they are touched and have no raised marks or actual keys They may not react at all when touched by a person with a prosthesis A membrane keypad with keys that must be pressed can be made tactilely discernible by separating keys with raised ridges so that individual keys can be distinguished by touch At this time some telecommunications products with touchscreens and other contact sensitive controls do not conform with this provision For example
21. 11 1 1 eol fT cen ete son Oot een pee Gist a isla te Sob Ba E Soe aoe Sete a eich eos Baha 277 i122 OUI accross ce es aera ed ek ed ee oe he areca ees 277 11 1 2 1 Technology ccc ee RI IIR III nnn 277 11 1 2 2 Audience s oe seen oct ena Late ob cat 8 der top Gee had Home a sana ha Gene oh pune Ga hee da ee 278 1 1 9 Situcture and USE casos sab cencdeneekeudcdendtdsrdcdsedess be ebacssanee cde 278 11 1 4 Introduction to Information Documentation and Support Service Accessibility 279 11 1 5 General Requirements 0 0 c cc ene erras 279 11 1 6 Testing for Compliance 0 cee eee eee nee e nena 280 11 2 Provide Support Documentation in Alternate Formats 0 0000 cece eee eee eee 280 11 2 1 BLS pe ee ee ee ee ee 280 Wie22 TecnniQleS essa IOS PS EP E aroni tr eiert eye Eere a erea erea TE PUT TRO 281 11 2 2 1 For Purchased Products Evaluate Whether Documentation Can Be Provided in Alternate Formats 0 0 0 cece ee eee eens 281 11 2 2 2 For Developed Products Provide All Documentation on Alternate Formats 281 Xvi Handbook AS 508 A Contents uL EEMMI CO OPORTET uu AGTEN T eire ea a E ce ee a eee 11 3 Provide Access to a Description of Accessibility Features lesus 11 3 1 aculeis rrr D MEE eineU MECNLREREERTRTETRSORTRS m 11 3 2 1 For Purchased Products Evaluate Whether Description of Accessibility Features Can Be Provided in Alternate Forma
22. 202 8 1 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide software self contained etc specific requirements in other chapters of this handbook may also apply For example an animated element found on a Web page that does not include any audio must comply with the Animation requirement in Chapter 6 Web Based Information and Applications Note You may need to synchronize general and specific requirements in this chapter with requirements in other chapters in this handbook For example video and multimedia accessed via internal or external Postal Service Web sites must also comply with the requirements stated in Web Based Information and Applications Video or multimedia products that are embedded in software applications or that run on self contained platforms or in kiosks may require synchronization with other chapters Audience This chapter applies to all personnel who purchase or develop video or multimedia products for the Postal Service i e Postal Service employees suppliers contractors and business partners Video or multimedia products include information technology solutions of all scope and magnitude consisting of simple or complex purchases or development that span other technical areas and all associated data information training material and documents Structure and Use Each part of this chapter describes the specific requirements that support one or more provisions in the technical standards for video a
23. Accessibility While looking at desktop and portable computer barriers it is helpful to understand the challenges that people with various disabilities face in using computers covered by the requirements in this chapter The need for a solution to these challenges resulted in the development of specific desktop and portable product accessibility standards in Section 508 These challenges vary by type of physical impairment gm People who are deaf or who have hearing impairments are typically faced with challenges such as E Lack of visual counterparts for audio features including various sounds and spoken text E Lack of visual or tactile status indicators for locking or toggle controls or keys Handbook AS 508 A Desktop and Portable Computers 10 1 5 People who are blind or who have visual impairments are typically faced with challenges such as Lack of tactile identifiers that help them locate identify and use keys and controls used for input and operation of a computer product Lack of tactile or audio based status indicators for locking or toggle controls or keys Lack of alternative input methods for interaction with touchscreen interfaces Dexterity or mobility impaired persons are typically faced with challenges such as Inaccessible computer keys and controls including ones that require tight grasping pinching or twisting Lack of adjustable key repeat features Lack of visual tactile or audio based s
24. DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Frameset EN http www w3 org TR html4 frameset dtd 6 8 3 Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable x Ensure that there is a meaningful page title for HTML pages that contain the lt FRAMESET gt tag m Ensure that every lt FRAMESET gt tag has a meaningful title m Ensure that every lt FRAME gt tag has a meaningful title m Test the non frame version or alternative format provided to verify that it has the same functionality 6 8 4 References The following references are provided for more information on this topic but must not be used in place of the Postal Service guidelines given above If these references conflict with the above techniques you must defer to the Postal guidelines n http www w3 org TR WCAG10 HTML TECHS frame names m Postal Service accessible frames FAQs http blue usps gov 508web FramesHelp html E Alternatives to frames htto www w3 org TR WCAG10 HTML TECHS falt frames m HTML version information including frameset DTDs htto www w3 org T R htm 4 struct global html version info 128 Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guid
25. DigiBeta DVCPro or DVD Where Possible Include Audio Descriptions for Mission Critical or Public Live Events Where possible e g where events are scripted ahead of time where technologies are available include audio descriptions for video or multimedia presentations used in live events that are organized or sponsored by the Postal Service and that are open to the general public The audio descriptions serve as a text equivalent for those portions of the visual presentation required for comprehension of the content In some cases i e when events are well scripted and planned in advance audio descriptions can be provided using technology systems that offer remote transmission of audio via radio or phone lines satellite feeds or fiber optics Usually such audio descriptions will be authored by describers people who are especially skilled in capturing narration key ambient sounds and visually significant elements of presentations These describers employ court reporter equipment or speech to communicate visually significant elements of presentations in real time However describers usually need to review the video production and make extensive notes before they begin Audio descriptions do not necessarily involve technology per se Two examples describe such nontechnological approaches to audio description E During video teleconferences or webcasts where presenters use several visual aids consider providing an additional pers
26. Documents must be constructed so that the user does not need style sheets to interpret the content of the Web page This does not prohibit the use of style sheets Section 508 Provision 1194 22d Rationale If not organized properly style sheets may make it difficult for Web pages to be read accurately in browsers that do not support style sheets or in a browser in which a user has disabled support for style sheets Visually impaired users may disable or overwrite style sheets so that the font size colors or contrast of the Web content is easier to read otyle should affect the visual makeup of the document without affecting content When considering the use of a table for page content layout consider creating a style sheet instead When Web content combines CSS with HTML layout you must test both the accessibility of the content as developed and as modified by simulated user enabled style sheets The information conveyed must be understood when viewing the document without the associated style sheet Techniques Design So That Alternate Style Sheets Can Be Applied Arrange style commands so that the contents make sense when read in the correct order without the associated style sheets Make sure that the web content is useable when the style sheets have been disabled in the browser or the user has elected to activate their user developed style sheets If the content has changed or is not useable provide an alternative Web page in an
27. Long Description of Process Steps lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt hl style font weight normal span style font size 10pt gt This process describes the lt a href Administrative Steps administrative steps lt a gt lt a href Technical Steps gt technical steps lt a gt and lt a href Coding Process gt coding process lt a gt for canned and live requests lt span gt lt hl1 gt lt hl gt lt span style font size 10pt font family amp quot Times New Roman amp quot gt lt span gt lt h1 gt lt h2 gt lt span style font size 10pt font family amp quot Times New Roman amp quot gt lt span gt lt a name Administrative Steps gt lt a gt Administrative Steps lt h2 gt ol 108 Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 2 2 4 Exhibit 6 2 2 3 p 3 Using Long Descriptions lt li gt Register lt li gt lt li gt Sign License Agreement of API Connector Code if desired lt li gt IisRun Canned Test from Test Server lt a href Technical Steps sFollow Technical Steps lt a gt lt br gt lt li gt lt li gt Call ICCC for Access to Production Server lt li gt lt li gt Run Live XML from Production Server lt a href Technical Steps gt Follow Technical Steps lt a gt lt br gt lt li gt lt ol gt lt h2 gt lt a name Technical Steps gt lt a gt Technical S
28. Name and title Name and title Date Name and title Date Date Handbook AS 508 A O Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 1 Overview September 2004 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 1 2 1 Contents This chapter contains the specific electronic and information technology EIT performance requirements related to the following subpart of Section 508 EIT Technical Standard 1194 21 Software Applications and Operating Systems Provisions a thru l Summary Technology The requirements in this chapter cover the following E All software applications and operating systems used by the Postal Service as defined by the Access Board regardless of size or whether purchased or developed internally Software applications refers to client server and locally installed software applications that do not use a Web based interface Web based information and applications are covered in Chapter 6 Web based Information and Applications All associated data information training material and documents related to those software applications and operating systems Note For applications that span more than one technical standard you may need to synchronize general and specific requirements in this chapter with requirements given in other chapters in this handbook For example client server application or application sub system functionality usually must also comply with the requirements stated in Chapter 6 Web Based Information and
29. Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Step 5 Evaluate and test products based on Section 508 standards Evaluation and selection activities are key components in positioning the Postal Service to meet its Section 508 compliance commitments In evaluating and testing products follow these guidelines Compare supplier responses that meet Section 508 requirements m Determine how to evaluate and test suppliers proposed solutions for compliance This varies depending on the complexity of the solution There are different ways in which proposed solutions can meet the requirements For information on exceptions and undue burdens see and 4 6 of this handbook i For products that do not fully conform a specific exception may be needed see m Conduct testing and evaluation which may include the following E Demonstrations by the supplier m Testing by the Postal Service or third party suppliers E Literature evaluation Proof of Compliance If your product provides at least one mode of operation and retrieval that does not need user vision hearing or fine motor skill or provides support using assistive technology it is compliant Step 6 Plan Delivery Before delivery of a solution an acceptance test is a standard procedure to verify that the supplier has met its contractual obligations The Postal Service can conduct and may require the contractor to perform Section 508 testing with multiple techniques See the resources
30. September 2004 285 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank 286 Handbook AS 508 A Appendix 11 A Information Documentation and Support Accessibility Questions Products that are freestanding nonportable and intended to be used in one location and which have operable controls must comply with the following requirements Standard Questions to Ask Notes Subpart D Information Documentation and Support Product support documentation provided Does the program come with to end users must be made available in documentation that is accessible to alternate formats upon request at no persons with disabilities additional charge End users must have access to a Can the vendor provide a description of description of the accessibility and accessibility features e g the VPAT compatibility features of products in alternate formats or alternate methods upon request at no additional charge Support services for products must Can the vendor provide a description of its accommodate the communication needs of accessibility features of all support end users with disabilities features September 2004 287 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank 288 Handbook AS 508 A
31. Spanish Spelling Engine 1998 2000 by SIGNUM C a Ltda Quito can be critical wnen needed for user su pport and Ecuador All rights reserved Microsoft Outlook Cipher Strength 128 bits Portions based on Entrust Security Technology Copyright 1994 1996 Northem Telecom Limited upgrade assistance The dialog box contains both Microsoft Internet Explorer Cipher Strength 128 bits Contains security software licensed from RSA Data Security Inc graphical and textual information including a FORA AED version number that is accessible to assistive william A Bill Curtis technologies USPS Product ID 54187 640 6851384 17346 Other key user interface objects that should be Warning This computer program is protected by copyright law and 3 tested for accessibility are startup or splash international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and System Info Screens and secu rity login d ialogs such as criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law password locked screensavers Tech Support Disabled Items 5 24 Make Information About Changed Images Accessible When system or application events cause an image to change automatically expose the information about the changed image to assistive technology Once this information is exposed the operating system can allow activa
32. accessible alternate format The following two examples show the use of style commands The first example is incorrect because it only uses horizontal positioning In the second example both horizontal and vertical positioning are used which leads to proper ordering of the sentence regardless of whether the style sheets are disabled Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 5 2 1 Exhibit 6 5 2 1a Example of an Incorrect Use of Style Sheets Figure A Screen capture of incorrectly formatted CSS Web content In this example if a user elected to use his or her own style sheets or if style sheets were disabled in the browser the sentence would read incorrectly the lazy dog lhe quick jumped over brown fox Figure B HTML code for Figure A lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt meta content text html charset ISO 8859 1 http equiv content type gt lt title gt Incorrect Use of Style Sheets Example lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt div class part4 gt the lazy dog lt div gt lt div Class partl gt The quick lt div gt lt div class part3 gt jumped over lt div gt lt div class part2 brown fox lt div gt lt body gt lt html gt September 2004 115 6 5 2 1 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 6 5 2 1b Example of Style Sheets Used Co
33. accessible to people with disabilities If there are special needs that are required by the particular Postal Service implementation alternate formats or access methods can be specified as an additional deliverable at time of purchase All published support material must be provided in an appropriate accessible format and descriptions of how to access the support materials must be readily accessible Adhere to the requirements for Web based information in chapter 6 for documentation provided via the Internet or Web Adhere to the requirements for telecommunications products for telephone based support services live and IVR For Developed Products All Support Services Must Be Accessible to People with Disabilities For developed products ensure that all product support services regardless of type are accessible to people with disabilities All published support material must be provided in an appropriate accessible format and descriptions of how to access the support materials must be readily accessible Adhere to the requirements for Web based information in chapter 6 for documentation provided via the Internet or Web Adhere to the requirements for telecommunications products for telephone based support services live and IVR Testing a Inspect the product or evaluate the supplier s VPAT or similar statement that describes how the product in question s support services support people with disabilities Make sure that the suppor
34. center td td header row2 header4 gt lt center gt 41 00 center td td header row2 header5 gt lt center gt 51 00 center td td header row2 header6 center 72 00 center td lt tr gt lt tr gt td id row3 gt lt center gt 2 lt center gt lt td gt td header row3 header2 center 31 00 center td td header row3 header3 center 34 00 center td td header row3 header4 gt lt center gt 41 00 center td td header row 3 header5 gt lt center gt 65 00 center td td header row 3 header6 gt lt center gt 87 00 center td lt tr gt lt tr gt td id row4 gt lt center gt 3 lt center gt lt td gt September 2004 121 6 7 2 1 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 6 7 2 1 p 2 Example of a Simple Table Using the header and id Attributes lt td header row 4 header2 gt lt center gt 42 00 center td lt td header row 4 header3 gt lt center gt 53 00 center td lt td header row 4 header4 gt lt center gt 60 00 center td lt td header row 4 header5 gt lt center gt 80 00 center td lt td header row 4 header6 gt lt center gt 102 00 lt center gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt Exhibit 6 7 2 1b Example of a Simple Table Using the scope Attribute The following graphic is a scr
35. chapter individuals with disabilities must be provided equivalent access to video and multimedia content through an alternate format or access method An alternate format or access method must be equivalent in content and functionality to the primary video or multimedia source and it must be updated concurrently with the primary source Alternate formats and alternate access methods must be made available at no additional charge Electronic alternate formats should be considered as the first preference for comparable video or multimedia content These electronic alternate formats must be made available to participants in a timely manner distributed either via the Internet or the Postal Service Intranet E For Postal Service sites on the Internet electronic alternate formats are restricted to HTML plain text or rich text format RTF files m For the Postal Service intranet the electronic alternate format may also be one of the native formats used by the Postal Service for its standard suite of office products e g Microsoft Word Excel and PowerPoint When live events organized or sponsored by the Postal Service are open to the general public any included video and multimedia productions or live presentations must include captions Real time captions must be integrated and synchronized with the video stream where TV or satellite broadcasts are included Even so interpreting services may still be required Live presentations that do
36. e g Sun s Java Access Bridge Microsoft Active Accessibility window messaging off screen model etc to provide object information to accessibility aids The information that must be provided by objects includes name location type associated values parent control logical order for navigation and event notifications such as focus gain or loss Provide flexibility in using a variety of input methods e g keyboard or mouse and output methods e g color sound images or text Query accessibility aids in use by the operating system and configure the software applications automatically For example a Microsoft Windows application can check Windows system information i e SystemParameterlnfo to determine when a Handbook AS 508 A ooftware Applications and Operating Systems 5 2 1 5 1 6 screen reader is in use i e SPI GETSCREENREADER Windows will also invoke a message when system information is changed so that the software can be reconfigured Finally Postal Service employees are required to register all software applications and operating systems in the Enterprise Information Repository EIR at hito eir This information will be used to report compliance and includes any related Section 508 noncompliance issues Testing for Compliance When testing software applications for compliance it is important to be aware that a software application can include only functionality that is supported by the operating sys
37. e g when the fingerprint scanner ceases to work properly or when users have a temporary disability such as a broken hand that is in a cast i A portable computer uses voice commands to allow users to activate key applications such as a contact database or calendar As an alternative to the voice commands the user can enter input using the computer keyboard Testing a Inspect the product to identify if the biometric control provides a function allowing access as specified in terms of operation with limited vision hearing or mobility b If an exception was taken when procuring a device that is not fully accessible define the alternate format or alternate method needed to provide equivalent access to people with disabilities who can not readily use the device References The following references apply to the specific requirements stated in this section m Biometrics Resource Center Website at the National Institute for Standards and Technolog http www Itl nist gov div895 biometrics m Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Self Contained Closed Products 1194 25 http www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 25 htm Handbook AS 508 A Self Contained Closed Products 9 6 2 1 m Open Directory Project Biometrics Links http dmoz org Computers Security Biometrics 9 6 Auditory Output September 2004 9 6 1 9 6 2 9 6 2 1 When products provide auditory output the audio sign
38. eir lf a telecommunications product contains software applications they may be subject to EIR requirements This information will be used to report compliance and includes any related Section 508 noncompliance issues 716 Testing for Compliance When testing telecommunications products for compliance it is crucial to be aware of the end user environment This includes an understanding of a product s stated accessibility features assistive technologies typically used such as a TTY in addition to the product s input compression transmission storage and output methods Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by people with disabilities and assistive technology users If automated testing tools or integrated development environment IDE features are available to help automate these methods they can be used but must be accompanied by manual testing For example a developer can use IDE tools to test for valid syntax e g compression schema input output format or signal quality etc but a manual inspection must still be done to validate semantics and proper rendering In other words the meaningfulness i e quality of the output must also be considered for end users who may have a disability or who may use assistive technology such as a TTY or a hearing aid 156 Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 2 1 7 2 TTY Connections and Microphones Septem
39. http www trace wisc edu world Java Java htm 135 6 12 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 6 12 Plug ins and Applets 6 12 1 6 12 2 Exhibit 6 12 2 Example of an Applet Provide a link to a plug in or applet that complies with the Access Board s standard 36 CFH 1194 21 Software Applications and Operating Systems if a Web page requires an applet plug in or other application to be present on the client system to interpret page content If the results of an applet or plug in cannot be accessed by the assistive technology or if a meaningful message cannot be conveyed through the results of assistive technology provide an alternate format or access method Section 508 Provision 81194 22m Rationale Web browsers may not have specific plug ins necessary to view the content format Users needing to install a plug in may not have the file permissions needed to complete the installation of the required plug in Plug ins that provide information that is not essential to the understanding or navigation of the Web content can still be used and do not need an equivalent alternate format or access method Provide enough information directly in the Web content or in attribute tags to indicate that the information is not essential Techniques Use the alt attribute to provide a text description for applets Create a hyperlink to information for downloading the correct plug in next to the object that requires a plug in a
40. ismap gt lt a gt lt map name worldmap gt lt area shape rect coords 43 39 63 81 href http www southamerica com alt SouthAmerica gt area shape rect coords z 22 9 49 36 href http www northamerica com alt NorthAmerica gt lt area shape rect coords 73 26 105 67 href http www africa com alt e Arrica s lt areashape rect coords z 131 51 156 70 href http www australia com alt Australia gt lt area shape default nohref gt lt map gt Hot spots located in a server side image map must have redundant text links Exhibit 6 6 2b Example of a Server Side Image Map With Redundant Text Links The following code is an example of a server side image map lt a href img imgmapl map gt lt img src imgmapl gif alt Please use the following links instead of this imagemap ismap gt lt a gt lt br gt lt br gt a href a htm Section A lt a gt a href b htm Section B lt a gt lt a href c htm Section C a a href d htm Section D a a href e htm gt Section E lt a gt 118 Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 7 1 6 6 3 6 6 4 6 7 Tables September 2004 6 7 1 Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive tech
41. level E A caution on the use of the volume reset override switch must be included in the users manual 179 7 8 2 3 180 7 8 2 3 7 8 3 7 8 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide m The telephone must include a warning printed in Braille that can be securely attached to the back of the handset or if the telephone has only a headset above the dial buttons to indicate that a high volume setting may be engaged Provide Visual Indicator of Volume Setting Where possible and practical telecommunications products that provide telephone functions and that allow a user to adjust the volume must provide a visual indicator of volume setting that can be read before picking up the handset This is especially important in telephones that use the push of a button to increase volume via software internal to the telephone This display design contrasts with telephones which use dials slides or other mechanical volume controls that can be easily viewed Testing a Conduct an inspection of the telecommunication product to determine if it provides receive volume control b Amplify the volume then verify that the volume level automatically resets after use with amplification b Determine the default volume level and assess if the receive volume returns to default after use d Determine if the product has a feature to allow the user to override the automatic reset of volume level If it does ensure that the product has
42. one tape May have built in caption decoders if not must add on or provide alternate format access method Must have built in caption decoders for closed captioning must be user selectable Must provide captioning support must be user selectable description where possible in primary audio track and captions Closed audio description must be user selectable Provide open audio description where possible in primary audio track and captions may provide both audio described and non described versions on one tape Hardware may not include SAP playback circuitry in tuner card if not you must provide open audio descriptions or alternate format access method Must include SAP playback circuitry must be user selectable Must provide SAP or equivalent channel playback must be user selectable Alternate Formats amp Access Methods Optional provide if needed Optional provide if needed Optional provide if needed You must provide if no caption decoder or SAP playback is available in the hardware Optional provide if needed Optional provide if needed 229 Appendix 8 B Delivery Mechanism or Component Mission Critical live events that present video or multimedia content except for taped content Mission critical pre produced multimedia productions regardless of how delivered e g Web CD ROM DVD software application etc 230 Captioning Audio De
43. p lt gt closed products px Web based inane amp Interret Desktop Porlables I i Software apps 5 THO mimi cations irfesrallen Operating Sysers Documentation amp Suppor Finally when the technical standards and functional performance criteria can not be fully met Section 508 provides for exceptions In most cases when an exception is taken the law requires that we provide an alternate format or access method to information and data 1 3 Compliance September 2004 1 31 Importance of Compliance Compliance with Section 508 requirements does the following a Demonstrates our commitment to implementing business practices that make our IT based products and services accessible to our employees and customers with disabilities b Reinforces the worldwide reputation of the Postal Service as a trusted provider of communications for all people Enhances business opportunities Avoids costly litigation e Improves overall usability of our information resources 1 3 2 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 4 Scope 1 4 1 1 4 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Monitoring Department of Justice The Department of Justice monitors Federal agency and Postal Service compliance with Section 508 requirements Postal Service As directed by the Postmaster General the Chief Technology Officer leads the Postal Service s compliance effort through the institutionalization of Section 508 policy procedures and requireme
44. relay that information without referring to color Use colors and shades that have sufficient contrast Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable Test the content without colors by viewing it with a monochrome monitor or changing the color scheme i e change to High Contrast White Control Panel Display Appearance Scheme High Contrast White E Ensure that the Web content information can be viewed when using high contrast appearance settings e g white on black E Print the page onto a black and white printer and review References The following references are provided for more information on this topic but must not be used in place of the Postal Service guidelines above If these references conflict with the above techniques you must defer to the Postal Service guidelines m htto www w3 org T R WCAG10 TECHS tech color convey a Web Computer Color Chart for the Colorblind htto www toledo bend com colorblind colortable html 113 6 5 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 6 5 Style Sheets 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 5 2 1 114 Documents must be organized so that they are readable without an associated style sheet
45. savior da o is oa oae Ao Aa e d a c e ea ine 9 7 Voice Output in a Public Area llllllelleeleeeeeee rrr 9 7 1 Rationale 9 7 2 eii P T TTPTPPPTTTPTTPTPT 9 7 3 eca e EE EEE EAEE E E EEE EEEE E ee eat EAEN 9 7 4 References 0 ee eee ee eee e eee e eee ses 9 8 Color COGIIG cas 2 90 date sd dant daa ERA qu E PR REGES PERS RET Rd Pda HCM ans 9 8 1 Rationale wane scene acoenscene RUTPRTETERREREATESEE PETENS CERE PETER EE QU UTU TE 9 8 2 Techn eS xu aad gn Nodes gyros dca dde gracie deduc ara vede n ce Ede my od om a odas aures dem ded 9 8 3 TESLA aces mreana iu E odes ied PRESIDE PEE SD PEIUS IDE PEE PREIS RENE 9 8 4 FRETCIENCES c unused de d ORC eee RICO gore CRGO RR REGI ORC o e doc oce de 9 9 Range Of Color Selections 0 0 ce eee rn 9 9 1 Rationale ucssweuautunpscpyradRhuusespraeeiededdravibcgesqvmaui gp esqqpasd d red Rn 9 9 2 MACNN uM 9 9 3 WESUAG 652 PPUUUTTMmITMTMPERSETT 9 9 4 FRETOTSIICOS ceu euo ardeat dac E N ANEN S ANARA stags pop Cast dign 9 10 screen Flickering lt cvexdcgesededsecantddued diate dint bsc doe ERR and ae Foe Ran 9 10 1 PLU OV VNC C 9 10 2 Techniques ccc eee eee eee hn 2710 0 UCSC coii Eher Hoe Euro ees Ad dd ees ewes E aw ks este ee ee ues 210 RETE RNERQOTEITOTTIQ OTIO TOT TTL 9 11 Operable Controls on Freestanding Non Portable Devices less
46. the primary Web page site application information links or data Section 508 Provision 81194 22k September 2004 149 Appendix 6 A oection 508 Technical Reference Guide 150 Yes No or Requirement Number and Summary N A Comments Scripting Languages When pages use scripting languages to display content or to create interface elements the script must provide meaningful text that can be read by assistive technology If an accurate message cannot be conveyed by the results of the script provide an equivalent alternate format or access method Section 508 Provision 81194 22l Plug ins and Applets Provide a link to a plug in or applet that complies with the Access Board s standard 36 CFR 1194 21 Software Applications and Operating Systems if a Web page requires an applet plug in or other application to be present on the client system to interpret page content If the results of an applet or plug in cannot be accessed by the assistive technology or if a meaningful message cannot be conveyed through the results of assistive technology provide an alternate format or access method Section 508 Provision 1194 22m Forms When electronic forms are designed to be completed online the form must allow access via assistive technologies to information field elements and functionality e g associated controls required to complete review revise and submit the form including directions and cues Section 508 Prov
47. 1 When software applications are designed to run on a system that has a keyboard software application functions must be executable from a keyboard if the function itself or the result of performing the function can be identified or labeled with text Section 508 Provision 1194 21a Rationale Keyboard access is essential for those who cannot use a mouse or another method to interact with a computer People who are unable to see the screen or accurately control and use a mouse must be able to use the keyboard to access menus toolbars windows and dialogs controls and other software application and operating system user interface elements 41 5 2 2 Exhibit 5 2 2 1 Example of Keyboard Access to a Menu 5 2 2 5 2 2 1 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Operating system platforms use standard keyboard access keys and key combinations called keyboard equivalents which must be provided for in software applications Keyboard access to controls must be provided in a logical order that makes sense to people who are visually impaired Visually impaired users often explore window controls sequentially instead of scanning an entire window as sighted users would Therefore the contents of all application windows and dialogs must also be understandable by people who are visually impaired Techniques Provide Keyboard Access to Menus Provide the ability to navigate to and select each menu and menu item with standard
48. 1194 Subpart 1194 3 a b Purchases of EIT acquired by a supplier incidental to a contract C Purchases of EIT to be located in spaces frequented only by service personnel for maintenance repairs or occasional monitoring of equipment Specific Exceptions These exceptions typically occur when no existing product that best meets the business requirements of the Postal Service is fully compliant In these cases the market research documents that show no fully compliant technology solution is available will provide an explanation for the purchase of a noncompliant solution Heasons for a specific exception include the following a Purchases of EIT that are less compliant than other EIT available in the commercial marketplace but that meet all the accessibility standards that can be met within the deadline required by the Postal Service b Orders of noncompliant EIT against indefinite delivery contracts or ordering agreements that already have appropriate exception documentation in the contract file C Purchases of noncompliant EIT when no compliant EIT is available in the commercial marketplace Since the goal of Section 508 is to produce an environment in which data and information are available to disabled citizens and government employees the Postal Service views specific exceptions as temporary The long term goal is continual improvement to achieve full compliance Handbook AS 508 A Section 508 Postal Service
49. 2 1 When Display Mechanisms Do Not Support SAP Playback Include Open Audio Description on Taped Videos 0 cee ees 219 8 5 2 2 When Display Mechanisms Support SAP Playback Include Audio Description on Broadcast or Taped Videos llle 219 8 5 2 3 Where Possible Include Audio Descriptions for Mission Critical or Public LIVGIEVOUNS lt 2925040 mend isr iinr rinii ERRENA E es 220 8 5 2 4 Where Possible Include Audio Descriptions in Mission Critical Multimedia miele E eee eae heee see eees es 220 8 5 3 WO SUING eae 221 8 5 4 References 0 eese hn hh rh ns 222 8 6 User Selectable Captions or Audio Descriptions 0 cee ee eee 223 8 6 1 PROUON GIG 2 tte eo eee ea eae E ee oe ee ee ee eee eee eee eo 223 8 6 Techniques 0 eee eee 8 6 2 1 Offer Features for User Selection of Closed Captions 8 6 2 2 Offer Features for User Selection of Closed Audio Descriptions 859 T a E E T EEE EE TTE 8 6 4 Referentes MR nadie a aaa laa a Bet een i Tahia aa d Taia a aa i aahi aa 225 Appendix 8 A Postal Service Video and Multimedia Accessibility Checklist annann anaana naan 227 Appendix 8 B Summary of Video and Multimedia Delivery Methods and Requirements uuu seg er eer wey ceded Cee nnna 229 September 2004 xiii 9 xiv Self Contained Closed Products eee
50. 86 Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 12 2 5 September 2004 5 12 2 5 User Response Time and Timeouts Provide an option to adjust the response times on time sensitive forms instructions and timed software features Software applications often use timed features and timeouts for various security and business reasons However some users have relatively slow reaction times or difficulty using such timed features When a timed response is required the user must be alerted and given both a mechanism and sufficient time to indicate that they need additional time to complete the form For example if the business or security requirement is that an application should timeout after 15 minutes of inactivity then a couple of minutes before the timeout an alert must communicate the impending timeout to the user and ask if more time is needed If the user does not respond or indicates that no more time is needed the timeout can take place If the user elects to have more time in the timed application then there should be no timeout until the next cycle of inactive time prompts another timeout alert If the business and or security requirement is that a timed feature in a software application is only for a fixed session or time limit combined activity or inactivity then the situation is a bit more complex In this situation the user must be notified at the start of the session that the session will expire afte
51. Applications Software applications that include calls to video or multimedia or that are supersets of software that run on self contained platforms or in kiosks may require synchronization with other chapters When software applications are used to create informational output beyond direct interaction with the application itself e g reports data files dynamic forms or media objects this output must also be accessible to assistive technology users 37 0 1 2 2 38 5 1 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Audience This chapter applies to anyone who buys or develops software applications and operating systems for the Postal Service i e Postal Service employees suppliers contractors and business partners Software applications and operating systems include information technology solutions of all sorts consisting of simple or complex purchases or development of software applications operating systems and all associated data information training material and documents Structure and Use Each part of this chapter describes the specific requirements that support one or more provisions in the technical standards of software applications and operating systems The technical standards of Section 508 were written primarily from a technology perspective However the Postal Service has consolidated some provisions to help Postal Service employees and business partners understand Postal Service compliance requirements f
52. Applications http www iso org iso en CatalogueDetailPage CatalogueDetail CSNUMBER 22721 ISO 13714 is the most detailed of the three standards but also the narrowest It applies to voice mail and voice messaging specifically and cannot be applied in its entirety to IVR systems i Human Factors and Ergonomics Society HFES 200 5 Human Factors Engineering of Software User Interfaces Interactive Voice Response IVR and Telephony htto www atis org pub IVR HFES 200 5 paf E The Telephone Speech Standards Committee TSSC user interface guidelines for speech enabled business IVR applications htto oortal acm org citation cfm doid 360405 360435 TSSC is a relatively informal industry group consisting of representatives from companies developing speech enabled IVRs for business transactions The committee is developing standardizing terminology and definitions and set of common tasks across applications for which there will be standardized commands and prompts 7 6 Caller ID and Similar Functions September 2004 7 6 1 Where provided Caller ID and other telephone function information that is available to other users of the same system must be provided to TTY users of that system who may have visual impairments 1194 23 Provision e Rationale This provision addresses two different problems 1 how to make information that is normally presented on a display accessible to users who cannot see displays and 2 how t
53. Attribute The following is a screen shot of a complex table The code for the complex table immediately follows the screen shot and shows how to create categories using the axis attribute Figure A Screen shot of complex table using the axis attribute Travel Expense Report Meals Hotels Transport Subtotals San Jose D5 Aug 97 37 74 112 00 45 00 26 Aug 97 27 28 112 00 45 00 Subtotals 65 02 224 00 90 00 379 02 Seattle 27 Aug 97 96 25 109 00 36 00 28 Aug 97 35 00 109 00 36 00 ISubtetals 131 25 218 00 72 00 42125 T Totals 1 196 27 74 442 00 1852 00 162 00 B Bi zz Figure B HTML code for Figure A table border 1 summary This table summarizes travel expenses incurred during August trips to San Jose and Seattle gt lt caption gt Travel Expense Report lt caption gt lt tr gt lt th gt lt th gt th id a2 axis expenses gt Meals lt th gt th id a3 axis expenses gt Hotels lt th gt th id a4 axis expenses gt Transport lt th gt lt td gt lt b gt lt b gt Subtotals lt b gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt th id a6 axis location gt San Jose lt th gt th th th th th th lt td gt lt td gt e DE eL td id a7 axis date 25 Aug 97 td td header a6 a7 a2 gt 37 74 lt td gt td header a6 a7 a3 gt 112 00 lt td gt lt td header a6 a7 a4 45 0
54. Ensure That all Television Displays Include Secondary Audio Program SAP Playback Circuitry 0 0 ccc cee eens 211 8 3 2 2 Where Possible or for External Productions Use Stereo Production and Broadcast Equipment 0 ccc eee ene 211 8 3 2 3 Ensure That All Computer Media Players Support Open Standard Secondary Audio and Audiovisual Synchronization Methods 211 8 3 3 i E eels 212 xii Handbook AS 508 A Contents 8 3 4 aisi M MTRENETRRTETTE CETTE TTE OL TELLS 212 8 4 Captioning of Video and Multimedia Productions 0 0 00 anaana naene 213 8 4 1 SCC 213 8 4 2 Techniques 00 cece cece he he ren 8 4 2 1 When Display Mechanisms Support Closed Captioning Include Closed Captioning on Broadcast or Taped Videos 00 00 cee ees 8 4 2 2 When Display Mechanisms Do Not Support Closed Captioning Include Open Captions on Taped Videos 00 ces 215 8 4 2 3 Where Possible Include Real Time Captions for Mission Critical or mi UDNG OVS VCS D E 215 8 4 2 4 Include Captions in Mission Critical Multimedia Productions 215 8 4 3 uno 216 8 4 4 HOIBIOII COS euism tac SECAM ARE RREOEREAREE INANE SF RETE SEEMS REUS 217 8 5 Audio Description of Video and Multimedia Productions 0 ccc eee eee 218 8 5 1 alu MP rrT 218 8 5 2 eni P m 219 8 5
55. Forms that are available for download must have an associated text description that describes the form along with its number title and purpose Hemember to provide a link to the acrobat reader or plug in Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable Use the most recent version of JAWS in conjunction with the accessible version of Adobe Acrobat reader to test the tagged PDF file to determine whether the contents are in the logical read order intended by the author all information and links are accessible by JAWS and whether the file adheres to all other guidelines in this document E If additional revisions are needed fine tune the tags and test again until the tagged PDF file is both accessible with JAWS and compliant with the Postal Service Section 508 Web Accessibility Guidelines E Verify that the content of the alternate format or access method is equivalent with the content and functionality of the primary PDF file and is updated concurrently with the primary Web source Ensure that no information has been lost and that the meaning has remained the same References For more information on this topic please check the following links E
56. Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 6 1 6 5 3 6 5 4 Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable m Turn the style sheets off in the browser Ensure that all content can be understood and that it is in the same logical order as intended by the author E Create a blank style sheet and configure your browser to use this style sheet to override all non user defined style sheets Ensure that the resulting content can be understood using assistive technology and that it is in the same logical order as intended by the author References The following reference is provided for more information on this topic but must not be used in place of the Postal Service guidelines given above If these references conflict with the above techniques you must defer to the Postal Service guidelines E Style sheet organization htto www w3 org T R WCAG10 TECHS tech order style sheets 6 6 Image Maps 6 6 1 September 2004 Use client side image maps whenever possible in place of server side image maps Section 508 Provision 1194 22e Provide equivalent redundant text links for all server side image map hot
57. Multimedia http www section508 gov training docs audioDescChecklist doc Includes questions for evaluating suppliers materials to provide suppliers and quality control elements E American Foundation for the Blind Video Description in North America http www afb org info document view asp documentid 1231 E Apple Computer s Quicktime and SMIL Page http www apple com quicktime authoring qtsmil html u CPB WGBH National Center for Accessible Media Description FAQ htto ncam wgbh org dtv basics description html E CPB WGBH National Center for Accessible Media Media Access Generator MAGPie htto ncam wgbh org webaccess magpie a Department of Defense s Computer Electronic Accommodations Program Guidelines for Computer Aided Real Time Captioning CART http www tricare osd mil cap services services_acc_cart cfm m United Kingdom Office of Communications Ofcom Guidance on Standards for Audio Description http www itc org uk codes guidelines broadcasting tv sub sign audio audio description stnds Handbook AS 508 A Video and Multimedia Products 8 6 1 Joe Clark Media Access Comments on U K Guidelines for audio description http Joeclark org access description ukad html Macromedia Flash Player Home htto www macromedia com software flash Microsoft Windows Media Home Page http www microsoft com windows windowsmedia default aspx E Real Networks SMIL Basics Tutorial htto www realnetw
58. Relay Service TRS TRS is a service mandated under Title IV of the Americans with Disabilities Act which employs a live operator known as a communication assistant who facilitates the conversation between people using TTYs and those who are not using them Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 2 2 1 September 2004 7 2 2 1 2 2 1 Another aspect of this provision is a requirement that the microphone be capable of being turned on or off while using a TTY connection This requirement was necessary to ensure that a telephone system would not prevent a telephone mouthpiece microphone from working when a TTY was being used with the telephone For example if a cellular telephone s headset jack is connected directly to a TTY the microphone is sometimes disabled This prevents TTY users from using the VCO option since no voice input is possible unless the TTY is disconnected from the cellular telephone at which time the cellular telephone microphone returns to normal operation Techniques All Telephone Systems Must Provide TTY Connections All telephone handsets and systems regardless of device type must provide a standard nonacoustic connection for TTYs Individuals who use TTYs to communicate must have a nonacoustic way to connect TT Ys because acoustic only connectors have a high data error rate Handsets on many telephones do not fit well with many TTY acoustic couplers allowing interference from outside noise So
59. a Handbook EL 307 Reasonable Accommodation an Interactive Process htto www usps com cpim ftp hand el307 welcome htm Handbook AS 885 usps com Development Process amp Standards http blue usps gov cpim ftp hand as885 welcome htm Management Instruction AS 885 2004 15 Managing Web Sites on the Corporate Intranet http blue usps gov cpim ftp manage a885021 5 welcome htm 39 CFR 255 Access of Persons with Disabilities to Postal Service Programs Activities Facilities and Electronic and Information Technology htto www access gpo gov nara cfr waisidx_03 39cfr255_03 html Purchasing Manual htto www usps com cpim fto manuals om3 html welcome htm USPS Integrated Solutions Methodology http Ism usps gov pls ismprodnp page psite id 4 amp pnode id 1 U S Department of Justice A Guide to Disability Rights Laws http www usdoj gov crt ada cguide htm Handbook AS 508 A 2 Roles and Hesponsibilities This chapter describes the Postal Service roles and responsibilities related to complying with Section 508 legal requirements 2 1 Vice President Chief Technology Officer As designated by the Postmaster General The Vice President Chief Technology Officer VP CTO leads the Postal Service Section 508 effort The VP CTO does the following a Establishes a Postal Service information technology infrastructure that both responds to corporate business needs and enables compliance with requirements related to Section 508
60. accessible to assistive technology or which display an inappropriate standard cursor For the objects in question fix then retest using this procedure Conduct a manual inspection of the electronic form without assistive technology to verify that accommodations are made for time based responses input review and confirmation a Navigate through the electronic form user interface i e windows menus toolbars and controls to ensure that where a timed response is required the user is alerted and given a mechanism to indicate that more time is needed Navigate through the electronic form user interface i e windows menus toolbars and controls to ensure that users are given an option to review and confirm the input they have provided before submitting the form References National Cancer Institute 508 Tutorial n Forms htto usability gov web_508 tut n html Web Accessibility In Mind AIM Creating Accessible Forms htto www webaim org howto forms Sun Java Using Swing Components Examples 1 4 http Java sun com docs books tutorial uiswing components example 1 dot4 index html ButtonDemo Note Postal Service developers and purchasing agents are strongly urged to obtain updated references for application or operating system accessibility references when designing or purchasing Postal Service applications 91 92 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank Handboo
61. alert on a display could accompany the audible alert for the benefit of users with hearing disabilities If the alert is required for operation this requirement would satisfy the Functional Performance Criteria see section 4 2 1 September 2004 171 7 5 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 753 Testing a Examine the IVR product to identify all cases in which the product or service requires a response within a time interval b Conduct a performance evaluation of the IVR product or service For each case of a required response within a time interval check the following Does the system give an alert when the time interval is about to run out a Does the system allow the user to indicate that more time is required m Does the system provide sufficient time for the user to indicate that more time is required Does the system provide additional time as requested Use the checklists provided by the Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions Interactive Voice Response Accessibility Forum http inclusive com ivr access There are checklists for Voice IVR and TTY IVR Both checklists should be completed to verify compliance with this provision e Use the Human Factors and Ergonomics Society s Guidelines for Human Factors Engineering of Software User Interfaces Interactive Voice Response IVR and Telephony see Reference below These guidelines are compatible with ISO IEC IS
62. and output interactions that present accessibility challenges e g touch screens physical layout positioning Unlike personal customizable devices many products in this class of technology kiosks shared printers are used by the general public Since they cannot be customized such closed products must be designed with the needed accessibility features for all users E Given the functional disabilities of mobility hearing speech and vision Subpart C Functional Performance Criteria defines the general goal for all closed products as follows At least one mode of operation and information retrieval must be usable by a user with a disability B For self contained closed products to be accessible to blind people the law specifies audio output will be provided to an external headset jack Provision a clarifies that personal headsets for private listening are not assistive technology 231 9 1 2 1 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide m The following types of devices are named in the law 232 Information kiosks and information transaction machines Equipment used by the public to transact business without personal interaction The classic example of an information transaction machine is an ATM automated bank teller machine Banks have made considerable progress resulting from ADA legislation and consequent lawsuits in making ATM machines reasonably accessible Copiers Although early designs of copiers were
63. applications should avoid using color combinations that commonly are problematic for people who cannot differentiate between certain color combinations or who have other visual impairments Do not use the following color combinations green and red green and blue red and brown and white and light green Instead use color combinations that differ significantly in hue intensity and value and provide sufficient contrast September 2004 71 9 8 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 5 8 2 2 Selecting Appropriate Color Combinations Light Colors When developing the design of user interface sas Yellow elements designers can use the color wheel shown in Orange Violet Purple DELATE Figure A A color wheel that can be used to select appropriate color combinations User ID serctians neteam Password s 557 UserID section508team Password s st2 5 More Effective Figure B An appropriate color combination that provides sufficient contrast User ID sertianS steam Password LI sectionS08team User ID Password s 5 5 Less Effective Lancer Figure C An inappropriate color combination that does not provide sufficient contrast Figure A Combining dark hues from the bottom half of this color wheel with a lighter color from the top half of the wheel will generally result in a more effective color combination
64. are created e g softphones voice over IP etc E Telecommunications products that provide telephone functions include many components that are subject to the requirements in this chapter Customer premises equipment Equipment employed on the premises of the Postal Service including all headquarters and field operations Post Offices mail processing centers etc to originate route or terminate telecommunications Customer premises equipment includes all end user devices routers switches trunks channels call managers servers and software integral to such equipment used on the premises of the Postal Service Customer premises equipment is distinguished from equipment used by carriers referred to as telecommunications equipment see below September 2004 151 7 1 2 1 152 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Telecommunications equipment Equipment other than customer premises equipment used by a carrier to provide telecommunications services Telecommunications equipment includes all routers switches trunks channels call managers servers and software integral to such equipment used by the carrier E Telecommunications service The offering of telecommunications for a fee directly to the public or to such classes of users as to be effectively available directly to the public regardless of the facilities used Some examples of a telecommunications services include but are not limited to a voice
65. are applicable to the specific requirements stated here a Access Board Using a TTY http www access board gov publications usingAT T Y A2 html L Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Guide to Section 508 Telecommunications http www trace wisc edu docs 2002 508 collation index shtml style default telecomm telecommunication relay service TRS Access http www fcc gov Bureaus Common_Carrier Orders 2000 fcc00056 txt E FCC Order Wireless cellular providers must be able to transmit 911 calls made from TTYs htto www fcc gov Bureaus Common_Carrier Orders 2000 fcc00436 txt E Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions TTY Forum http www atis org atis tty ttyforum htm E TIA TSB 121 Standard Cellular Subscriber Unit Interface for TDD 2001 htto www tiaonline org standards m Gallaudet University TTY Basics http tap gallaudet edu TTY Basics htm E Gallaudet University Tools for field testing TTYs with wireless phones http tap gallaudet edu T T Ytools 162 Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 3 1 Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Telecommunications Products 1194 23 Updated June 21 2001 http www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 23 htm 7 3 TTY Signal Protocols September 2004 7 3 1 Telecommunications products that provide telephone functions i e 2 way voice communication must support all commonly
66. as audio descriptions Where Possible or for External Productions Use Stereo Production and Broadcast Equipment Where practical and possible use equipment that is capable of producing broadcasting and receiving video or multimedia productions that include stereo audio and secondary audio program SAP content i e audio descriptions Stereo audio includes channels for left audio right audio and SAP audio making it possible for audio descriptions to be played back in video and multimedia productions that include them see section 8 3 2 1 For internal productions the current Postal Service infrastructure may not currently support stereo production and broadcast methods When this is the case video or multimedia productions that are mission critical must include open audio descriptions or an alternate format or alternate access method must be provided For external productions stereo production and broadcast methods must be used to ensure SAP playback capability or an alternate format or alternate access method must be provided to comply with Section 508 Ensure That All Computer Media Players Support Open Standard Secondary Audio and Audiovisual Synchronization Methods Digital media player software used on computer or kiosks for stand alone or embedded playback must include decoders that decode captions and secondary audio encoded using SMIL markup or another industry recognized open standard Recommended by the World Wide W
67. as the soundtrack in another language audio descriptions or additional information about the peu Only stereo audio signal being received stereo not mono televisions can receive and interpreted or played back by the third SAP channel SAP Playback Circuitry in a Exhibit 8 3 1 A diagram showing a television display or computer During a stereo television broadcast two PORE audio signals are sent out One contains the standard soundtrack while the other contains the soundtrack modified with the additional audio descriptions When the SAP is selected the modified soundtrack is played see exhibit 8 3 1 This SAP can contain audio description also known as video description which is a method for making certain visual aspects in television videos multimedia products and live performances accessible to people who are blind visually impaired or cognitively impaired 210 Handbook AS 508 A Video and Multimedia Products 8 3 2 3 amp 32 Techniques 8 3 2 1 8 3 2 2 8 3 2 3 September 2004 Ensure That all Television Displays Include Secondary Audio Program SAP Playback Circuitry All television tuner cards in televisions video displays kiosks and computer equipment purchased by the Postal Service must include secondary audio program SAP playback circuitry SAP playback circuitry supports Multi channel Television Sound MTS which is required to play back stereo right and left audio tracks and SAP content such
68. by stewards are consistent and to address issues that arise when EIT solutions are covered by more than one Section 508 standard l Promote ongoing communications and education within the Postal Service j Represent the Postal Service on interagency working groups to further understanding and consistency of technical guidance Exhibit 2 3 Steward Section 508 EIT Technical Standard Mor Business Solutions Services IT Software applications and operating systems Mgr Telecommunications IT Telecommunications products Includes telephony interactive voice response systems data and other telecommunications equipment and services Mgr Enabler Business Systems Video and multimedia products Portfolio Includes related training and promotional materials Mgr Technology Support IT Self contained and closed products Includes kiosks copiers printers calculators mail processing equipment scanners fax machines point of sale terminals etc September 2004 9 2 4 2 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Steward Section 508 EIT Technical Standard Mgr Distributed Computing Desktop and portable computers Environment IT Includes employee workstations and laptops Mgr Corporate Business Systems Web based intranet and internet oolutions information and applications IT Portfolio Managers The IT Portfolio Managers do the following a o 0095 Acquire an in depth knowledge of Se
69. can be used by persons who can not access touch screens In some instances a personal computer with a touch screen will be enclosed in a display and used as an information kiosk This provision does not prohibit the use of a kiosk touchscreens but requires a redundant set of controls that can be used by persons whose vision or mobility prevents interaction with touch screens The standard for telecommunications products 81194 23 k requires that touch screens or contact sensitive controls comply with these four requirements E Requirement 1 specifies that individual keys be locatable and distinguishable from the product surface and adjacent keys by touch This provision applies only to products that have mechanically operated controls or keys such as ATM ITM keypads and device keyboards However since all devices need to meet the Functional Performance Criteria described in Section 4 2 1 Specific Standards and Functional Performance Criteria products that incorporate touch screens or contact sensitive controls are able to meet these criteria only if an alternative way of operating them using tactilely discernable controls is provided For example PDAs with telephone functionality and touch Handbook AS 508 A Self Contained Closed Products 9 4 2 1 screens and desk telephones with touch screen enhanced features that cannot be operated via tactile controls would come under this provision E Requirement 2 specifies that cont
70. chapter cover the following E Any hardware computer product regardless of type e g desktop mobile or portable onto which operating systems and software applications can be installed u For products with multiple functions these requirements apply only to the hardware components of those products The proliferation of computer hardware devices is blurring the line between different product types as a variety of new and innovative products are created Note You may need to synchronize general and specific requirements in this chapter with requirements given in other chapters in this handbook Products that are classified as desktop mobile or portable handheld computers are subject to the requirements stated in this chapter However products often have features that may be covered in other technical chapters i e chapters 5 10 as well as the Functional Performance Criteria described in section 4 2 1 A few examples of how to determine which requirements apply are shown below m A PDA that provides telephone functions is subject to the requirements in this chapter and the telecommunications requirements in chapter 7 E A handheld computer used by a Postal Service delivery carrier is considered to be a closed system i e it is used for a few specific functions and the user cannot install additional hardware and software on it In this case the device would be subject only to Self Contained Closed Products not the requirement
71. commands provide convenient access to frequently used functionality i e saving or printing a file However toolbar objects are sometimes not available from the keyboard i e they are not within the tab order of the window Therefore all toolbar functionality should be available through the menu items or documented access keys and key combinations Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 2 2 3 Exhibit 5 2 2 2 Example of Keyboard Access to Toolbars File Edit View Insert Format Tools Table Window Help Adobe PDF Acrobat Comments aeu sea A sg es 45 A Text Chis Arial 8 Ena n ue em Final Showing Markup Shows YP Ree gd ER EE cll Figure A The standard toolbar with the Save toolbar item selected and highlighted n Rd M ge saa Lic EE UU UD EU An example of toolbar accessibility in a word processing Pe new Ctrl N software application Open Crito In this software application all toolbars can be accessed Close using standard keyboard equivalents by first pressing the Wc o ALT key then using CTRL TAB to navigate sequentially between all available toolbars e g standard formatting Save As CE etc and toolbar items Once a toolbar has been AYE 45 Wwe age FT a selected specific toolbar items can be accessed using Search the keyboard ARROW keys Versions In Figure A a Save toolbar item is sel
72. compatibility EMC htto webstore ansi org ansidocstore product asp sku zIEC4 60118 2D13 Ed 2E 1 2E0 b 3A 1997 Covers all relevant EMC phenomena for hearing aids Specifies measurement methods and acceptance levels for hearing aid immunity to high frequency electromagnetic fields originating from digital telephone systems as specified in IEC 61000 4 3 Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 10 1 i TIA 504 A Telecommunications Telephone Terminal Equipment Magnetic Field and Acoustic Gain Requirements for Headset Telephones Intended for Use by the Hard of Hearing http www tiaonline org standards search_results2 cfm document_no TIA 2D504 2DA i Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Guide to Section 508 Telecommunications http www trace wisc edu docs 2002 508 collation index shtml style default telecomm Db OSHA regulations http www osha slc gov OshDoc Interp data l199104014 html 7 10 Minimized Interference September 2004 7 10 1 Interference with hearing technologies including hearing aids cochlear implants and assistive listening devices must be reduced to the lowest possible level that allows a user of hearing technologies to use the telecommunications product 1194 23 Provision i Rationale Users of hearing technologies must not be prevented from using telecommunications products due to interference The term hearing technologies includes hearing aids cochlear implants a
73. complied with the FCC waiver requirements stated in section 7 8 2 2 e Determine if the product offers a visual indicator of volume setting that can be read befpre picking up the handset References The following references apply to the requirements stated in this section m FCC Waiver of Hearing Aid Compatibility Volume Control Standards March 2001 47 C F R 68 317 f http ftp fcc gov cgb dro vc notic doc E FCC Memorandum Opinion and Order htto ftp fcc gov Bureaus Common_Carrier Orders 200 1 da010578 doc zl FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility Act http www fcc gov cgb consumerfacts hac html a ICC ANSI A117 1 1998 Standard Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities htto webstore ansi org ansidocstore product asp sku ICC 2FANS A117 2E1 2D1998 E Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Guide to Section 508 Telecommunications http www trace wisc edu docs 2002 508 collation index shtml style default telecomm Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 9 1 u OSHA regulations http www osha slc gov OshDoc Interp data l199104014 html E FEC Voting System Standards April 30 2002 Provides guidance on explicit volume levels http www fec gov pages vssfinal vss html 7 9 Hearing Aid Compatibility September 2004 7 9 1 Where a telecommunications product delivers output by an audio transducer which is normally held up to the ear a means for effective magnetic wireless coupling to hearing techno
74. control panel where the user may adjust the inactivity period that the operating system will use to set the secure timeout of the system and display 62 553 Testing Manual inspection based testing using the methods described in this chapter must accompany any automated tests Some of these manual tests may be automated using testing tools or Integrated Development Environment IDE features as long as testing occurs in the context of usage by assistive technology users Conduct a manual inspection of the software application or operating system with assistive technology to verify that both underlying programmatic and user visible information about user interface elements is both accessible and meaningful a Use a screen reader to navigate through the user interface of the operating system or software application i e windows menus toolbars controls to ensure that the focused object is tracked and that appropriate object information is read by the screen reader for the various focused objects When the focus is on the object or control the Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 6 1 assistive technology should be able to access and state a meaningful object name its role type its state or its current value b Perform the same tests listed above using a screen magnifier to ensure that the application can be magnified E Note any object for which focus is not tracked or for which a me
75. control their computer with a device other than a keyboard or mouse E The Postal Service will develop software applications that recognize and maximize the capabilities of the accessibility features installed and activated by a user e g native hardware and operating system features as well as installed accessibility aids Software developers should do the following 40 Support native operating system and activated accessibility features for major operating systems that are integrated with input and output devices e g keyboard sound display or mouse Standards for each operating system related to each specific requirement are shown in the References area under each specific requirement Use standard controls for particular operating systems where possible e g menus buttons lists or windows These standard controls often already support native operating system accessibility features Using them will often eliminate the need for software to provide explicit accessibility support unless the behavior of the standard controls has been enhanced Be careful when using custom controls or enhancing standard controls because accessibility aids may have difficulty identifying them i e accessibility aids require specific information to work successfully with screen elements When custom or enhanced standard controls are used developers must use appropriate accessibility interfaces or application programming interfaces APIs
76. d Avoids costly litigation e Improves the overall visability of our information resources For all phases of the EIT life cycle compliance monitoring resides with the responsible functional organization The functional organizations have this responsibility for all EIT purchased or developed by the Postal Service September 2004 13 14 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank Handbook AS 508 A 3 Section 508 Overview of Accessibility This chapter contains an overview of the law its essential rationale and brief explanations of the design of EIT with the use of assistive technology to support the needs of people with disabilities 3 1 What the Law Covers September 2004 3 1 1 The Rehabilitation Act of 1973 says that federal agencies federally funded programs and services and federal contractors cannot discriminate based on disabilities and that federal agency electronic and information technology EIT cannot discriminate in its availability and use based on disabilities Briefly stated Section 508 is a law about technology It says we must make sure our information and data are accessible to all people specifically people with disabilities General Requirements Generally Section 508 says that any agency including the Postal Service must do the following a Buy build and maintain EIT so that information and data are accessible to their employees who have disabiliti
77. development environment IDE features can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing For example a developer can use web tools to test for valid syntax e g titling of all Web pages hyperlink validation inclusion of alternative text or closing of tags but a manual inspection must still be done to validate semantics and proper rendering In other words the meaningfulness of the Web page titles or alternative text must also be considered for the end user who uses assistive technology 6 2 Non Text Elements September 2004 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 2 1 A descriptive text equivalent must be provided for all non text elements that render information required for comprehension of the content as well as those that facilitate navigation Non text items include images video graphs charts animation and audio Section 508 Provision 1194 22a Rationale Screen readers cannot interpret images without associated text Techniques Provide Alternate Descriptive Text for Non Text Elements Use the a t attribute to provide a descriptive text equivalent that summarizes the content of each non text element Review all content generated by tools i e exporting documents that contain images into HTML format and validate any HTML that is created Tool generated content must have all the standard HTML required such as proper header TD and TH element attributes a t attributes and valid HTML
78. displayed during text input mode to indicate the point where user input will occur In Figure B the text cursor indicates both the selected text region the region surrounded by a black solid fill and the new insertion point indicated by the dotted I bar cursor In Figure C the text cursor indicates that the system is busy and cannot accept user input The cursor representation an hourglass cursor has been changed to indicate a system busy state 68 5 7 3 Testing Manual inspection based testing using the methods described in this chapter must accompany any automated tests Some of these manual tests may be automated using testing tools or Integrated Development Environment IDE features as long as testing occurs in the context of usage by assistive technology users Conduct a manual inspection of the software application with assistive technology to verify that text information in all client windows is accessible a Navigate the software application using a screen reader e g JAWS through usage scenarios that cover all core functionality for the software application b As you do verify that the screen reader reads and provides meaningful information about text elements in all client windows text content text cursor location and text attributes c Verify that About information for the software application i e software version serial number etc is accessible This information is often critic
79. e system text caret information available to the operating system for use by assistive technology Assistive technology e g screen readers or screen magnifiers needs to know the position and contents of the focused object so it can describe magnify or manipulate the object for the user For additional techniques refer to Section 5 4 On Screen Focus September 2004 67 5 7 3 Exhibit 5 7 7 2 Examples of Making Text Cursor Information Accessible Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Whenever possible operating system a Figure A The text cursor in text input mode input event 4 42 Techniqt 4 421 Expose Foc Figure B The text cursor in text selection movement mode 4 4 2 1 Expo When Figure C The text cursor in system busy state Some examples of making text cursor information accessible in the Microsoft Windows Operating System Windows provides built in support through Microsoft Active Accessibility or MSAA for focus cursor tracking and other accessibility features Windows based software applications can use MSAA and appropriate API calls to make focus information accessible to assistive technology and to control the cursor representation programmatically Using standard cursor controls allows the OS to indicate to the user what tasks can be performed For example in Figure A the text cursor the blinking I bar is appropriately
80. experience The invalid HTML or defects may interfere with assistive technology may not render properly or may not render any of the intended information Descriptive Hyperlinks Descriptive text links must state more than click here However they must not be so wordy that they interfere with efficient browsing Nondescriptive URL hyperlinks such as click here convey little meaning to the visually impaired andmust not be used The display of a URL must be accompanied by the corresponding descriptive text link Note Examples from this document s reference sections illustrate proper use of a descriptive link Exhibit 6 10 2 2a Example of the Proper Use of a Descriptive Link Go to USPS Home Page http www usps com Use the alt attribute to provide a descriptive text equivalent for an image that is used as a link input alt Search USPS com border 0 width 2 50 height 15 src common images style2 7 search home gif type image value Search name search tabindex 2 gt 132 e103 Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable m When converting office suite documents into HTML table headers and ima
81. format only contain blank ALT tags E Turn images off in the browser Each image used for comprehension or navigation must be replaced with its equivalent descriptive text m Click on the links provided by the ongdesc attribute or D Link to ensure that the user is taken to the appropriate description m If a non text element is critical to the understanding of content and an ALT tag description will be lengthy provide a long description longdesc References The following reference is provided for more information on this topic but must not be used in place of the Postal Service guidelines contained in this handbook Also see Video and Multimedia Products of this handbook If these references conflict with the above techniques you must defer to the Postal Service guidelines m Text equivalents http www w3 org TR WCAG10 wai pageauth html tech text equivalent 6 3 Multimedia September 2004 Provide equivalent alternate formats or alternate access methods for any multimedia presentation and synchronize them with the presentation Section 508 Provision 1194 22b Rationale Audio content without captions or transcripts is not accessible to the hearing impaired Videos without text descriptions are not accessible to the visually impaired Audio and video combined is multimedia Separately audio and video are each subject to the non text requirements In both cases information needs to be provided in an alternat
82. found in the list In addition provide a layered help system that allows users to have more information than the button or text input name activated by an additional hardware control 10 23 Testing a Requirement 1 Ensure that all mechanically operated controls and keys are tactilely discernable 1 Check for tactile marks on top of the keys not beside them and raised marks that have a minimum height of 0 5 mm 2 On telephone keypads check for a tactile marker on the 5 key such as a nib or bar on the top surface of it 3 On QWERTY keyboards check for a raised bar on the F and J keys 4 Check for recessed keys or keys with concave tops which aid visually and mobility impaired users in locating keys Handbook AS 508 A Desktop and Portable Computers September 2004 10 2 3 5 Check for key guards or overlays that help people with fine motor control problems 6 Check for other distinctions shape size spacing tactile markings that make keys easier to remember and tactilely discernable Requirement 2 Ensure that each control and key is operable with one hand and must not require tight grasping pinching or twisting of the wrist 1 For each control or key note if any of the following conditions exist two hands are required to operate the control or key a tight grasp is needed a pinching or twisting of the wrist is need to operate the control 2 For push controls me
83. from scanning through window controls sequentially without providing input When it is not possible to preselect control level Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 2 2 5 input use screen level validation i e validate user input when the user attempts to save all changes or submit input within the screen Exhibit 5 2 2 4 Example of Keyboard Access to Controls An example of keyboard access to controls in the Windows XP operating system dialog window that allows the user to select Accessibility Options Accessibility Options Keyboard Sound Display Mouse General ShickyReys This figure shows five tabbed groupings of related controls that Use Sticky eus IF you want to use SHIFT CT Windows logo key by pressing one key atat Can be accessed using the keyboard equivalent CTRL TAB The tise S ckvkeys Keyboard group of controls is selected here FiterKeys Within each grouping the TAB key can be used to navigate ese logically among various controls such as check boxes and push ze FilterKeus if you want Windows te ignore keystrokes or slow the repeat rate buttons The SPACEBAR key can be used to toggle the selection C Use FilterKeys on the control that has focus e g the Use StickyKeys checkbox has focus here TaggleKaeus Use TagaleKevs i you want to heartoneswh IN addition various dialog level keyboard equivalents are offered LAPS LOCK NUM LOCK a
84. handbook spans the entire corporation Although managers of functional organizations within the Postal Service have direct responsibility for the conformance of their area the coordinated efforts of cross functional teams are vital to realize the mandates of the Section 508 law C Availability This handbook is available online and may be accessed both from the Internet and from the Postal Service Intranet From the usps com homepage click on All Products amp Services then on Publications then on Postal Periodicals and Publications Choose Handbooks It is also available on the Postal Service PolicyNet Intranet Web site Goto htip blue usps gov Under Essential Links in the left hand column click on References Under References in the right hand column PolicyNet Text Then click on HBKs D Comments and Questions Send comments via email to section508 9email usps com Use AS 508 in header E Effective Date This handbook is effective immediately fut X Ce Robert L Otto Vice President Information Technology Contents 1 IntrodiltlIOl 26004 bora ssrresebosssrceceidereccdu rues aaduae dude Sis 1 1 meo 1 2 History of Section 508 osctecc eet an aad gd NERENN NEERI KENEN MER ES ride 1 2 1 Development of the Law lucere rrr 1 2 2 Structure of the Law Technical Standards and Functional Performance Criteria 1 3 eura 1 3 1 Imp
85. hourglass Consistent use of images is critical for users to understand their meaning The user visible textual information i e ToolTips alternative text presented with images must also be consistent throughout the software application i e file folder icon must have the same meaning and label throughout to indicate a function such as open file Changing an image to identify status or events can be confusing to users and to assistive technology When such changes occur software applications must provide textual information about the change using program code and 63 5 6 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide user visible text The techniques in Section 5 5 User Interface and Programmatic Elements describe ways to provide this textual information 562 Techniques When an image identifies a user interface element or application function the meaning assigned to that image must be consistent throughout the application In addition consistent textual information i e a label or description must be provided and must be consistent in meaning Exhibit 5 6 2 1 Example of Consistent Meaning of Images An example of consistent meaning of images used in the user interface of the Microsoft Word word processing u HB508_ v20 10Nov2003 SWonly doc Microso application File Edit View Insert Format Tools Table Wit In Fi A hiahliahted o bg h A m n Figure A a highlighte ave button is shown
86. in a 3 m m KT i We Wa LS toolbar used the word processing application The n um Save button uses an image of a floppy disk to represent the concept of saving a file As shown in Figure B the word processing application Figure A The Save icon in a toolbar consistently uses the same floppy disk icon in its File Heed Dye a ee e a menu under both the Save and Save as Web Page menu items ij HB508_ 20_10Nov2003_SWonly do File Edit View Insert Format Tools This icon is used also throughout the Microsoft Windows SH New Operating System This consistent use of both the floppy E e disk icon and the image s label of Save allow the user T to understand the image s meaning in both the operating m system and within applications such as this word a Save processor Save As qa Save as Web Page HH Search Figure B The same Save icon is used in the word processor s File menu 64 5 6 3 Testing Manual inspection based testing using the methods described in this chapter must accompany any automated tests Some of these manual tests may be automated using testing tools or Integrated Development Environment IDE features as long as testing occurs in the context of usage by assistive technology users Conduct a manual inspection of the software application or operating system with and without assistive technology to verify that images and their labels a
87. keys is visually discernible and discernible either through touch or sound Adhere to the following recommendations that support this requirement E Use two different types of feedback such as a combination of tactile audible and visual feedback to help make products easier for people with sensory disabilities to use m When using audio feedback consider associating intuitively meaningful sounds with actions For example try using increasingly high pitched sounds with increasing amplitude Use cascading sounds with rotary or slide controls with the pitch associated with the change in control u Provide an audio indication of a toggle status instead of a continuous signal sufficiently long enough to alert the user to the position of the toggle switch 265 10 2 2 5 266 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 10 225 When Touchscreens Are Used Provide Alternate Access Method When touchscreens are used provide a redundant set of controls that serves as an alternative access method for people with visual or other impairments Here are some recommended techniques that might be used to comply with this requirement Provide auditory cues that allow users to spatially explore the screen by moving their fingers across the screen without activating the controls For activating controls offer a selection button that users can push to operate controls they have selected on the touchscreen Some possible auditory cues include the
88. kiosks for stand alone or embedded playback must include decoders that decode captions and secondary audio encoded using SMIL markup or another industry recognized open standard Recommended by the World Wide Web Consortium W3C SMIL is an XML markup designed to be the standard markup language for timing and controlling synchronized media elements i e video audio tracks and descriptions captions and other media SMIL works for a media player similar to the way that HTML works for a Web browser Just as HTML markup displays in any browser the standardized SMIL language fosters interoperability among varieties of media players see the references below for more information 207 8 2 2 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 8 224 Where Practical Use Real Time Captioning Systems for Live Events Where practical provide real time captions for video and multimedia products shown during mission critical live events that are not Web based e g major conferences or distance learning Real time captions can be provided using computer aided real time captioning CART systems that use speech recognition technology to provide simultaneous open captions and immediate text transcripts For major conferences as long as the event is not being remotely broadcast CART can be displayed on a separate screen that will permit larger text and more text on the screen If such technology based solutions are not used provide an appropriate alternate f
89. most compliant available developed products must be compliant If color displays are developed by the Postal service they must meet all provisions Self contained closed products must not use color alone to convey information indicate an action prompt a response or distinguish an important visual event For example do not instruct a user to select the blue icon from the list Instead instruct the user without referring to color alone If color is used provide an accessible alternate format or method such as a textual label or text formatting to convey the equivalent information e g use color and boldface text to indicate highlighted information 983 Testing a Inspect the product to determine whether it follows the convention of object identification that uses color as only one of the distinguishing features b If an exception was taken when procuring a device that is not fully accessible define the alternate format or alternate method needed to provide equivalent access to people with disabilities who can not readily use the device 248 Handbook AS 508 A Self Contained Closed Products 9 9 2 9 4 References The following references apply to the specific requirements listed in this section E Web Computer Color Chart for the Color Blind htto www toledo bend com colorblind colortable html u Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Self Contained Closed Products 1194 2
90. not involve broadcast technologies or multimedia productions may be captioned using a separate monitor such as a steno captioning service Captions serve as a text equivalent for the audio portions of multimedia productions In addition multimedia productions require audio descriptions for any visual content that is necessary for understanding Currently audio descriptions are most often provided as part of a second version of the production or are included on the secondary audio program track When live events are not open to the general public or when other accommodation methods are required or preferred captions or audio descriptions may not have to be provided Instead reasonable accommodations can be offered to participants with disabilities see Handbook EL 307 Reasonable Accommodation for more information Reasonable accommodations for live presentations of video and multimedia often include but are not limited to American Sign Language ASL interpreters steno captioning services remote audio listening systems and the like Note that in some cases i e large venues ASL interpreters should be displayed on screen along with the primary visual presentation so that they can be seen by all who need them 205 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Only as a last resort should other alternate formats or alternate access methods be considered as comparable access E Other alternate formats may include but are not
91. penres amd aera ele a alee eee EON ewe IO BUE OR MEE OCDE C OON DR Section 508 Postal Service Processes to Comply 4 1 Background for Purchasing Compliant EIT llle 4 2 Processes to Comply With Section 508 0 ccc eee eens 4 2 1 Specific Standards and Functional Performance Criteria llllsu 4 2 2 Deka k aiti CEDERE 4 2 3 When Procuring an EIT Solution asna nananana anana 4 2 4 When Developing or Maintaining an EIT Solution 0 0 0 0 anana 4 2 5 COMplex SVSIBITIS oae a it raren AE ERE RP ERES edet dades ded 4 3 ucc 21 4 4 Guiding Steps for the Purchase of an EIT Business Solution 00005 4 5 Integrated Systems Methodology ISM Overview 0 00 c cee 4 6 About Exceptions and Undue Burden 000 c cence rrue enn tenn 4 6 1 General Exceptions 0 0 000 c cece cece Heres 4 6 2 Specific Exceptions isssssssssssse eee eee eee rns 4 6 3 Undue Burden Exception 00 ccc ccc cece Ree 4 7 POCHIMENTalON OL EXCODHOLRI suc a pei a Gesn ERA EUR namie Ss cases end ents e dou 4 8 Roles and Responsibilities csse 4 9 Exception Documentation 00 0 00 ccc ccc ccc eee ens 4 10 Preparing Undue Burden Justification 0 0 ces Appendix 4 A Template for Undue Burden Justification Documentation Software Applications and Operating Sys
92. people who are blind or visually impaired 9 5 Biometric Forms of User Identification or Control September 2004 9 5 1 When biometric forms of user identification or control are used an alternative form of identification or activation that does not require the user to possess particular biological characteristics must also be provided 81194 25 Provision d Rationale Biometric controls refer to controls that are activated only if a particular biological feature of the end user exists and matches specific criteria e g voiceprint fingerprint or retinal image Biometric controls are becoming more common because they can provide a high level of security or offer increased efficiencies in user interaction with computer systems Biometric controls are used for two primary purposes security i e user identification and authentication and non security commands or user input One example is a high security computer system or information transaction machine that uses retinal scanners or fingerprint identification controls to identify users before providing them access to personal or sensitive data Another example is a portable computer that offers an optional voice command feature to allow the user access to various applications or data stored on the computer In the latter example the voice commands are a benefit because they help the user make selections or provide input more quickly or in a hands free mode While biometric
93. presses Search the user is offered a list of help options P Microsoft Word Help 10 x What would you like to do Contents Answer Wizard Index What s New pier Learn about the new Features in S Microsoft Word and all Microsoft Office pragrams Microsoft Office Web sibe Visit Ehe Microsoft Office Web s site to Find additional products service and assistance Getting Help Learn abaut the different resources available to get help nalila cens neni Figure B and Figure C The Microsoft Windows Office Assistant offers access to application level help ype your question here and ven click Search What would you like to da Search ud 76 Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 9 4 5 9 3 5 9 4 September 2004 Testing Manual inspection based testing using the methods described in this chapter must accompany any automated tests Some of these manual tests may be automated using testing tools or Integrated Development Environment IDE features as long as testing occurs in the context of usage by assistive technology users Conduct a manual inspection of the operating system or software application without assistive technology to verify that animations can be disabled and that critical information is conveyed without animation a Navigate through the operating system or software application through usage scenarios
94. production signal or communication and understand the intended delivery approach based on planned system usage E For systems that support telephone functions i e 2 way voice communication the accessibility information will usually be a TTY signal of some kind which varies based on device u For video and multimedia productions the accessibility will be closed captioning and secondary audio program content or audio description see chapter 8 C Examine each product or service in the transmission path to ensure that none of the products or services alter corrupt delete or make unusable any included accessibility information transmitted with the production signal or communication along the way to the end user E For systems that support telephone functions insure that cross manufacturer non proprietary industry standard codes for TTY are passed through in a usable format E For video and multimedia productions insure that cross manufacturer non proprietary industry standard codes for captioning and audio description are passed through in a usable format 7114 References The following references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here i Gallaudet University Tools for field testing TTYs with wireless phones http tap gallaudet edu T T Ytools E EIA 708 Specification for Digital Television Closed Captioning http www tiaonline org standards search_results2 cfm document_no EIA 2D708 2
95. products Ilf ed2 book HIG Graphics html Note Postal Service developers and purchasing agents are strongly urged to obtain updated references for application or operating system accessibility references when designing or purchasing Postal Service applications 5 7 Textual Information September 2004 5 7 1 Software applications must provide textual information using operating system functions for displaying text The minimum information that must be made available is text content text cursor location and text attributes Section 508 Provision 1194 21f Rationale The operating system is the core computer software that controls basic functions such as receiving information from the keyboard displaying information on the computer screen and storing data on the hard disk Other software applications including assistive technology use the standard protocols dictated by the operating system for displaying their own information or processing the output of other computer programs For example assistive technology will use operating system standard protocols to track the location and placement of both text and graphics understand the attributes of text i e dialog title font size color and style and watch information being copied from one location to another i e information being erased or overwritten by other text or graphics 65 5 7 2 66 b 7 2 5 7 2 1 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Whe
96. radio button and whether or not it is selected Techniques Use Standard UI Controls Use standard controls to provide both displayed and underlying information about controls Standard controls eliminate the need for additional development or programming to expose the information about the control s identity role and state via text to the operating system and to assistive technology Information about controls is both displayed to the user e g meaningful ToolTips or captions or meaningful window titles and provided programmatically to assistive technology e g windowing events control role or control state This includes all window information i e user visible and underlying window titles or names menu information and toolbar information i e user visible or underlying alternate text description Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems Exhibit 5 5 2 1 Use Standard UI Controls Example 5 5 2 3 Security Warning Do you want to install and run Java Plug in 1 3 1 02 signed on 11 27 2001 1 14 AM and distributed by Publisher authenticity verified by YenSign Commercial Software Publishers CA Caution Sun Microsystems Inc asserts that this content iz safe You should only install view this content if you trust Sun Microsystems Inc to make that assertion Always trust content from Sun Microsystems Inc to assistive technology In addition the default se
97. self contained single function fax machine This stand alone fax machine cannot be used to make a voice call i e the unit has no handset or microphone However the unit has a speaker to enable the user to hear the line status This product is both a self contained closed product and a telecommunications product In this case the applicable requirements are as follows m From this chapter only sections 7 6 Caller ID and Similar Functions and Controls and Keys apply as voice calls are not supported Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 1 3 September 2004 7 1 2 2 m From Self Contained Closed Products sections 9 2 and 9 10 all apply Section 9 5 does not apply because no biometric form of identification is being used in this example Section 9 7 does not apply because the product does not deliver voice output for purposes of a conversation does not apply because this is not a freestanding product and 9 10 may not apply depending on whether the product has a display and on the type of display E All Functional Performance Criteria also apply m Example 3 An all in one machine connected to a personal computer that includes a fax scanner printer and copier This product cannot be used to make voice calls The product includes software to be loaded on the personal computer Therefore this software must meet all applicable requirements in Software Applications and Operating Systems The
98. self contained platforms or in kiosks may require consideration with other chapters And for applications designed to create output beyond direct interaction with the application itself e g reports data files or media objects developers must verify that these outputs are also accessible to users of assistive technology 99 6 1 2 2 100 6 1 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Audience This chapter applies to anyone who buys or develops Web based information and applications for the Postal Service i e Postal Service employees vendors contractors and business partners Web based information and applications include information technology solutions of all scope and magnitude consisting of simple or complex purchases or development of Web based applications and all associated data information training material and documents Structure and Use Each subchapter is dedicated to a provision that supports the EIT Technical Standard Each provision has sections on rationale techniques testing and references as shown below in Overview Non text Elements m Requirement E Rationale E Techniques and examples u Testing m References Multimedia Color Style Sheets Image Maps Tables Frames Screen Flicker Equivalent Text Content Scripting Languages Plug ins and Applets Forms Portable Document Format PDF Repetitive Navigation Timed Responses Appendix 6 A Checklist Handbook AS 508 A Web Based In
99. size color or style available to the operating system for use by assistive technology Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 7 2 2 Exhibit 5 7 2 1 Example of Using Standard OS Functions to Provide Textual Information Look in Ca FINAL DRAFTS e m ASBDB Chapterb Web WIP_20031029 doc m ASS08 Chapters VideoMMedia DRAFT1UT5 dac i Glossary candidate entries 10062003 dac m HBS08 v20 10Nov2003_CH3 ONLY doc Wi HB5 8 v20 13Moev2003b SWw enly dac WI HB508 v20 Chsl amp 2 D5Nov2003 DANI doc My Documents Figure A A standard dialog window that provides accessible textural information FINAL DRAFTS Glossary candidate entries 0062003 doc HB508 v20 13Nov2003b SWonll HB508 v20 10Nov2003 CH3 DNLY dc Microsoft Word Document HB508 v20 Che1 amp 2_05Nov2003 DANI Modified 11 13 2003 1 52 PM ay HBSOS v20 12Nov2003b Siwonly doc Type Microsoft Word Document Size 2 03 MB Size 2 63 MB Attributes normal PAS FOR Chapters VideoMMedia_DRAFT Figure B A standard file browser window that provides accessible textual information about listed documents coc 4 of 24 Clipboard TX Click an item to paste m This textual information wi be read by assistive technology and can be adj D FT Figure C Accessible textual information that has been copied to the operating system s clipboard An example of using standard O
100. that cover all core functionality for the system or application Note where animated user interface elements are used to convey meaning b Ensure that for all animated user interface elements used to convey meaning the system or software offers a nonanimated alternate format that provides equivalent information e g user visible or programmatically accessible textual information C For animated user interface elements used as controls or as an access method e g the Microsoft Windows Office Assistant ensure that the system or application offers an alternate access method i e a redundant way to access the help system for the Microsoft Windows Office Assistant such as pressing the F1 key or the Help menu item d Check for a method to turn off or disable as a preference animated user interface elements individually in the system or application Ensure that alternate formats or alternate access methods are available in place of the disabled animated user interface elements References a Sun Java Application Design Animation http Java sun com products If ed2 book HIG Visual4 html Note Postal Service developers and purchasing agents are strongly urged to obtain updated references for application or operating system accessibility references when designing or purchasing Postal Service applications 77 9 10 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 5 10 Color Coding 78 5 10 1 5 10 2 5 10 2 1 Operati
101. the CAPTION tag is displayed on the screen The contents of the summary attribute are read by the screen reader but not displayed on the screen Simple Tables If a data table has one logical level of row or column headers it is a simple table There are two options for coding simple tables The first option is to use the table header TH tag and the id and header attributes The id attribute within the TH tag is used in the first cell of each column to define the column header The d attribute within the table data lt TD gt tag is used in the first cell of each row to define the row header The header attribute within the TD tag of all other cells is used to associate the cell with its corresponding row and column headers The second option is to use the scope attribute The scope attribute associates a set of TD tags with the corresponding TH tag The scope attribute within the TH tag is used in the first cell of each column to define the column header The scope attribute within the TD tag is used in the first cell of each row to define the row header Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 7 2 1 Exhibit 6 7 2 1 p 1 Example of a Simple Table Using the header and id Attributes The code for this table immediately follows the screen shot Figure A Screen shot for a simple table that uses the header and id attributes Rate Table for Priority Mail Gl
102. these devices may be fully compliant It should be noted that many fax machines also support of telecommunications functions that is the ability to use an attached handset for a traditional voice call When this functionality is present the requirements in chapter 5 also apply Similar types of electronic office equipment The law states that this standard applies to but is not limited to the above listed devices At the time of the drafting of the 508 standards Personal Data Assistants PDA devices were functionally closed products and were included in many discussions of the provisions in this chapter According the questions and answers page on the GSA s Section 508 Web site This technology is Handbook AS 508 A Self Contained Closed Products 9 1 3 September 2004 9 1 2 2 9 1 3 electronic and information technology covered by Section 508 and the Access Board s standards Most hand held devices currently fall in the category of self contained closed products As technology advances hand held devices may fall into other categories as well PDA devices These devices if they do not permit additional functions to be added are closed products PDA devices that can be modified software development kit utilities enable the creation of new applications that run under a defined operating system come under the standard for software applications and operating systems discussed in chapter 5 To the extent th
103. to determine if there are EIT solutions that meet business needs and address the standards section 508 defines six technical standards which include many provisions Keep the following in mind Some functions are defined by a single standard m Some functions may be covered by multiple standards Research products and services that meet business needs and learn about their Section 508 compliance E Look for the product s Voluntary Product Accessibility Template VPAT Many suppliers are using this form to provide information on how they conform to the Section 508 standards If no VPAT is available ask the supplier to produce a VPAT or provide comparable documentation a Use research organizations a Search the Internet and supplier Web sites i Contact other government agencies that are already using the product or service Determine if an exception applies e g no product exists that complies with the applicable standards and meets the business requirements If an exception exists document it appropriately Step 4 Include Section 508 clauses in the Statement of Work SOW Once market research is complete work with Supply Management to do the following E Develop a solicitation that correctly states Section 508 requirements E Determine in the evaluation process if there should be any special instructions to suppliers E Include Section 508 concepts in the internal design or implementation documents 25
104. unit itself is similar to the one in the second example and is covered under applicable requirements in this chapter in addition to Chapter 9 Self Contained Closed Products and the Functional Performance Criteria To determine exactly which provisions apply to this All in One product perform the same kind of analysis performed in the second example i e the stand alone fax machine Audience This chapter applies to anyone who buys or develops telecommunications products or systems that include telephone functions for the Postal Service i e Postal Service employees suppliers contractors and business partners Telecommunications products include information technology solutions of all sorts consisting of simple or complex purchases or developed systems and all associated data information training material documents and customer support Structure and Use Each part of this chapter describes the specific requirements that support one or more provisions in the technical standards for telecommunications products The technical standards of Section 508 were written primarily from a technology perspective The Postal Service may consolidate some provisions to help Postal Service employees and business partners understand Postal Service compliance requirements from the perspective of designing for accessibility Each specific requirement includes a rationale techniques testing methods and references as shown below in section 7 2
105. used cross manufacturer nonproprietary standard TTY signal protocols 81194 23 Provision b Rationale A two way real time text based telephone service for people with communication disabilities based upon TTYs was developed from teletype machines in the 1960s The purpose of this provision is to ensure that TTY compatibility with the signal not just the connection point is not overlooked Specifically this provision requires that mainstream telecommunications products that provide telephone functions support use of all commonly used cross manufacturer nonproprietary standard signals used by TTYs Some products compress or alter the audio signal in such a manner that standard signals used by TTYs are not transmitted or decoded properly preventing successful TTY communication TTYs that are most commonly used in the U S use the U S 45 5 baud Baudot protocol ANSI TIA EIA 825 The 300 baud ASCII protocol is almost universally available especially on dual mode TTYs but it is less commonly used These two codes 300 baud ASCII and 45 5 baud Baudot are considered nonproprietary Compliance with international standard ITU T Recommendation V 18 would also meet this provision but products complying with the ITU standard may not be commercially available Regardless of which nonproprietary standard protocol is supported it is important that products and systems continue to support the protocol used by the TTYs currently in use by most p
106. used in training product or service demos health or safety videos or advertising produced for distribution on television or on the Internet Where Possible Include Real Time Captions for Mission Critical or Public Live Events Where possible include real time captions in video or multimedia presentations used in live events that are organized or sponsored by the Postal Service and that are open to the general public The real time captions serve as a text equivalent for those portions of the audio presentation required for comprehension of the content Real time captions can be provided using computer aided real time captioning CART systems that use typing or speech recognition technology to provide simultaneous open captions and immediate text transcripts Usually such captions will be authored by captioners people who are especially skilled in capturing narration and key ambient sounds These captioners employ court reporter type equipment to type captions in real time The reporter equipment is connected to a computer and display equipment consisting of an LED screen or other large screen projection that typically is above the performers Some systems offer the ability to transmit captions remotely using phone lines satellite feeds or fiber optics For additional requirements related to live events see Section 8 1 6 Alternate Formats Alternate Access Methods and Reasonable Accommodation Include Captions in Mission Critica
107. when Postal Service television or video productions are dubbed onto videotape or broadcast and the display mechanism is either unknown or does not support secondary audio program SAP playback In this case the video production should be delivered with two versions one with and one without descriptions often back to back on the same tape cassette Open audio description can be used to provide limited audio descriptions on the primary audio tracks instead of on an SAP channel The open audio description technique may be more feasible than standard audio description as the narration recorded on one primary audio track could include descriptions of key visual elements along with the main narration if planned for in advance For example a Postal Service training video that demonstrates the correct way for letter carriers to unload boxes from a truck could be produced so that open audio descriptions are permanently encoded in the production s narration Instead of merely demonstrating the correct procedure for unloading boxes all viewers could hear descriptions of enacted visuals because they are included in the narration i e a letter carrier unloads the boxes from her truck being careful not to bend using her back When such open audio descriptions are included in the main audio tracks they can be easily included in text transcripts often eliminating the need to produce a secondary audio program or track This requirement includes
108. who cannot readily use the product i e indirect access 10 34 References The following references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here B Biometrics Resource Center Web site at the National Institute for Standards and Technolog http www Itl nist gov div895 biometrics Li Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Desktop and Portable Computer Products 1194 26 Updated June 21 2001 htto www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 26 htm E Open Directory Project Biometrics Links htto dmoz org Computers Security Biometrics 270 Handbook AS 508 A Desktop and Portable Computers 10 4 1 10 4 Industry Standard Expansion Slots Ports and Connectors Where provided at least one of each type of expansion slots ports and connectors must comply with publicly available industry standards 81194 26 Provision d 10 41 Rationale Slots refer to the openings in a computer where you can insert a printed circuit board Slots are often called expansion slots because they allow you to expand the capabilities of a computer The boards you insert in expansion slots are called expansion boards or add on boards Slots are typically in the back of the computer Ports consist of an interface on a computer to which you can connect a device Personal computers have various types of ports such as USB SCSI parallel and serial Ports are the external connection points on computers t
109. www section508 gov training docs audioDescChecklist doc Includes questions for evaluating suppliers materials to provide suppliers and quality control elements E Access Board Checklist for Captioning Video and Multimedia http www section508 gov training docs caption VendorQC Checklist doc September 2004 225 8 6 4 226 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide includes considerations for selecting evaluating suppliers preparations and quality control elements American Foundation for the Blind Video Description in North America http www afb org info document view asp documentid 1231 Apple Computer s Quicktime and SMIL Page http www apple com quicktime authoring qtsmil html Caption Center htto www wgbh org wgbh pages captioncenter Captioned Media Program tto www ctv org PB WGBH National Center for Accessible Media Captioning FAQ htto ncam wgbh org dtv basics captioning html CPB WGBH National Center for Accessible Media Description FAQ htto ncam wgbh org dtv basics description html CPB WGBH National Center for Accessible Media Media Access Generator MAGPie htto ncam wgbh org webaccess magpie O gt Department of Defense s Computer Electronic Accommodations Program Guidelines for Computer Aided Real Time Captioning CART http www tricare osd mil cap services services_acc_cart cfm United Kingdom Office of Communications Ofcom Guidance on Standards for Audio Description
110. 0 td lt td gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt td id a8 axis date gt 26 Aug 97 lt td gt td header a6 a8 a2 527 28 td lt td header a6 a8 a3 5112 00 td td header a6 a8 a4 gt 45 00 lt td gt 124 Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 7 2 2 Exhibit 6 7 2 2b p 2 Example of a Complex Table Using the axis Attribute lt td gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td lt td gt lt b gt lt b gt Subtotals lt b gt lt td gt td header a6 a2 65 02 td td header a6 a3 2224 00 td lt td header z a6 a4 590 00 td lt td gt 379 02 lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt th id al0 axis location Seattle th th th lt th gt lt th gt s lt th gt lt th gt lt td gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt td id all axis date gt 27 Aug 97 lt td gt lt td header al0 all a2 596 25 td lt td header al0 all a3 gt 109 00 lt tds lt td header al0 all a4 gt 36 00 lt tds gt lt td gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td id al2 axis date gt 28 Aug 97 lt td gt lt td header a10 al2 a2 gt 35 00 lt td gt lt td header al0 a12 a3 5109 00 td lt td header al0 al2 a4 gt 36 00 lt td gt lt td gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt b gt Subtotals lt b gt lt td gt td header al0 a2
111. 08 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 5 6 2 1 Example of Consistent Meaning of Images ssseseeee ern Exhibit 5 7 2 1 Example of Using Standard OS Functions to Provide Textual Information Luue Exhibit 5 7 7 2 Examples of Making Text Cursor Information Accessible 0 0 0 0 c cece eee eens Exhibit 5 8 2 1 Example of OS Level and Application Display Settings sss Exhibit 5 8 2 2 Selecting Appropriate Color Combinations llle nn Exhibit 5 9 2 1 Example of Alternate Formats or Access Methods for Animated Elements Exhibit 5 9 2 2 Examples of Offering User Preferences for Disabling Animations lslslslssess Exhibit 5 10 2 1 Example of Combining Color With Alternate Formatting llle Exhibit 5 11 2 1 Example of Using Only Acceptable Flashing and Contrast Ranges 2 0 c cece eee ees Exhibit 5 12 2 1 Example of Providing Textual Information About Controls 0 00 00 ee Exhibit 5 12 2 2 Example of Providing Keyboard Access to Controls 0 0 ccc cece teen eee Exhibit 5 12 2 3 Example of Exposing On Screen Input Focus 0 0 ccc eee en Exhibit 5 12 2 4 Example of Associating Labels With Controls 0 0 ccc cece eect eee eee eneas Exhibit 5 12 2 5 Example or a Timeout Feature 2e sn vee eu x remo onte de p eris a pa e dus Ge as ee An e RomEs Exhibit 5 12 2 6 Exampl
112. 10 2 Creates and implements processes to insure that the Postal service follows the legal requirements for complying with exceptions and undue burden documentation Integrates policies and procedures of Section 508 into the existing Supply Management processes and documenis Creates and conducts training for contracting officers and others involved in the purchasing process 2 7 Vice President General Counsel The Vice President General Counsel GC does the following a Updates legal publications and Postal Service policies and procedures in the GC area to conform with ongoing legal requirements Provides legal guidance in response to Section 508 related inquiries from functional organizations and the Section 508 Program Notifies affected functional organizations of updates to relevant statutes and related interpretations 2 8 Vice President Consumer Affairs The Vice President Consumer Affairs CA does the following a b Provides policies and procedures on processing consumer complaints Integrates policies and procedures concerning Section 508 into the existing processes and documents In consultation with the General Counsel updates 39 CFR 255 and any Postal Service CA policies that are affected by Section 508 Manages the response of consumer complaints 2 9 Vice President Public Affairs and Communications The Vice President Public Affairs and Communications designates the manager of USPS TV
113. 11 2 Overview Provide support documentation in alternate formats Provision 1194 41a E Rationale E Techniques m Testing m References Provide access to a description of accessibility features Provision 1194 41 b Accommodate various communication needs in support services Provision 1194 41 c Appendix 11 A Checklist Handbook AS 508 A Information Documentation and Support 11 1 5 September 2004 11 1 4 Introduction to Information Documentation and Support Service Accessibility Every instance of technology needs informational and instructional material Despite intuitive interfaces effective use of sophisticated technology requires a full spectrum of documentation and support services to help end users understand and effectively use product functions and features Hegardless of the class or classes of technology represented by a given EIT product both the product itself and its documentation can present the following challenges to people with disabilities E People who are deaf or who have hearing impairments are typically faced with challenges such as a Audible beeps without an equivalent visual signal m Instructional videos that do not include captioning m Telephone support systems both human support and IVR systems that are inaccessible or unsupportive of multiple communication modes B People who are blind or who have visual impairments are typically faced with challenges such a
114. 13714 Information technology Document processing and related communication User Interface to Telephone based Services Voice Messaging Applications but is less specific than the specifications in ISO IEC IS http www atis org pub IVR HFES 200 5 pdf 754 References The following references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here m Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Guide to Section 508 Telecommunications http www trace wisc edu docs 2002 508 collation index shtml style default telecomm E Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions IVR Accessibility Forum htto www atis org atis ivr ivrhom htm Gallaudet University s Technology Access Program Voice Mail and IVR http tap gallaudet edu l VH htm E Inclusive com IVR Accessibility http inclusive com ivr access 172 Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 6 1 m ITU T ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector DTMF Standard http www itu int home The ITU T is a committee of the International Telecommunications Union ITU The ITU T is responsible for making technical recommendations about telephone and data communication systems DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency tones are those used by touch tone telephones for tone dialing m ISO IEC IS 13714 1994 Information technology Document processing and related communication User Interface to Telephone based Services Voice Messaging
115. 2004 217 8 5 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 8 5 Audio Description of Video and Multimedia Productions 218 8 5 1 All training and informational video and multimedia productions that support the agency s mission regardless of format that contain visual information necessary for the comprehension of the content should be audio described where possible Section 508 Provision 1194 244d Rationale Whereas section 8 3 addresses the secondary audio program SAP playback circuitry necessary to decode audio descriptions this requirement addresses the techniques used to author and encode the audio description content in video or multimedia productions widely distributed via Postal Service television Web sites and other information systems Where possible the Postal Service provides audio description for any video or multimedia production that is distributed externally or that is considered critical to the Postal Service s mission Such productions include but are not limited to those used in training product or service demos health or safety videos or advertising produced for distribution on television or the Internet In applicable productions the visual portions necessary for the comprehension of the production s content must be audio described so people who are blind or visually impaired can access them Audio description is a method for making certain visual aspects in television videos multimedia productions a
116. 21 2001 htto www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 23 htm E Gallaudet University s Technology Access Program TTY Basics http tap gallaudet edu tty 2Dbasics htm E Gallaudet University s Technology Access Program V 18 New Modem Standard with TTY Capacit http tap gallaudet edu v18 htm 7 4 Voice Mail Auto Attendant and Interactive Voice Response IVR Systems September 2004 7 4 1 Voice mail auto attendant and interactive voice response telecommunications systems must be usable by TTY users with their TTYs 1194 23 Provision c Rationale Interactive Voice Response Systems IVRs have become a common means for agencies to manage their calls and save labor costs for common functions such as routing calls by user selection from a voice menu health care enrollment or automated job line announcements These services provide a number of functions including voice mail and increasingly unified messaging auto attendant call routing information delivery and interactive voice response However for people who use TTYs these labor saving services often present barriers For example many hearing impaired TTY users cannot understand prompts indicating which telephone buttons to push when encountering IVRs In other cases users calling through a telecommunications relay service may not be given enough time to respond and get timed out by the IVRs Auditory 165 1 4 2 166 7 4 2 7 4 2 1 Section 508 Te
117. 3 4 HOIBIEHI COS oat acces sich econ P REN UPS RE ETE URP EGM MES RE EE RE ERAS 112 September 2004 vii Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 6 4 S mrCICCTPT 113 6 4 1 PAO EUS r 113 6 4 2 Techniques 113 6 4 3 P r rmrm 113 6 4 4 Glel BlC S aua ie qon ded ORC eee eee ROREM ORC EE ORCI oce e 113 6 5 DIVIG SNCCIS E E 114 6 5 1 Rationale seu kaeaacede Y rune eee d kdnacege dese eee ye ba d eens aed em ew es 114 6 5 2 MRS TNS T 114 6 5 2 1 Design So That Alternate Style Sheets Can Be Applied 114 6 5 3 201 e 117 6 5 4 RGICIENCCS 254 a tn cea nistr nET R ES EEE REEDED OE EAD ED Oe EAE AS ie S 117 6 6 In er AU 117 6 6 1 Rationale Q 117 6 6 2 esi errer reinar ees hws TT Era REENE esas ERARE ae REE ANREDE 118 6 6 3 SU eee reee O EE S EE EET 119 6 6 4 REIErENCES a cet ce antends cn riea n A A a a T 119 6 7 TADO rr 119 6 7 1 stubs serre ereire E on ao eae ete eg ee 119 6 7 2 ices eee eee ee ee er a ee ee ee ee ee eer 120 6 7 2 1 SImple Tables csemcse nU TI pirrende PISOS PO UAEETINTOPPIM ODDO RP P 120 6 7 2 2 Complex Tables
118. 5 htto www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 25 htm 9 9 Range Of Color Selections September 2004 9 9 1 9 9 2 When a product permits a user to adjust color and contrast settings a range of color selections capable of producing a variety of contrast levels must be provided 81194 25 Provision h Rationale This provision applies to those products that already allow a user to adjust screen colors and contrast This provision requires more than just providing color choices When shades of gray black and white contrast are available this provision also applies The available choices must also allow for different levels of contrast Many people experience a high degree of sensitivity to bright displays People with this condition cannot focus on a bright screen for long because they will soon be unable to distinguish individual letters An overly bright background causes a visual white out To alleviate this problem the user must be able to select a softer background and appropriate foreground colors On the other hand many visually impaired people can work most efficiently when the screen is set with very sharp contrast settings Because individual needs vary so much a program must have a variety of color and contrast settings See ooftware Applications and Operating Systems User Selected Display Attributes Color and Contrast Techniques Purchased products should be the most compliant available developed products m
119. 5 mm headphone jack that conforms to the TIA TSB 121 standard Cellular telephones must support the VCO HCO feature using either a standard nonacoustic connection or built in functionality in the device hardware Portable TTYs that are compatible with cellular telephones are designed for mobility and do not typically have printers or answering machines and can therefore be supported by the 2 5 mm headphone jack Ring Signal Must Be Passed to TTY All telephones that use 2 5 mm headphone jack connectors to TTY connectivity must pass through the ring signal to the connector so that TTYs with built in signal connectivity can detect the ringing In setting up a TTY make sure that a suitable visual or in the case of a digital wireless or cellular telephone vibrating indicator feature or third party device can be activated to alert a TTY user with a hearing loss when the telephone is ringing User Must Be Able to Turn Microphone On and Off All telephone handsets and systems regardless of device type must offer the user the ability to turn the microphone on and off so as to intermix speech and TTY signals without garbling of TTY text or reduction of speech quality When a TTY is connected directly into the network it must be possible to turn the acoustic pickup microphone off automatically or manually so that background noise in a noisy environment will not interfere with the TTY signal This supports use by people who prefer to commu
120. 6 11 1 Rationale 0 0 ccc enhn nr nes 133 Olle WeCHMIOUGS cues demde E dur dosi ei o ds dbud ere eia ded erdum ees medion nomea 133 6 11 2 1 Scripts 0 cee ees 6 11 2 2 Java Accessibility 0 0 c ccc ccc RR 6 11 3 Testing wc ccecencetocenstneat eheae teat Cees ee bed eee uario sara ra pai em eal 135 6 11 4 References 0 teen eee hh hs 135 6 12 JPlug4ns and ADDIGlS sc cccecaaedtacansw rimini desudndsueideddnss OS EE dede 136 6 12 1 aluit c 136 5 12 2 WECNMIGUCS x aces sq noui d e dou e doe de deo d ERR PEE OX Rio os d e 136 occi P o S M 137 6 12 4 References sseleeeeeeeeee enhn hrs 137 DS EOS sredite d gece baer goes oe memes seeded suede aaeed ac eee cd Genes 137 6 13 1 a ziile pie ross cdeut nee oe neyo noosa PESO nes ea ae sue EEE EEE Been seuss ROSE 137 6 132 TECNNIGUES Leach d co mad amieta Ronda BEd REG A eee DEE a IIR IMPER 137 Glo NEGUING TT 141 6 13 4 References cauce nex E3qREEGA IR EES cee doOnICE OG DIRE GRON VUE qaid ceed TAS 141 6 14 Portable Document Format PDF Files 0 00 ccc eee ees 141 6 14 1 aiie gre e emease 141 6 14 2 Techniques ccc esnean annann naana naaraana 142 OAS TE ereer er ee dre r rE ee ee ee 143 6 14 4 References 0 ee eee tenet hrs 143 6 15 Repetitive Navigation 0 0 0 00 ccc ccc RII ne
121. 6 15 1 Rationale ccc Rees 6 15 2 Techniques 00 0 ccc ccc RH ees CISS Te po cctacnc py hw e a hosed abaet h A A rE 6 16 NENG RESPONSES uz e eu ounce ey cae os abore ardua E ENa mechan cae oe 145 6 16 1 pizu leil EMT 145 616 2 Tech c oo3 02 531 9429 1 01 2310 53593 cod Ipod red dod REIR dE PEERS 145 6 16 2 1 Inactivity When Applications Can Allow Users More Time 145 6 16 2 2 Fixed Time Limit When Applications Do Not Allow More Time 145 6 16 2 3 Notifying Users That A Change Has Occurred 000 e cece eens 146 6 16 2 4 Automatic Updating of Web content 0 cc ees 146 S160 E eeraa caene MEE BC Fe r E de pienso es MEE REO UR EAE 146 Appendix 6 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Checklist 233 2d da o eR dos Eg toe ne e Sedis eR dex i es Surex a 149 September 2004 ix 7 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Telecommunications Products lleeslse 151 7 1 Sa E T E cece E E E E EE E E E EEEE 151 7 1 1 Contents aana na anaana annene 151 7 1 2 SUMMA Er Ea aa wees aa a E ER T EEE 151 7 1 2 1 Beige seseina e Sin aah a a name E at nace aah kee Qe 151 7 1 2 2 nl sq rrr 153 7 1 3 Siruct re and 153 7 1 4 Introduction to Telecommunications Accessibility 0 0 00 eee eee eee 7 1 5 General Requirements cc ccc ccc eee een hh m 155 7 1 6 Testing for Compliance cc ccc ete
122. 8 A Video and Multimedia Products 8 5 3 September 2004 Closed audio description is preferred when the delivery and display mechanisms are known and available to support it see section 8 3 For example a multimedia demo that uses visual demonstration and narration to describe safe mail delivery procedures could offer audio descriptions that can be turned on and off for the visual demonstrations However if the delivery and display mechanisms are unknown or cannot support audio description or secondary audio program playback include audio descriptions in the primary audio channel For example the same multimedia demo referred to above that uses visual demonstration and narration to describe safe mail delivery procedures could offer audio descriptions in the primary audio track which would not be able to be turned off Computer based training CBT products including e learning applications and other Postal Service training productions can include multimedia as components of larger software applications Web based applications or closed products In these cases relevant specific requirements for both multimedia production audio descriptions must be satisfied in addition to other specific requirements found in other chapters For example a multimedia demo for Click N Ship distributed as an executable software application on CD ROM would have to comply with both video and multimedia requirements in addition to software app
123. 8 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 2 2 3 Exhibit 6 2 2 3 p 1 Using Long Descriptions Administrative Steps Technical Steps Coding Process 1 Build XML Cut amp Paste Code Request from this PDF File 2 Make Intemet Use HTTP Connection to Connection DLL or 3 Run Canned Test from Sever another interface Test Server 3 Send XML Cut amp Paste Code Request from this PDF File Cut amp Paste Code from this PDF File 5 Run Live XML from 4 Unpack XML Use VB Example amp Production Server Response Decoding Example If necessary 1 Register 2 Sign Licensing Agreement for API Connector Code if desired 4 Call lC CC for Access to Production Server Figure A Screen shot of a chart that describes the administrative and technical steps and the coding process for canned and live requests Figure B HTML code for the image in Figure A lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt HTML using the amp lt IMG amp gt tag longdesc attribute lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt img longdesc FlowchartExample LD html alt Description This graphic describes the administrative steps technical steps and coding process for canned and live requests src LongdescAttributeImage gif gt lt body gt lt html gt Figure A is an example of a chart containing complex information that requires the
124. Adobe PDF accessibility information http access adobe com information html i How to Create Accessible PDFs http access adobe com booklet1 html m Handbook AS 885 usps com Development Process and Standards Chapter 5 Section 5 5 File Formats http blue usps gov cpim ftp hand as885 E WebAIM Microsoft Word Accessibility Techniques htto webaim org techniques word WebAIM Adobe Acrobat Accessibility Techniques htto webaim org techniques acrobat 143 6 15 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 6 15 Repetitive Navigation Provide a method that will permit users of assistive technology the option to skip repetitive navigation links Section 508 Provision 81194 220 6 151 Rationale Insert a link that will allow the users to skip repetitive navigation links It is common for Web authors to place navigation links at the top bottom or side of every new Web page This technique can render the use of web content very difficult for persons using a screen reader because screen readers move through pages reading from top to bottom The use of repetitive navigation links and URL links forces persons with visual impairments to re read these links when moving to every new page Descriptive text links should make sense when read out of context such as in a HTML bookmark list by the screen reader e152 Techniques Insert a descriptive text link that will allow a user to skip the repetitive navigation links To facilitat
125. Associated Specific Requirements Keyboard Access Forms Activated Accessibility Features User Selected Display Attributes Color and Contrast On Screen Focus Forms User Interface and Programmatic Objects Consistent Use of Images Textual Information Forms Animation Color Coding Video Frequency Forms 97 98 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank Handbook AS 508 A 6 Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 1 Overview September 2004 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 1 2 1 Contents This chapter contains the electronic and information technology EIT performance requirements related to the following EIT Technical Standard 1194 22 Web Based Intranet and Internet Information and Applications Provisions a thru p Summary Technology The requirements in this chapter cover the following E All information technology solutions regardless of size or whether purchased or developed B Web based applications and all associated data information training material and documents Note For EIT requirements in more than one chapter of this handbook may apply For instance applications designed for both stand alone and Web browser environments may require compliance with the standards on software application and operating system accessibility chapter 5 Applications that include calls to video or multimedia or that are part of software that runs in
126. DB E FCC DTV Regulations htto www fcc gov dtv m FCC Accessibility of Digital Wireless Phones to Individuals with Hearing Disabilities http www fcc gov cgb consumerfacts accessiblewireless html 190 Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 12 m ICC ANSI IEEE C63 19 2001 Standard Methods of Measurement of Compatibility between Wireless Communication Devices and Hearing Aids htto webstore ansi org ansidocstore product asp sku C63 2E19 2D2001 E TIA 504 A Telecommunications Telephone Terminal Equipment Magnetic Field and Acoustic Gain Requirements for Headset Telephones Intended for Use by the Hard of Hearing R2003 http www tiaonline org standards search_results2 cfm document_no TIA 2D504 2DA m Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Guide to Section 508 Telecommunications http Wwww trace wisc edu docs 2002 508 collation index shtml style default telecomm m Trace Research and Development Center Access to Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP http www tracecenter org docs 2003 NMRC VoIP Access u Trace Research and Development Center Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Services Forum December 1 2003 Expanded Opening Comments of Gregg C Vanderheiden Ph D htto www tracecenter org docs 2003 12 1 FCC VolP Forum index htm m OSHA regulations http www osha slc gov OshDoc lnterp_data 119910401A html m Federal Interagency Committee on Disability Res
127. It may be useful to provide relative measures of interference among telephones with widely differing levels of interference Handset headset and hearing aid companies should provide ratings for their products against this standard 7104 References The following references apply to the specific requirements stated in this section E FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility Act http www fcc gov cgb consumerfacts hac html E FCC Accessibility of Digital Wireless Phones to Individuals with Hearing Disabilities http www fcc gov cgb consumerfacts accessiblewireless html m ICC ANSI IEEE C63 19 2001 Standard Methods of Measurement of Compatibility between Wireless Communication Devices and Hearing Aids htto webstore ansi org ansidocstore product asp sku C63 2E19 2D2001 E TIA 504 A Telecommunications Telephone Terminal Equipment Magnetic Field and Acoustic Gain Requirements for Headset Telephones Intended for Use by the Hard of Hearing R2003 http www tiaonline org standards search_results2 cfm document_no TIA 2D504 2DA September 2004 187 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide u Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Guide to Section 508 Telecommunications http www trace wisc edu docs 2002 508 collation index shtml style default telecomm m OSHA regulations http www osha slc gov OshDoc lInterp_data 119910401A html m Federal Interagency Committee on Disability Research ICDR Summit September 2003 Summ
128. Operating Systems Video and Multimedia Desktop Computer Based Learning Management Audiovisual material e Learning training functions e Learning creation functions 4 3 Training Systems May be presented in classroom Complex interaction with Registration browsing environment on the Web or as user selecting viewing individual an application running on a May include embedded courses desktop computer multimedia video material May include embedded multimedia or video May include downloads that launch software or video media player Administrative setup and reporting Construction of content for Construction of Web pages for Creation of multimedia video desktop application Web student and administration and audio content pages or video presentations functions Policy In this example provisions from three standards 1194 21 Software applications and operating systems 1194 22 Web based intranet and internet information and applications 1194 24 Video and multimedia products apply All relevant provisions must be met A full evaluation requires not only adherence to these specific provisions but an evaluation of the functional performance criteria of the entire system The Postal Service complies with the legal requirements of Section 508 for all of its purchases of EIT on and after June 21 2001 The Postal Service is committed to purchasing compliant EIT There are exceptions howe
129. Processes to Comply 463 Undue Burden Exception Undue burden means significant difficulty or expense In determining whether an action would result in an undue burden an agency shall consider all agency resources available to the program or component for which the product is being developed procured maintained or used 65 Federal Register 80502 These rare exemptions require the signature of a Postal oervice vice president on behalf of the requesting functional organization 9 tt From the procurement perspective Section 508 standards do not require the purchase of EIT that would require a fundamental alteration in the nature of a product or its components From the development perspective technology designed and built specifically for the Postal Service must be fully compliant 4 7 Documentation of Exceptions When the purchase of an EIT solution falls within even one of the three exception areas the Postal Service requires the functional organization to document the rationale for the exception Supply Management with the functional organization must include the relevant market research documentation in the contract file For general and specific exceptions the documentation is relatively easy to prepare When the purchase of an EIT solution would result in an undue burden to the Postal Service the requiring organization must prepare an undue burden justification signed by the vice president of the requiring organization The
130. Product provisions However since all devices need to meet the functional performance criteria described in section 4 2 1 products that incorporate touchscreens or contact sensitive controls are only able to meet these criteria if an alternative way of operating them using tactilely discernable controls was provided At this time some desktop and portable computer products with touchscreens and other contact sensitive controls do not conform with this provision For example there are PDAs with telephone functionality and touchscreens as well as desk telephones with touchscreen enhanced features that cannot be operated via tactile controls 262 Handbook AS 508 A Desktop and Portable Computers 10 2 2 1 September 2004 10 2 2 10 2 2 1 Requirement 2 states that controls and keys must be operable with one hand and must not require tight grasping pinching or twisting of the wrist The force required to activate controls and keys must be 5 Ibs 22 2 N maximum Individuals with tremor cerebral palsy or other disabilities may have difficulty operating systems which require fine motor control a steady hand or two hands to be used simultaneously for operation Individuals with high spinal cord injuries arthritis and other conditions may have difficulty operating controls which require significant strength The provision limits the force required to five pounds and is based on section 4 27 4 of the ADA Accessibility Guidelines This provi
131. Providing the user with the ability to adjust the flash speed see exhibit 6 9 2 b Minimizing the area of the screen that is flashing smaller areas are less likely to cause seizures C Avoiding flashing that has a high level of contrast between light and dark such as light colors and dark colors some individuals are more susceptible to high intensity flashing d Providing a feature that will completely disable the flashing or animation 129 6 9 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 6 9 2 Dialog Box Controlling Frame Rate of Animation Document Properties Dimensions Eai width x 400 px height Match Printer Contents Default Background Color Frame Fate E fps Ruler Units Pixels Help Make Default Cancel 69 3 Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable Ensure that a display that flickers or flashes is not within the frequency range of 2 to 55 cycles per second 2Hz to 55Hz and that there are no quick changes from dark to light like to strobe lights Ensure that page content is not affected if animations are disabled 6 9 4 References The following reference is p
132. S functions to provide textual information Textual information refers to both the text provided to or manipulated by the user e g text input boxes text displays tool tips captions window titles dialog text content copied text or about this software text information and to textual information provided programmatically through the operating system for use by assistive technology Figure A shows a standard dialog window that allows users to open a file In this dialog window the window title Open the folder name CFINAL DRAFTS and the filenames e g HB508 v20 13Nov2003b SWOnly doc are accessible textual information Figure B shows a standard file browser window The textual information for the listed documents is accessible as textual information This includes filenames and meta information such as file type and file size shown here in the ToolTip that is floating near the selected file Figure C shows a view of an operating system level clipboard to which document objects graphics and text have been copied The item surrounded by a solid orange line i e This textual information provides accessible textual information All accessible textual information can be read by assistive technology and can be adjusted by the user s operating system level display preferences i e colors fonts etc 9 7 2 2 Make Text Cursor Information Accessible Software applications must make text cursor i
133. Section 508 technical requirements are addressed in relevant areas of Requirements Document Functional Technical Data Interfaces Security and Implementation Solicit bids award contract and test the solution Write solicitations RFPs and statements of work Evaluate supplier responses Plan and conduct solution tests Certify and document Section 508 compliance in certification and system documentation Obtain user feedback and evaluate EIT solution for ongoing Section 508 compliance Create change requests to resolve Section 508 compliance issues and improve solution performance Ensure that applicable Section 508 technical requirements are included in solicitations RFPs and statements of work Assist in evaluation of vendor responses including development of evaluation criteria and assessment of vendor Voluntary Product Accessibility Templates VPATS Ensure that Section 508 testing methods are included in Customer Acceptance Tests Plan conduct and review solution and customer acceptance tests using applicable Section 508 testing methods Certify and document level of Section 508 compliance in a Postal Service operational environment Create Section 508 exception documents where necessary before deployment see appendix 4 A Update certification and system documentation Update appropriate databases ITK for leased bought sol
134. Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank Handbook AS 508 A Appendix 5 B summary of Software Applications and Operating Systems Testing Methods Following is a summary of the testing methods described in this chapter presented for reference only Manual inspection based testing using the methods described in this chapter must accompany any automated tests Some of these manual tests may be automated using testing tools or Integrated Development Environment IDE features as long as testing occurs in the context of usage by assistive technology users Testing Method Manual inspection without assistive technology but with keyboard only Manual inspection with and without assistive technology with focus on testing user selected activated accessibility features Includes both OS accessibility features display attributes and other settings Manual inspection with and without assistive technology to verify on screen focus Manual inspection to verify accessibility of user visible and programmatic textual information Includes labels for images Includes testing for all user interface and programmatic elements Manual inspection without assistive technology to verify that problematic elements can be disabled that alternate formats or access methods are provided Includes testing for a dependence on a modality Manual inspection for general design considerations September 2004
135. Section 508 Technical Reference Guide the other person says is typed by a Telecommunications Relay Service communication assistant and appears on the text display of the VCO user s telephone TTY The VCO user reads the text and no typing is necessary see Figure A Typed J Spoken Conversation Conversation TRS Text Callet Cnn at lean asic tant 5 Poken conversation Figure A VCO allows a caller to speak and receive typed responses from the other party via a Telecommunications Relay Service communication assistant or relay officer HCO is for people who cannot or prefer not to speak but who prefer to hear spoken conversation from the party they are calling Using an HCO telephone or TTY the HCO user types his or her side of the conversation and sends through a Telecommunications Relay Service communication assistant to the receiving party who hears the spoken conversation voiced by the relay officer The receiving party responds with spoken conversation that is heard directly by the HCO telephone TTY user see Figure B ES Typed A Conversation Conversation TRS Text Caller Communication As sis ne Lalhor pr Receiver Figure B HCO allows a caller to type conversation relayed through a Telecommunications Relay Service communication assistant or relay officer then hear spoken responses from the person they are calling VCO and HCO are most often used with the Telecommunications
136. This works well except when the combination is one of the problematic ones listed in section 5 8 2 2 For example Figure B pairs dark violet from the bottom part of the wheel with light gold from the top part of the wheel This results in an appropriate color combination that provides sufficient contrast as demonstrated by the translation to grayscale shown below the color version Avoid combinations that pair light colors from the bottom half of the wheel with dark colors from the top half For example Figure C pairs light red from the bottom half of the circle with dark green from the top half of the circle This color combination does not provide sufficient contrast as demonstrated by the translation to grayscale shown below the color version In addition it is a red green combination one of the combinations should be avoided as described in section 5 8 2 2 72 Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 8 2 3 5 8 2 3 Testing Manual inspection based testing using the methods described in this chapter must accompany any automated tests Some of these manual tests may be automated using testing tools or Integrated Development Environment IDE features as long as testing occurs in the context of usage by assistive technology users Conduct a manual inspection of the software application without assistive technology to verify that the application inherits operating system level display
137. Use Caution with Timeouts Automatic Updates and Refreshes some operating systems and software applications require that users respond or be active within a certain time limit to provide security and other features When the time limit expires a timeout can result which can in turn cause an automatic refresh an update of screen content a redirection to another resource a termination of a secure session a disconnection or a standby status due to resource limits Users with disabilities may require additional time to navigate perform functions and read information provided by operating systems and software applications When a system or application uses a timeout the timeout information should be provided to the user before use of the application ocreen content must not be automatically updated or refreshed unless the update is based on a user selection or user notification that an update is going to occur Resetting an application to an initial state or resets resulting from automatic screen updates should include an informative error message if possible USPS Information Technology ACE Platform operating system and applications requiring the use of an inactivity timeout timer will obtain the timer settings from a global parameter defined nationally This global parameter must not identify users by their disability or by and other personal information Refer to ACE Standards amp Guidelines for more information Web based appli
138. View Insert Format Tools Table Window Help Acrobat ayoo apan JEEP NI Figure A An application inherits a rich non high contrast color scheme from the OS display settings In Figure B the same word processing application s user interface presentation has been changed based on the user s selection of a black high contrast color scheme that is available in the operating system s display control panel Il M In Figure C a different high contrast display Figure B The same application inherits a black setting this time a white based setting has high contrast color scheme from the OS display settings been selected by the user and is inherited by the word processing application uil HB508 v20 13Nov2003b SWwonly doc Microsoft Word i File Edit View Insert Format Tools Table Window Help Acrobat Windows Im application developers can support Oe Ba 6aY s BAd o gt OROR E ER inheritance of user selected display settings in casei decas eve applications they develop by using the MFC library or Windows API WII TT 2 m Fm 481 Rationale People who cannot differentiate between cel may have difficulty navigating or interpreting content that is dependent upon the ability to Figure C The same application inherits a white high contrast color scheme from the OS display settings 5 8 2 2 Use Appropriate Color Combinations Operating systems and software
139. Ys Specifically the equipment must support the U S 45 5 baud Baudot protocol i e the TIA EIA 825 A standard A Frequency Shift Keyed Modem for use on the Public Switch Telephone Network and the 300 baud ASCII protocol Alternatively the newer international standard ITU T V 18 standard is sufficient to support the requirements of this provision Note that using TTYs over wireless networks presents different issues than using TTYs over TTY over voice over IP VoIP Testing a Inspect the product to determine if it provides 2 way telephone functions i e 2 way voice communication b Research the standard TTY signal protocols that support TTY use and determine which apply to the product in question e Refer to standard methods and tools that exist for TTY signal protocol testing for digital wireless Apply a consistent approach to TTY protocol testing that uses standard test case data scripts and automated protocol capture and analysis tools for measuring transmission accuracy see Gallaudet University in References d Conduct a performance test on the product Use overall error performance tests from the TTY Forum s TTY Technical standards implementation tests suite and additional tests as appropriate http www atis org atis tty ttyforum htm End to end performance tests using Gallaudet test scripts should be technology independent References The following references apply to the specific requirements stated here
140. a method must also be offered that allows users to change the elements flash rate or disable them altogether 9 10 4 References The following references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here Epilepsy Action Photosensitive Epilepsy http www epilepsy org uk info photo html International Code Council ICC ANSI A117 standard Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities ICC ANSI A117 1 199 http www iccsafe org dyn prod 9033598 html Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Self Contained Closed Products 1194 25 htto www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 25 htm 9 11 Operable Controls on Freestanding Non Portable Devices September 2004 Products which are freestanding nonportable and intended to be used in one location and which have operable controls must comply with the following a The position of any operable control must be determined with respect to a vertical plane which is 48 inches in length centered on the operable control and at the maximum protrusion of the product within the 48 inch length see Figure Ajof this part Where any operable control is 10 inches or less behind the reference plane the height must be 54 inches maximum and 15 inches minimum above the floor Where any operable control is more than 10 inches and not more than 24 inches behind the reference plane the height must be 46 inches maximum and 15 inches minimum above the
141. able to 2 seconds per character and d The status of all locking or toggle controls or keys must be visually discernible and discernible either through touch or sound e For touchscreens provide an appropriate alternate access method that supports requirements a d shown above 10 21 Rationale These provisions apply to user operable controls which are components of a product that are operated by physical contact Typically the control panel or user interface and their major components buttons keys and knobs are the primary items of concern However mechanically operated controls such as latches are also covered as long as they require contact for normal operation Examples of normal operation would include selecting features ejecting a CD ROM and pressing keys Operable controls required for maintenance service repair installation and configuration or occasional monitoring are not covered by this provision An example would be an RJ 11 plug that may be connected into a jack only one time Requirement 1 states that individual keys be locatable and distinguishable from the product surface and adjacent keys by touch This provision only applies to products that have mechanically operated controls or keys such as standard telephone keypads and computer keyboards It is not intended to apply to touchscreens Touchscreens and other contact sensitive controls are not specifically prohibited by any of the Telecommunications
142. access keys This includes the menu bar system menu and context sensitive menus Second the user can access the menu items by pressing various keyboard equivalents i e shortcut keys in the Windows Operating System that are indicated in underlined characters e g R key to restore the window size N key to minimize the window and C key to close the window Screen readers will read aloud the menu item followed by the keyboard equivalent e g Restore R Third the user can access these menu commands directly by typing the keyboard equivalent and not even invoking the menu For example the active window could be closed by typing the defined keyboard equivalent ALT F4 Restore Alt F4 An example of keyboard access to a global window menu that contains commands for manipulating windows The figure shows a global window menu that is a standard control in the Microsoft Windows operating system The menu can be accessed from any active window by pressing ALT and SPACEBAR at the same time In the figure shown here the software provides three ways to interact with the menu First the user can manipulate the active window from this menu by using the ARROW keys to navigate the menu items then pressing the ENTER key 42 5 2 2 2 Provide Keyboard Access to Toolbars Provide redundant menu items that allow users to access all toolbar actions or provide keyboard access to toolbars Toolbar
143. ace and Programmatic Elements 5 5 1 5 5 2 5 5 2 1 58 Sufficient information about a user interface element including the identity operation and state of the element must be available to assistive technology When an image represents a program element or control the information conveyed by the image must also be available in text as described in 5 7 Provision f Textual Information Section 508 Provision 1194 21d Rationale People with disabilities use a computer with the aid of assistive technology such as a screen reader screen magnifier or Braille display Assistive technology must be able to discern and track information about objects accessible to it so it can describe magnify or manipulate the object for the user e g a screen reader can translate information about the focused object into voice output To do so assistive technology must be able to inform the user of the existence location role and status of controls such as menus toolbars and other inputs i e text inputs checkboxes radio buttons or drop down or list selectors Software applications must using program code and user visible text provide information about all user interface elements so an assistive technology can locate and track the focus and tell the user what the focus object identity is as well as its role operation and state For example if you TAB through a form and focus is on a radio button you need to know it is a
144. ader 144 Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 16 2 2 6 16 Timed Responses Exhibit 6 15 2 1 6 16 1 6 16 2 6 16 2 1 When a timed response is required users must be alerted and given both a mechanism and sufficient time to indicate that they need additional time Section 508 Provision 1194 22p Rationale A disability can have a direct affect on the speed with which a person can read and move around Web content The Web page session may expire which can in turn cause an automatic refresh an update of screen content a redirection to another resource a termination of a secure session a disconnection or a standby status if a response is not received within a specified time Refreshing or redirecting the user to new Web content can confuse and make it difficult for users of assistive technology Techniques Inactivity When Applications Can Allow Users More Time If the business or security requirement is that an application should timeout after a fixed period of inactivity alert the user when a timeout is about to occur Give the user ample opportunity to answer a prompt asking if the user needs more time Web Session Timeout Warning Dialog A LSPS Click N Ship Session Timeout Warning Web Page Dialog x Your session will expire in approximately 7 minutes To extend your session and prevent losing your saved data please refresh this page or navigate t
145. agency Committee on Disability Research ICDR held this timely summit in September 2003 Participants included representatives from the digital wireless telephone and hearing aid industries disability organizations research centers and federal agencies Presentations were made on laws that address Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 10 4 hearing aid compatibility new technological developments telephone designs that reduce interference and results of laboratory and consumer testing E Consider using various techniques that help reduce interference emissions from digital wireless i e cellular telephones including the following m Positioning the antenna away from the ear area E Reducing power E Modifying the antenna to reduce radio frequency currents in the area near the user s ear E Using a clamshell design that moves the antenna away and partially shields it E Providing the user with ability to turn off backlighting E Inserting shielding in the wireless cellular digital telephone b Replacing an omnidirectional antenna with a directional antenna 7103 Testing a Conduct an inspection of the telecommunication product to determine if it provides telephone functions i e 2 way voice communications b Usethe ANSI IEEE C63 19 standard as a guide for compatibility between wireless telephones and hearing technologies It does not provide an absolute measure of interference across hearing aid types
146. al basic information for use of software including customer support It is often located either in an About dialog box or on a splash screen or both d Document which text elements are not accessible via the screen reader including text content text cursor location and text attributes e For the text element s in question fix then retest using this procedure Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 8 1 5 74 References a Microsoft Input Method Editor and Text Services Framework Accessibility htto msdn microsoft com library default asp url library en us dnacc html ATG_TSF asp m Sun Java Developing Accessible JFC Applications http www sun com access developers developing accessible apps Note Postal Service developers and purchasing agents are strongly urged to obtain updated references for application or operating system accessibility references when designing or purchasing Postal Service applications 5 8 User Selected Display Attributes Color and Contrast September 2004 5 8 1 Software applications must not override user selected contrast and color selections and other individual display settings i e color schemes and background patterns that provide sufficient contrast fonts and sizes for the display of user interface elements When a software application permits a user to adjust color and contrast settings a variety of color selections capable of producing a
147. al must be provided at a standard signal level through an industry standard connector that will allow for private listening The product must provide the ability to interrupt pause and restart the audio at anytime 1194 25 Provision e Rationale This provision requires that when products use audio as a way to communicate information the auditory signal must be available through an industry standard connector at a standard signal level Individuals using personal headsets or similar audio processing devices need a place to plug these devices into the product in a standard fashion This gives the user the ability to listen privately to an audio presentation of information that is also presented visually The product must also provide a method to pause restart and interrupt the flow of audio information The classic instance of this provision is the use of ATMs by blind people If an ATM provides an audio rendition of the screen contents instructions on how to turn on pause interrupt and restart the audio must also be provided This provision applies only to voice output It does not require an audio output for devices that emit only beeps and tones People who regularly use information transaction kiosks and require audio rather than visual output generally carry a portable headset or other listening coupler with them Examples of common plugs on headsets include 3 5 mm plugs the de facto standard in kiosks and used in most porta
148. alibrated wheel slider or other control do the following Measure the base default output and the maximum gain a Ensure that the maximum gain is at least 20 dB above the default level C If the device provides discrete intermediate volume levels via a push button or other control E Measure the gain at each incremental level ranging from base default to maximum i Ensure that the maximum gain is at least 20 dB above the default level m Ensure that one of the intermediate volume levels is 12 dB above default level References The following references apply to the requirements stated in this section i FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility Act http www fcc gov cgb consumerfacts hac html i ICC ANSI A117 1 1998 Standard Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities http webstore ansi org ansidocstore product asp sku lCC9 262FANSH A117 2E1 2D1998 177 7 8 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide u Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Guide to Section 508 Telecommunications http www trace wisc edu docs 2002 508 collation index shtml style default telecomm m OSHA regulations http www osha slc gov OshDoc lInterp_data 119910401A html i FEC Voting System Standards April 30 2002 Provides some guidance on explicit volume levels http www fec gov pages vssfinal vss html 8 Automatic Volume Heset 178 7 8 1 If a telecommunications product that provides telephone functions allows a use
149. ality such as voice mail systems auto attendant and interactive voice response systems Techniques Voice Mail Auto Attendant and IVR Systems Must Be Accessible to TTY Callers Voice mail auto attendant and interactive voice response systems must be usable by TTY callers both to leave and retrieve messages and to use the system features Making voice mail auto attendant and IVRs usable involves two tasks ensuring the IVR has the technical capabilities needed for TTY compatibility and implementing menus and messages so they are TTY compatible TTY users both the caller and the receiver must be able to navigate and use all end user functions of IVRs independently without relying on a telecommunications relay service i e IVRs should be able to send and receive TTY signals directly The TTY character error rate should ideally be no greater than that experienced by non TTY users The benchmark used for wireless TTY compatibility is an average error rate of no higher than 1 percent TTY users must have sufficient time to read and respond before the system times out Assume that TTY users will have a DTMF i e touchtone enabled TTY configuration such as telephone with TTY attached wireless telephone with TTY attached or DTMF enabled TTY Time limits for user response based on those requirements in section 7 5 should be considered for the IVR system to be usable as this provision requires The Handbook AS 508 A Telec
150. all provisions This provision is essentially an objective specification Figures are given in appendix 9 A 9 113 Testing September 2004 a Inspect the product to identify its measurements b If an exception was taken when procuring a device that is not fully accessible define the alternate method needed to provide equivalent access to people with disabilities who can not readily use the device 253 9 11 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 9 114 References The following references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here E ADAAG 4 2 Space Allowance and Reach Ranges htto www adaportal org Facility_ Access ADAAG Appenadix ADAAG Appendix 4 2 html E Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Self Contained Closed Products 1194 25 htto www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 25 htm 254 Handbook AS 508 A Appendix 9 A Self Contained Closed Products Accessibility Questions Products that are freestanding nonportable and intended to be used in one location and that have operable controls must comply with the following Standard Questions to Ask Notes Subpart B Technical Standards 1194 25 Self contained closed products Self contained products must be usable by people with disabilities without requiring an end user to attach assistive technology to the product Personal headsets for private listening are not assistive technology When a timed resp
151. ally faced with challenges such as E Control functions located beyond range of user s reach Lack of timeout controls and saving of user input upon timeout a Inaccessible hardware keys controls and switches m Lack of error recovery features E Reliance on voice or manual input 9 1 5 General Requirements Accessibility is accomplished by purchasing or developing self contained closed products that accommodate the widest range of users including those with disabilities Listed below are some general requirements that will help the Postal Service ensure continued accessibility of self contained closed products E The Postal Service will develop and procure self contained closed products that take advantage of built in accessibility features when those features are available to both end users and product developers Handbook AS 508 A Self Contained Closed Products 9 1 5 The Postal Service will procure or develop self contained closed products that recognize and maximize the capabilities of the accessibility features installed and activated by a user via an attached personal computer e g operating system features and assistive technologies that enable control of dialogue boxes to activate device controls Postal Service self contained closed products procurement personnel and developers should do the following Buy or build products that support self contained closed products standards Accessibility features are of
152. an image used as a background Using the Alternate Image Attribute Pa Figure A United States Postal Service logo with eagle lt html gt lt head gt meta content text html charset IS0 8859 1 http equiv content type gt title 6b Alt Attribute Example lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt img alt USPS logo with eagle src http www usps com images headnav gif body lt html gt The following graphic is a screen shot of an image that has an alt attribute associated with it The code for this image immediately follows the screen shot F UNITED STATES POSTAL SERVICE Figure B HTML code for image in Figure A lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt 106 6 2 2 3 Provide Long Descriptions in Addition to Alternate Text Use the ongdesc attribute when alternate descriptive text is not sufficient to adequately convey the information from a non text element The ongdesc attribute provides a longer more detailed description This requires the creation of an additional HTML file that stores the more detailed information about the non text element The ongdesc attribute is placed within an image lt IMG gt tag to link the description or data to the image The following graphic is a screen shot of an image that has a longdesc attribute associated with it The code for this image immediately follows the screen shot Handbook AS 50
153. and focus changes Section 508 81194 21c September 2004 93 Appendix 5 A Requirement Number and Summary Yes No or N A 94 User Interface and Programmatic Elements Sufficient information about a user interface element including the identity operation and state of the element must be available to assistive technology When an image represents a program element or control the information conveyed by the image must also be available in text as described in Textual Information Section 508 81194 214 Consistent Use of Images When images are used to identify or represent controls status indicators or other user interface or programmatic elements the meaning assigned to those images must be consistent throughout a software application Section 508 1194 21e Textual Information Software applications must provide textual information using operating system functions for displaying text The minimum information that must be made available is text content text cursor location and text attributes Section 508 81194 21f User Selected Display Attributes Color and Contrast Software applications must not override user selected contrast and color selections and other individual display settings i e color schemes and background patterns that provide sufficient contrast fonts and sizes for the display of user interface elements When a software application permits a user to adjust color and contrast
154. and non security commands or user input One example is a high security computer system or information transaction machine that uses retinal scanners or fingerprint identification controls to identify users before providing them access to personal or sensitive data Another example is a portable computer that offers an optional voice command feature to allow the user access to various applications or data stored on the computer In the latter example the voice commands are a benefit because they help the user make selections or provide input more quickly or in a hands free mode While biometric controls offer many benefits they can present significant barriers to people with various disabilities This requirement addresses this problem by requiring that when biometric controls are used an alternate access method must be provided that does not compromise security and that does not require specific biological features e g voiceprint fingerprint retinal scan to activate or operate the controls Techniques When biometric forms of user identification or control are used an alternative access method that does not require the user to possess particular biological characteristics must be provided Some examples include i A shared desktop computer located in a plant management office uses a fingerprint scanner to provide secure access to highly confidential files for a select group of Postal Service employees As an alternative to the fing
155. aningful object name role state and value is not accessible to assistive technology d For the objects in question fix then retest using this procedure 5 54 References B Microsoft Active Accessibility htto msdn microsoft com library default asp url nhp default asp contentid 28000544 E oun Java Developing Accessible JFC Applications http www sun com access developers developing accessible apps B UNIX Linux GNOME User Environment Accessibility Project htto developer gnome org orojects gap The Accessibility Framework includes an Accessibility Toolkit Application Programming Interface and an Assistive Technology Service Provider Interface E USPS Information Technology ACE Standards amp Guidelines http it usps gov pls itprodnp page psite id 10 amp pnode id 273 Note Postal Service developers and purchasing agents are strongly urged to obtain updated references for application or operating system accessibility references when designing or purchasing Postal Service applications 5 6 Consistent Use of Images September 2004 5 6 1 When images are used to identify or represent controls status indicators or other user interface or programmatic elements the meaning assigned to those images must be consistent throughout a software application Section 508 Provision 1194 21e Rationale Images can represent concepts or user interface elements within a software application e g file folder slider bar or
156. anizations C Respond to Section 508 inquiries or complaints from employees following established procedures d Provide information on the status of Section 508 EIT compliance as required e Create exception or undue burden documents for approval of their respective vice president when a solution is not completely Section 508 compliant see of this handbook 2 12 Section 508 Stewards Liaisons for Accessibility 12 Section 508 stewards as designated by their Postal Service officer do the following a Acquire an in depth knowledge of Section 508 requirements b Coordinate Section 508 activities within their respective organizations C Respond to reporting requirements on Section 508 compliance within their respective organizations d Stay abreast of changes to the Section 508 program e Develop an ongoing education information awareness activity to make sure employees within their organization are aware of Section 508 program updates Handbook AS 508 A Roles and Responsibilities 2 13 2 13 Importance of Compliance Compliance with Section 508 requirements does the following a Demonstrates our commitment to implementing business practices that make our IT based products and services accessible to our employees and customers with disabilities b Reinforces the worldwide reputation of the Postal Service as a trusted provider of communications for all people C Enhances business opportunities
157. anufacturer nonproprietary industry standard codes translation protocols formats or other information necessary to provide the information or communication in a usable format Technologies that use encoding signal compression format transformation or similar techniques must not remove information needed for access or must restore it upon delivery 81194 23 Provision j Controls and Keys Products which have mechanically operated controls or keys must comply with the following four requirements 1194 23 Provision j 1 Controls and keys must be tactilely discernible without activating the controls or keys 2 Controls and keys must be operable with one hand and must not require tight grasping pinching or twisting of the wrist The force required to activate controls and keys must be 5 Ibs 22 2 N maximum 3 If key repeat is supported the delay before repeat must be adjustable to at least 2 seconds Key repeat rate must be adjustable to 2 seconds per character 4 The status of all locking or toggle controls or keys must be visually discernible and discernible either through touch or sound Handbook AS 508 A 8 Video and Multimedia Products 8 1 Overview September 2004 8 1 1 Contents This chapter contains the specific electronic and information technology EIT performance requirements related to the following subpart of Section 508 EIT Technical Standard 1194 24 Video and Multimedia Products Provision
158. appropriateness of the product to meet business requirements 2 Define the exception s Document that the best overall choice has been made at the present time Does not comply A product does not comply if it cannot achieve compliance as defined by the relevant Section 508 Technical Standards or Functional Performance Criteria Note Upgrades or events may require reevaluation at which time an alternative and more compliant product might be available See chapter 4 for guidance on how to document an exception or an undue burden 19 20 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank Handbook AS 508 A 4 Section 508 Postal Service Processes to Comply This chapter describes how accessibility compliance integrates into existing Postal Service processes focusing on two aspects of the system life cycle the procurement process and the development process These processes overlap the Postal Service uses electronic and information technology EIT products and systems both as off the shelf solutions and as components of custom developed solutions This chapter contains the following m A high level overview of the steps involved in procuring and developing technology solutions that comply with Section 508 g Two tables demonstrating how Section 508 is a fundamental part of the Postal Service Integrated Systems Methodology ISM E Guidance on understanding applying and documenting exceptio
159. ard keyboard equivalents the following keyboard operations should be tested a Navigate to display and select each menu and menu item with keyboard equivalents This includes the menu bar system menu and context sensitive menus 48 Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 2 4 Access and select all functions provided on toolbars via redundant menu items or using keyboard equivalents i e Alt F4 or Ctrl C Ensure that all toolbar button functions can be performed using the keyboard Move the focus between application windows sections or panes of application windows and modeless dialogs using standard keyboard equivalents Move resize minimize restore maximize scroll and close windows using standard keyboard equivalents Navigate logically to every control in application windows and dialogs and operate all controls using standard keyboard equivalents Perform functions that are normally provided through mouse operations including commonly used commands such as text or object selection clipboard commands i e cut copy and paste or graphic resizing using some keyboard access method e g keyboard equivalents or menu items 5 24 References The following standard access keys and key combinations which are normally specified in the platform s user interface style guide document must be supported by software applications Microsoft Windows Keyboard Design Guide http www mic
160. ardless of format that contain visual information necessary for the comprehension of the content should be audio described where possible Section 508 Provision 1194 24d User Selectable Captions or Audio Descriptions Display or presentation of alternate text presentation i e captions or audio descriptions must be user selectable unless they are permanent Section 508 Provision 1194 24e Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Comments Handbook AS 508 A Appendix 8 B Summary of Video and Multimedia Delivery Methods and Requirements Use this as a reference tool for understanding detailed specific requirements found in this chapter Note that only content determined to be critical to the Postal Service s mission is required to comply with these captioning and audio description requirements Delivery Mechanism or Component Television broadcast video content where at least one production or transmission element is analog Stereo television broadcast video content where no elements are analog VHS format taped video content except raw footage Analog display hardware Digital televisions digital video receivers computer display hardware Digital media player software September 2004 Captioning Audio Description Requirements Requirements Provide open audio Open captions Closed captions must be user selectable Open captions may provide both uncaptioned and open captioned versions on
161. are tactilely discernable Refer to Section 7 12 Controls and Keys m COTS non standard with a PC interface For high end devices that have an interface via a connected PC either directly attached or on the network refer to section 9 2 above for details 9 423 For PDAs x For PDAs that are closed systems Despite the difficulty of finding compliant devices in this category many PDAs have touch screens and are thus governed by this provision Some PDAs provide for the installation of a full keyboard as an alternate method of input m For PDAs that have operating systems Refer to above for details 943 Testing a Inspect the product to identify if the device provides a function allowing access as specified in terms of operation with limited vision hearing or mobility b Operate all functions of the device without contact with the touch screen performing the following tests 1 Evaluate a prototype with accessibility experts 2 Evaluate functions with an experienced user 3 Evaluate functions with a novice user G If the text on the screen has an equivalent audio channel that communicates the text in a spoken form turn off the screen use a headset and operate all functions of the device d If an exception was taken when procuring a device that is not fully accessible define the alternate format or alternate method needed to provide equivalent access to people with disabilities who can not readily use the d
162. asure the force needed to activate the control The force required to activate controls and keys must not be more than 5 lbs 22 2 N The effects of knob diameter toggle configuration surface textures surrounding surfaces etc will likely influence this measurement Include measurements for only push controls as it may be difficult to measure the force required by non push button controls such as pull type rotary slide thumb wheels and toggles Requirement 3 Ensure appropriate key repeat rate and delay E Hold a key down for 2 seconds or more and observe if key repeat occurs E Hold a key down for less than 2 seconds and note whether the key repeat occurred it should not have m Inspect the user manual and reference manual to determine if key repeat delay is adjustable If so note the allowed range of times for repeat delay Requirement 3 Ensure that key repeat rate can be adjusted z Inspect the user manual and reference manual to determine if key repeat rate is adjustable If so note the allowed range of repeat rates Requirement 4 dentify all locking or toggle controls or keys excluding maintenance and setup features For each locking or toggle control or key E Check that the status of the control or key is visually discernible ai Check for either an audible or tactile indicator for the status of the control or key Requirement 5 Identify all touchscreen controls keys or interfaces For each control o
163. at All Controls and Keys are Easy to Use LLs 10 2 2 3 Key Repeat Must Be Adjustable 0 0 0 0c ees 265 10 2 2 4 Status of Locking Toggle Controls or Keys Must Be Discernible 265 10 2 2 5 When Touchscreens Are Used Provide Alternate Access Method 266 D ES ICSU E REm 266 10 2 4 References lelseeeeeeeeeeee eh hh hh hes 268 10 3 Biometric User Identification and Controls 0 cc ccc eee eens 269 10 3 1 Rationale vane scaeGeeon lt uCeugnvennteaeeneasasdeee PUTES se eee PETER ESSET UTE TE 269 103 2 TechnIglleS xoa saacs aie a dena grades den ae dee Rr Eos ede nod de wknd oed a wed 269 103 9 ON sued ubESPIESPISIESENREANEES eae neem eed eae edad ER DES sarees 270 10 3 4 References ccc m hh hrs 270 10 4 Industry Standard Expansion Slots Ports and Connectors 0000 c eae 271 10 4 1 Rationale nsavvebaterougdceaherennyaeey arene yasewameaww ebay gu equ asd d ced qe 271 10 4 2 Techniques ii uu d rhyme me dmm oet Oe dia dene dedi dea dade deus 272 IOA WOGUAG f255 comb nce E SEV EED NE Tes TEC TR BRE ERE ARR eis ee 272 10 44 References 0 ccc hh hh 272 Appendix 10 A Desktop and Portable Computers Accessibility Checklist 275 11 Information Documentation and Support 277 11 1 SAUL cesena eE AA eterno eneenaneeededensesendecieecde seca ts 277
164. at a PDA has telecommunications functions it comes under the standard discussed in Telecommunications Products This standard in this chapter 1194 25 covers a single class of technology technology that is closed to the installation of software that can enable access The provisions in this standard apply to a single device devices that represent the convergence of multiple standards e g a fax machine that supports voice communications or to self contained devices within a complex systems Audience This chapter applies to anyone who buys or develops self contained closed products or systems for the Postal Service i e Postal Service employees suppliers contractors and business partners Structure and Use Each part of this chapter describes the specific requirements that support one or more provisions in the technical standards for self contained closed products The technical standards of Section 508 were written primarily from a technology perspective The Postal Service may consolidate some provisions to help Postal Service employees and business partners understand Postal Service compliance requirements from the perspective of designing for accessibility Each specific requirement includes a rationale techniques testing methods and references as shown below in Overview Usability Without Assistive Technology Provision 1194 25a m Rationale m Techniques E Testing m References Allowing Sufficient Time Provis
165. at has higher end features and encourages hearing aid manufacturers to label their pre customization products according to the ANSI C63 12 2001 standard 793 Testing a Conduct an inspection of the telecommunication product to determine if it provides audio output from a transducer in a handset or headset b Measure the magnetic field produced by the handset or headset microphone or examine the manufacturer s product documentation m Wireline telephones Must adopt FCC Part 68 Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC testing method E Wireless telephones There are no final FCC criteria should adhere to requirements stated above under Techniques 794 References The following references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here E FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility Act http www fcc gov cgb consumerfacts hac html E FCC Accessibility of Digital Wireless Phones to Individuals with Hearing Disabilities http Wwww fcc gov cgb consumerfacts accessiblewireless html i ICC ANSI A117 1 1998 Standard Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities http webstore ansi org ansidocstore product asp sku IlCC 262FANSH A117 2E1 2D1998 E ICC ANSI IEEE C63 19 2001 Standard Methods of Measurement of Compatibility between Wireless Communication Devices and Hearing Aids htto webstore ansi org ansidocstore product asp sku C63 2E19 2D2001 i ANSI IEC 60118 13 Ed 1 0 b 1997 Standard Hearing aids Part 13 Electromagnetic
166. at http blue usps gov cpim ftp hand as885 pdf Postal Service employees are required to register all Web based applications in the Enterprise Information Repository EIR at http eir This information will be used to report compliance and includes any related Section 508 noncompliance issues Testing for Compliance When testing Web based applications and information for compliance it is important to be aware that a Web based application can only include only functionality supported by the Web client on which it executes For example a Web based application running on the current generation of Web browsers can provide graphical functionality and support the most common Internet technologies However if those same users operate their computers a text browser they are restricted to a primarily character based environment with little graphical capabilities It is crucial to be aware of the client browser environment the user is accessing when considering review and accessibility compliance with Section 508 In addition it is important to be cognizant of the functionality available to users with disabilities via the accessibility aids available on the operating system in use Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 2 2 1 Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools or integrated
167. ata please refresh this page or navigate to another page in this application Figure B The alert that warns users of an impending timeout in the Click N Ship application 88 Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 12 2 7 5 12 2 6 Support User Scanning of Forms and Confirmation of Input Provide an option for users to review or confirm the input they have provided via an electronic form and provide a mechanism for revising input where appropriate Allow users to scan the contents of a form before providing input by offering form or screen level validation instead of control level validation of user input Where control level input is required use valid preselected default values to prevent users from being able to scan through form controls sequentially without being required to provide input If it is not possible in such cases to preselect such control level input use form or screen level validation instead i e validate user input when the user attempts to submit the form For more techniques and information see Section 5 2 Keyboard Access Exhibit 5 12 2 6 Example of User Confirmation of Input An example of offering users a way to confirm the pida Shipping Label input they have provided on an electronic form abel Summary i EUN used by the Postal Service s Click N Ship Please confirm the following information p p application Address Information PoS MMM Pelv
168. ated concurrently with the primary Web source The Postal Bulletin is an example of providing alternate format in both pdf and html http www usps com cpim ftp bulletin pb2004 htm For internal and external Postal Service Web content that alternate format may be an HTML plain text or rich text format RTF file For internal sites only the alternate format may also be one of the native formats used by the Postal Service for its standard suite of office products i e Microsoft Words Excel and PowerPoint9 Since files provided externally must be presented in alternate formats available to non Microsoft platforms standardizing on the non Microsoft alternate formats plain text txt or rich text format rtf instead of MS Word doc files comma separated values csv instead of MS Excel xls files hyper text markup language html instead of MS PowerPoint is preferred In considering the options suggested above keep in mind the extent of the conversion and review efforts the resources required to maintain separate Web content the size of the alternate file format and the time that it will take to load or download the file the availability of a source file and the relevance of existing PDF files The conversion of PDF files requires extensive review comparison and validation Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 14 4 September 2004 6 14 3 6 14 4 Print only PDF
169. be consistent with proposed revisions to the ADA Accessibility Guidelines which in turn are being harmonized with the International Code Council ICC ANSI A117 standard Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities ICC ANSI A117 1 1998 which refers to a 2 Hz limit An upper limit was identified at 55 Hz See Section 5 11 Software Applications and Operating Systems Video Frequency 9 102 Techniques Purchased products should be the most compliant available developed products must be compliant If displays contain elements that flicker they must adhere to the specification of this provision 9103 Testing a X Search for flashing or blinking text objects or other user interface elements Also search for elements that employ a quick change from dark to light similar to strobe lights 250 Handbook AS 508 A Self Contained Closed Products 9 11 Use an electronic tester i e screen calibrator or a software test feature to determine the time interval between flashes for all blinking or flashing user interface elements If any flashing or blinking objects cannot be tested they will need to be omitted from the software application altogether Adjust or fix any flashing or blinking elements that have an unacceptable Hertz range or that have a high level of contrast between states Ensure that flashing areas of the screen are kept to as small an area as possible For all blinking or flashing elements that are included
170. ber 2004 7 2 1 Telecommunications products or systems that provide telephone functions I e 2 way voice communication and which do not themselves provide TTY functionality must provide a standard nonacoustic connection point for TTYs Microphones must be capable of being turned on and off to allow the user to intermix speech with TTY use 1194 23 Provision a Rationale People with significant hearing or speech disabilities commonly use text based communication to converse over the telephone Teletypewriters TTYs allow transmission of text conversations by telephone in real time This provision addresses two different issues One deals with the way a TTY is connected This is important to ensure signal quality as well as to make the conversation possible in some cases The other issue pertains to providing support for certain classes of TTY users who communicate by mixing speech and text on a call TTYs traditionally have had acoustic modems that use couplers on the top of the device These are frequently used in offices where hearing people answer the telephone The acoustic coupling mode allows a hearing call taker to answer in voice and put the handset into the TTY coupler if needed for a TTY call Thus providing a handset that is compatible with a TTY is often helpful for these situations However a direct connection is often needed for its unique benefits such as TTY answering machine capability and keyboard dialing In additi
171. ble stereos and 2 5 mm jacks used in most cellular phones According to the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and the American Speech Language and Hearing Association 65 dB is the volume level for normal speech seelsections 7 7land 7 8lof this handbook Products that provide auditory output must have a feature that automatically resets the volume to the default level after every use This is consistent with the similar provision addressing telecommunications products Techniques For Kiosks E ITM Kiosk without full PC interface Kiosks that have no full PC functionality e g an ATM require an audio equivalent to screen output u ITM Kiosk with full PC interface See section 9 2 2 1 of this handbook for details 245 9 6 2 2 246 9 6 2 2 9 6 2 3 9 6 3 9 6 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide For Copiers Printers Calculators and Fax Machines m COTS without PC interface For simple devices that have no interface via a connected PC either directly attached or on the network audio output is not yet a standard feature a COTS non standard with a PC interface See section 9 2 2 2 of this handbook for details For PDAs See section 9 2 2 3 of this handbook for details Testing a Inspect the product to identify if the device provides a function allowing access as specified in terms of operation with limited vision hearing or mobility b As presently defined this prov
172. ble textual information Heading Fields Recipient Closing Fields Header Footer In this figure the accessible user visible textual in formation includes a window title Memo Wizard a process indicator showing steps in the wizard pro Eaa A cess and current location style an input label Which style would you like input option labels Professional Contemporary and Elegant and push button labels Cancel lt Back Next gt and Finish The controls also offer accessible programmatic textual information such as the identity role and state of the form elements For example in the figure the radio button input option for Professional would communicate the textual information radio button and selected to a screen reader Finish 5 12 2 2 Provide Keyboard Access to Controls Provide the ability to navigate logically to every control in a form and to operate all controls using the keyboard i e keyboard equivalents For example the TAB key is a standard for navigating among groups of controls and the ARROW keys are a standard for navigating among controls within a group Pressing ENTER and SPACEBAR are standards for operating controls i e selecting a list element or submitting a form for processing Navigation should be in a logical tab order among controls in a form The tab order is the order in which the TAB key moves the keyboard fo
173. but is not limited to any pre produced video productions considered to be mission critical such as those used in training product or service demos health or safety videos or advertising produced for distribution on television or on the Internet When Display Mechanisms Support SAP Playback Include Audio Description on Broadcast or Taped Videos When Postal Service television or video productions are dubbed onto videotape or broadcast via mechanisms that support SAP playback the video production should include standard i e closed audio description if possible Supportability for SAP playback is covered in section 8 3 This requirement includes but is not limited to any pre produced video productions that are distributed over television Web or computer based TV channels and that are considered to be mission critical such as those used in training product or service demos health or safety videos or advertising produced for distribution on television or on the Internet Audio description is always created using a dubbing process Using a master video i e a dubmaster a video program is first routed through an encoder which embeds the primary and secondary audio program tracks onto tape or onto the broadcast signal This information can then be recorded onto various 219 8 5 2 3 220 8 5 2 3 8 5 2 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide formats that will result in an audio described master i e VHS SVHS Beta SP
174. cations have specific timeout requirements addressed in Section 6 16 Timed Responses 61 5 5 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 5 5 2 5 Example of Timeout Security Dialogs for an Operating System User Name Password Settings For High Battery Performance power scheme OK When computer is tx Plugged in Runni E 3 batter Turn off monitor Never Atte 5 min Figure A The Unlock Computer dialo g p g Turn aff hard disks Never After 3 min Unlock Computer My Computer Name Power Options Properties Beeps Alarms suepend H ibermmate JD Advanced Settings Power schemes Alarms Power Meter Advanced n Select the power scheme with the most appropriate T this computer Note that changing the settings belor This computer is in use and has s the selected scheme Only Jane Q Smith or an admini this computer Power schemes window in Windows 2000 Professional Operating System System standby Never Atte 10 mi TN Figure B Setting the Power Options in Windows 2000 which also determines lockout settings Some examples of a timeout security dialog for an operating system Figure A shows the Windows 2000 Professional Unlock Computer dialog box This computer is in use and has been locked after timing out based on some system standby settings provided by the operating system Figure B shows the Windows 2000 Power Options
175. ccessibility features has been documented by the manufacturer of the operating system and is available to the product developer Section 508 Provision 81194 21b Rationale Assistive technology uses operating system accessibility features to provide information and feedback from software making it easier for people with a variety of disabilities to use their computer These accessibility features are activated and adjusted by the user and by assistive technology to make the on screen focus operation and state of software components and information accessible via various input and output devices e g keyboard mouse audio or video For example when a user tabs through an electronic form and the focus is on a radio button object the user needs to know the following E That the object is a radio button E That the focus is on the radio button m That the radio button is selected Software applications must recognize and properly interact with the product or operating system s activated accessibility features without disrupting or disabling them Software applications are required to use standard controls and reliable accessibility frameworks or application programming interfaces APIs that are documented by the manufacturer of the operating system or product Note that additional requirements for supporting user selected display settings which are often included in operating system accessibility features are described in Secti
176. ce 620 data 20terminal 20equipment 20serial 20binary 20data a IEEE Std 1284 1994 Standard Signaling Method for a Bi directional Parallel Peripheral Interface for Personal Computers IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers http global ihs com doc detail cfm currency code USD amp customer id 21254C4A4B0A amp shopping_cart_id 27274833254B3020495A202027 OA amp country code US amp lang code ENGL amp item_s_ key 00151636 amp ite m_key_date 991231 amp input_doc_number 1284 amp input_doc_title amp org_ code EEE E Small Computer System Interface SCSI a set of ANSI standard electronic interfaces that allow personal computers to communicate with peripheral hardware htto global ihs com search_res cfm currency_code USD amp customer_i 21254A4A4B0A amp shopping_cart_id 27274833254B3020495A20202 70A amp country_code US amp lang_code ENGL amp input_doc_title scsi amp org_c ode ANSI 272 Handbook AS 508 A Desktop and Portable Computers 10 4 4 m PCMCIA Standard Release 2 1 JEIDA 4 2 July 1993 PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association htto www pcmcia org ia Universal Serial Bus Specification Revision 2 0 April 27 2000 Compag Computer Corporation Hewlett Packard Company Intel Corporation Lucent Technologies Inc Microsoft Corporation NEC Corporation Kominklijke Phillips Electronics N V http www usb org developers data usb 20 zip E IrDA SIR Data Specification for an
177. cessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities which refers to a 2 0 Hz limit Operating systems and software applications must not use flash or blink rates in the range stated above This includes but is not limited to flashing text rapid screen writes graphics that turn on and off and repeatedly changing or animated user interface elements If software uses flashing or blinking user interface elements offer a feature that allows the user to change their frequency or disable them Techniques Use Only Acceptable Flashing and Contrast Ranges Software applications must avoid providing user interface elements that flash or blink in the frequency range between 2 and 55 cycles per second 2 0 Hz and 55 0 Hz and that have a high level of contrast Contrast means a difference in visual attributes i e hue lightness saturation of an object s foreground and background One possible development technique involves setting the flashing or blinking elements to the operating system cursor blink rate The cursor blink rate can be set by the user and can be set to a range between 0 2 and 1 2 seconds Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 11 3 The software application can use the cursor blink rate to control the blink rate of other user interface elements When software applications do provide flashing elements development techniques must be used to allow the user to control certain aspects of the flashing elem
178. change in the form or content of the information as sent and received This definition is used extensively in law and regulations affecting telecommunications products Therefore there exists substantial legislative regulatory and case history defining its terms and scope Techniques Products that transmit or conduct information or communication must pass through cross manufacturer non proprietary industry standard codes translation protocols formats or other information necessary to provide the information or communication in a usable format Products and technologies that use encoding signal compression format transformation or similar techniques must not remove information needed for access or should restore it upon delivery Some examples of such codes or protocols include the following E NTSC Video with closed captions m NTSC Video with descriptive audio in the alternate audio channel i Digital Video with closed captions Digital Video with secondary audio programs 189 7 11 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide m Traditional telephone data stream between two users of TTY equipment m Voice over IP data stream between two users of TTY emulating software 7113 Testing a Inspect the product or technology for products that transmit or conduct information Inventory each product or service in the transmission path b Depending on the product type determine what accessibility information is encoded in the
179. chnical Reference Guide information when typed to a TTY user via relay may not include necessary spacing or punctuation to help a consumer understand sections of what is being conveyed TTY users have discovered that some voice mail systems corrupt TTY data left in voice mail boxes Moreover as IVRs replace receptionists operators and other customer support methods TTY users may actually lose services that they previously relied on and may be completely unable to call anyone in an agency even if the person has a TTY on their desk because they cannot get through the automated receptionist Such IVR systems not only must be fully functional for people who are calling in while using a TTY but must also be fully functional to people who subscribe to the voice mail service and use a TTY to access it Voice mail systems that allow TTY users to retrieve and leave TTY messages are now available This provision does not require telephone systems to provide voice to text conversion capabilities IVR products that provide TTY users all of the same functions and information as they do for non TTY users such as reading streaming text leaving messages and managing personal voice mail have been available for more than a decade This software should not be confused with other software on the market that is designed to allow computers to transmit and receive TTY code for live communication This provision applies to all devices that incorporate IVR function
180. controls offer many benefits they can present significant barriers to people with various disabilities This requirement addresses this problem by requiring that when biometric controls are used an alternate 243 9 5 2 244 9 5 2 9 5 3 9 5 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide access method must be provided that does not compromise security and that does not require specific biological features e g voiceprint fingerprint retinal scan to activate or operate the controls Note This provision is also part of the desktop and portable computer standard discussed in chapter 10lof this handbook Techniques According to the Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance board The provision does not require a specific alternative That selection is left up to the agency which may choose a less expensive form of identification 36 CFR Part 1194 Some potential alternatives include the following E A shared desktop computer located in a plant management office uses a fingerprint scanner to provide secure access to highly confidential files for a select group of Postal Service employees As an alternative to the fingerprint scan the system provides an alternate access method by allowing the user to enter a password and answer some additional verification questions This alternative access method is also beneficial for all users either as a redundant check or in situations where the primary method is inadequate
181. ction 508 requirements Disseminate Section 508 knowledge for their area Champion Section 508 compliance of their area Determine how Section 508 applies to each new business function Ensure that market research and other Integrated Systems Methodology ISM procedures include Section 508 considerations within the EIT life cycle Document Section 508 compliance within their area of responsibility including updates to the Enterprise Information Repository EIR Infrastructure Tool Kit ITK or other databases as needed Assist Functional Organizations to document exceptions when a solution is not completely Section 508 compliant 2 5 Vice President Labor Relations The Vice President Labor Relations LR does the following a Provides policies and procedures on the Section 508 employee complaint process and any other labor related areas affected by Section 508 Integrates Section 508 policies and procedures into existing labor relations processes and documents Creates and conducts training to affected parties to promote awareness 2 6 Vice President Supply Management 10 The Vice President Supply Management does the following a Provides policies and procedures on how the Postal Service purchases any products that involve compliance with Section 508 requirements 1 Creates and incorporates applicable procurement clauses into the Purchasing Manual Handbook AS 508 A Roles and Responsibilities 2
182. ctions and cues Section 508 Provision 81194 211 Rationale People with mobility dexterity cognitive or visual impairments who rely on assistive technologies often confront barriers when using electronic forms The Postal Service and its many government and commercial business partners use electronic forms in software or Web applications to gather information or permit employees and customers to access services benefits or employment People with disabilities who use assistive technologies must be able to access complete review revise and submit all parts of an electronic form to use it successfully e g filling out an electronic shipping label When electronic forms are designed to be completed within a software application including a Web based application the form must allow people using assistive technologies to access the information controls i e input fields checkboxes radio buttons or push buttons and functionality required to complete review revise and submit it including all directions and cues The two primary characteristics of an effectively coded accessible form are that 1 the form provides programmatic and user visible textual information about inputs and controls i e they are labeled and named and 2 the form can be completed using keyboard equivalents Forms with these two primary characteristics will likely be usable by people who use assistive technology or who rely on the keyboard to use th
183. cus from one control or item to the next Normally the tab order is from left to right and then top to bottom 84 Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 12 2 3 Exhibit 5 12 2 2 Example of Providing Keyboard Access to Controls Memo Wizard An example of providing keyboard access to controls start O wien tvs i vou Ner located in a word processing software application i abcr Mari O ae This figure shows a standard wizard style form that uses standard form elements or controls i e radio iie B buttons and provides users the ability to navigate and Closing Fields dis operate the controls in a logical order Header Footer In this figure the TAB key can be used to navigate logically among all controls including the window title Memo Wizard an input label Which style would you like input option labels Professional Con temporary and Elegant and push button labels Next gt Finish Cancel and lt Back Note that the order for the push buttons is in the most logical order Next gt is the default option and is therefore first in the tab order followed by the next logical button Finish Finish Here the input options i e the radio buttons can be selected using SPACEBAR and the ENTER key can be used to operate i e SUBMIT a push button control 5 12 2 3 Expose On Screen Input Focus Ensure that all standard a
184. d captioning Supportability for closed captioning is covered inlsection 8 2 This requirement includes but is not limited to any pre produced video productions that are distributed over television Web or computer based TV channels and that are considered to be mission critical such as those used in training product or service demos health or safety videos or advertising produced for distribution on television or the Internet Closed captioning is always created using a dubbing process Using a master video i e a dubmaster a video program is first routed through an encoder that embeds the closed caption file data i e the caption text equivalents onto line 21 of the vertical blanking interval VBI of the television signal This information is then recorded onto various formats that will result in a Handbook AS 508 A Video and Multimedia Products 8 4 2 4 September 2004 8 4 2 2 8 4 2 3 8 4 2 4 closed captioned master i e VHS SVHS Beta SP DigiBeta DVCPro or DVD When Display Mechanisms Do Not Support Closed Captioning Include Open Captions on Taped Videos When Postal Service television or video productions are dubbed onto videotape or broadcast and the display mechanism is either unknown or does not support closed captioning the video production must contain open captioning This requirement includes but is not limited to any pre produced video productions considered to be mission critical such as those
185. d implements processes resulting in the institutionalization of Section 508 Handbook AS 508 A Roles and Responsibilities 2 3 2 3 Section 508 Technical Stewards The VP CTO designates a Technical Steward for each of the six EIT accessibility standards see http cto usps gov click on Support Standards amp Guidelines 508 Standards and Support Technical Stewards and their associated EIT technical standards are listed in exhibit 2 3 Technical Stewards do the following for their respective EIT standard s a Serve as the Postal Service technical experts b Provide technical guidance and support for the content of Postal service Section 508 policy and technical documents to enable the Postal Service to comply with Section 508 when purchasing or developing EIT C Provide technical guidance and support to Postal organizations on their specific Section 508 standards d Establish testing and evaluation benchmarks that are in harmony with the generic testing approaches and techniques defined in this handbook e Stay abreast of changes to the technical standards and update Postal Service Section 508 policy and technical documents accordingly f Help functional organizations respond to inquiries and complaints concerning the class of technology for which they are the stewards g Create and conduct training on the technical area of their stewardship h Coordinate among stewardships to ensure that interpretations rendered
186. dant and interactive voice response functions that apply This must include all of the operational functions which excludes maintenance and setup features required to be used by the end users of the system b Inspect the product using the checklists provided by the Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions Interactive Voice Response Accessibility Forum http inclusive com ivr access There are checklists for Voice IVR and TTY IVR Complete both checklists to verify compliance with this provision e Inspect the product using the Human Factors and Ergonomics Society s Guidelines for Human Factors Engineering of Software User Interfaces Interactive Voice Response IVR and Telephony see Reference below These guidelines are compatible with ISO IEC IS 13714 Information technology Document processing and related communication User Interface to Telephone based Services Voice Messaging Applications but is less specific than the specifications in ISO IEC IS 13714 http www atis org pub IVH HFES 200 5 pdf Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 4 4 September 2004 744 References The following references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here m Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Guide to Section 508 Telecommunications http www trace wisc edu docs 2002 508 collation index shtml style default telecomm E Gallaudet University s Technology Access P
187. dard display settings For example the application can offer a checkable menu item called Use System Display Settings under a View or Options Menu When software applications allow users to customize colors 69 5 8 2 70 5 8 2 5 8 2 1 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide the application must provide more than just a variety of color choices The color choices must provide different levels of contrast Techniques OS Level and Application Display Settings Design software applications so that they inherit operating system OS level display settings These settings can be selected by the user and include color schemes and background patterns that provide sufficient contrast fonts and sizes for the display of user interface elements e g windows menus toolbars icons standard controls or display resolution When some controls e g menus inherit these display settings they can be resized automatically e g application menus or contextual menus can expand to display menu items in the user selected font and font size If a software application overrides these user selected OS level display settings or provides nonstandard display settings the application must allow the user to select these settings within the application These application level settings must include the minimum display options offered by the operating system e g a choice of color schemes that provide sufficient contrast between colors f
188. dbook AS 508 A Video and Multimedia Products 8 4 1 Department of Defense s Computer Electronic Accommodations Program Guidelines for Computer Aided Real Time Captioning CART http www tricare osd mil cap services services_acc_cart cfm E FCC DTV Regulations htto www fcc gov dtv i United Kingdom Office of Communications Ofcom Guidance on Standards for Audio Description http www itc org uk codes guidelines broadcasting tv sub sign audio audio description stnds H Joe Clark Media Access Comments on U K Guidelines for audio description http joeclark org access description ukad html Macromedia Flash Player Home http www macromedia com software flash Microsoft Windows Media Home Page htto www microsoft com windows windowsmedia default aspx m Real Networks SMIL Basics Tutorial http www realnetworks com resources howto smil smilbasics html The Telecommunications Act of 1996 http www access board gov about Telecomm Act htm The Television Decoder Circuitry Act of 1990 http www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 24 decoderact htm World Wide Web Consortium s list of SMIL Players htto www w3 org Audio Video SMIL 8 4 Captioning of Video and Multimedia Productions September 2004 8 4 1 All training and informational video and multimedia productions that support the agency s mission regardless of format that contain speech or other audio information necessary for the comprehension of the co
189. deo or multimedia itself see section 8 4 Like subtitles captions display spoken dialogue found in various video and multimedia products as visual text on television displays or computer monitors in a variety of Postal Service settings Unlike subtitles captions are specifically designed for hearing impaired and deaf viewers to identify speakers and spoken text and to enable their full participation when viewing video or multimedia products though they have also proven to be beneficial to a wider range of viewers Captions are Exhibit 8 2 1 A diagram showing a video carefully placed so as not to interfere signal including Line 21 being received with the visual presentation and often and interpreted and played back by include information regarding on and Caption Decoder Circuitry in a television display or computer monitor Handbook AS 508 A Video and Multimedia Products 8 2 2 3 September 2004 8 2 2 8 2 2 1 8 2 2 2 8 2 2 3 off screen sound effects such as music major sounds or human sounds such as laughter Captions are also useful for people who are learning a foreign language learning how to read or watching television in a noisy area as well as for those who understand best by processing visual information There are two kinds of captioning that are used to provide such access to the audio portions of video and multimedia products open captioning and closed captioning see the Glossary for definitions
190. derally mandated system Title IV of the ADA that exists in all states primarily to provide a translation function for TTY callers This process is slower than audio calls Voice mail messaging auto attendant and interactive voice response systems may timeout before the TTY caller can receive the system s message in TTY code from the CA and type in their response In addition when multiple choices are offered TTY callers may need to clarify the options with the communication assistant before understanding their choices For TRS users response time limits are a significant barrier This provision is also very pertinent to users of a type of relay service known as Speech to Speech STS STS callers do not use TTYs STS callers have speech disabilities and use specially trained STS CAs to repeat what they are saying so that the other party can understand them Sometimes more than one attempt is necessary for the CA to understand what the person is saying before the CA can begin to pass the message on Also due to other physical disabilities the STS user may also have difficulty entering DTMF tones in a timely fashion Designers are reminded that this timeout provision applies to all users of voice mail messaging auto attendant and interactive voice response systems not just to TTY users For these reasons this provision requires that users be alerted when a time limit is approaching and that they be given the option for extending the tim
191. dia Authorware or Click2Learn s Toolbook offer support for captioning multimedia For example some development applications support standard APIs for speech to text options e g Speech Application Programming Interface included in the Microsoft Active Accessibility programming kit Testing For each multimedia or video production that is developed or purchased determine the delivery method for the production then use the following general method to test compliance with the specific requirements in this section m If the production is a video and the delivery method is unknown or not known to support closed captioning whether on tape or via broadcast make sure that open captioning is permanently encoded on the video track of the production If open captioning is not included author and encode it before distribution m If the production is a video and the delivery method is external or known to support closed captioning make sure that the production is encoded with closed captions Test the video broadcast and display on equipment capable of decoding closed captioning Ensure that the user can enable view and disable the caption track of the video E If the production is a live event e g conference or webcast determine if a real time captioning system technology and captioner resources can be used in the event If not ensure that an appropriate real time alternate format or access method is available to all participants s
192. dn microsoft com library default asp url nhp default asp contentid 28000544 B Microsoft Developer Network Accessibility Information for Developers htto msdn microsoft com at E IBM Guidelines for Java Accessibility API using JFC Swing components or Custom Components http www 3 ibm com able guidelines java accessjava html E GNOME User Environment Accessibility Project htto developer gnome org orojects gap The Accessibility Framework includes an Accessibility Toolkit Application Programming Interface and an Assistive Technology Service Provider Interface E Sun Java Developing Accessible JFC Applications http www sun com access developers developing accessible apps Note Postal Service developers and purchasing agents are strongly urged to obtain updated references for application or operating system accessibility references when designing or purchasing Postal Service applications 5 4 On Screen Focus September 2004 5 4 1 Operating systems and software applications must provide a well defined on screen indication of the current focus that moves among user interface elements as the input focus changes The focus must be programmatically exposed so that assistive technology can track focus and focus changes Section 508 Provision 1194 21c Rationale The position on a screen where an action can occur is referred to as the focus For example when an item in a software application s menu bar is highl
193. documented and communicated to the user E Make sure that the controls provided to turn audio descriptions on and off whether hardware or software comply with other specific requirements found in other chapters of this handbook E If the audio descriptions cannot be turned on and off if the controls used to do so are not compliant with applicable requirements in other chapters of this handbook or the feature is not documented and communicated use a different information technology to deliver the production author and encode open audio descriptions in the video or multimedia production before distributing it or provide an appropriate alternate format or access method see sections 8 5 2 2 and 8 5 2 4 8 6 4 References The following references provide additional guidance on the techniques described above but must not be used in place of the general and specific Postal Service requirements in this chapter If any of these references conflict with Postal Service requirements defer to the Postal Service requirements m Access Board 508 Universe My training courses Accessible Conferences htto www section508 gov training index cfm FuseAction CourseMenu amp CourselD 2 Note Site registration is required to access this link E Access Board Captioning Time Cost Considerations Matrix htto www section508 gov training docs captionCostMatrix doc E Access Board Checklist for Audio Describing Video and Multimedia http
194. e 9 11 1 aculex lcm R UPUPPTMM 9 112 Techniques 32245 9 408 n DECRE QE e 0 9 CR dominate CRI o e ECCE WR ee i SARS TO c r 9 11 4 References 0 cc hh hes Appendix 9 A Self Contained Closed Products Accessibility Questions 10 Desktop and Portable Computers ree 10 1 e 2B ARM 10 41 GODS seus eure pPSPIPITOE UPS cout eens seen scene erre SUPPE neque PUMP 10 1 2 SUITE uxaeuxiene nime dene oda ended don ehe a gehen dg Red meted da weed TO T 2 1 TecnnolOgV auus exces demas davies doses dosed Bap xb xr oA EE dees bases n 10 1 2 2 Audience qaia qc Sub dob dod Ox dOIGE HC end EO ROLE EHE DEOR c RE cos September 2004 XV Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 1O0 1 9 Structure and Use css cade sacas ismod o duod Ed ERU Feet SU eda TES x mes 260 10 1 4 Introduction to Desktop and Portable Computer Accessibility 260 10 1 5 Testing for Compliance llslelsleeeeee III n 261 10 2 Mechanical or Touch Operated Controls Keys and Touch Screens 262 10 2 1 PRU OV ANG uices Scie te pte oni ceca QI oci D onde andar dod drach dade rici gee 262 1022 TECNNOUCS EEETETRTOITT ITI OL TT TTE 263 10 2 2 1 Ensure That Users Can Locate Keys By Touch Without Activating Them 263 10 2 2 2 Ensure Th
195. e Ideally users will have the option of overriding the timed response and will be able to take as much time as required to enter their responses Alternately users may continually be alerted to the timeout and extend it as long as they need until they can effectively respond to the system as long as user s input is not erased each time a time extension is evoked and granted This provision applies to all voice mail messaging auto attendant and interactive voice response systems that require a user response within a specified time interval Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 5 2 3 752 Techniques 7 5 2 1 Provide Warning Before Response Period Timeouts and Preserve User Input When timed responses are required provide a warning 5 seconds before response period timeouts and ensure preservation of user input IVR systems used by the Postal Service should minimally use timed responses However when a timed response is required users must be given the option of indicating that additional time is needed to complete their response especially when using a standard or STS telecommunications relay service If additional time is requested the information entered before the warning announcement must be preserved and the user should be allowed to continue inputting information from the point in the message flow where the warning was communicated For example if the user is required to enter information such as a Social Secur
196. e control or key 7124 References The following references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here Tiresias International Information on Visual Disability guidelines for tactile identifiers on keys htto www tiresias org guidelines keys htm Enable Tech Tools to Consider Keyboards http www enabletech ie Tools2 html Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 12 4 Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Telecommunications Products 1194 23 Updated June 21 2001 htto www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 23 htm Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Guide to Section 508 Telecommunications September 2004 http www trace wisc edu docs 2002 508 collation index shtml style default telecomm Section 4 27 4 of the ADA Accessibility Guidelines ADAAG codified as the ADA Standards for Accessible Design as part of the Department of Justice s regulation implementing title III of the ADA at 28 C F R pt 36 Appendix A Telecommunications Act Accessibility Guidelines htto www access board gov adaag html adaag htm 4 27 197 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank 198 Handbook AS 508 A Appendix 7 A 7 6 Telecommunications Products Accessibility Checklist Use this as a tool for high level guidance in determining if a telecommunications product is compliant or accessible
197. e challenges resulted in the development of specific video and multimedia accessibility standards in Section 508 Here is a summary of those challenges E People with hearing disabilities are typically faced with challenges such as E Lack of closed captioning support in broadcast or transmission methods E Lack of closed captioning support in display technologies such as TVs monitors and media players E Lack of closed or open captioning as an included feature of a video or multimedia production E Lack of ability to turn closed captioning on and off using both hardware and software controls or using functions built into video or multimedia productions u People with visual disabilities are typically faced with challenges such as E Lack of support for secondary audio program SAP or stereo audio in broadcast or transmission methods E Lack of support for secondary audio program SAP or stereo audio playback in display technologies such as TVs monitors and media players m Lack of audio descriptions as an included feature on a SAP of a video or multimedia production E Lack of ability to turn SAP content on and off using both hardware and software controls or using functions built into video or multimedia productions While making video and multimedia products accessible presents many challenges the greatest barrier to compliance with Section 508 is lack of knowledge Video and multimedia products can sometimes b
198. e control the user selectable requirement is applicable While analog technologies are limited digital media production distribution and display methods e g CD ROMs DVDs or Web provide increasing support for alternate channels These alternative visual and auditory channels and methods can be used to integrate captions and audio description more easily into digital video and multimedia productions 223 8 6 2 224 8 6 2 8 6 2 1 8 6 2 2 8 6 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Techniques Offer Features for User Selection of Closed Captions When closed captions are provided video or multimedia productions or the information technology of which they are a component must offer a feature where possible that allows users or administrators to turn them on and off independently The method used for selecting closed captions varies greatly depending on the video or multimedia format and display methods used For example on screen menus must offer a text based menu option that does not require hearing and that allows users to enable or disable closed captions In addition controls provided to enable or disable captions must comply with other specific requirements found in other chapters of this handbook For example for multimedia that requires a media player software application to view it the controls used in the software application must comply with applicable requirements in Chapter 5 Software Applicatio
199. e digital cellular network and TTY protocols are not compatible In order to provide accessible digital cellular phone service the agency would have to replace its digital cellular network An evaluation is done and it is determined that this represents an enormous expense and difficulty An agency is going to procure five kiosks for a proof of concept on a new way of providing agency information and conducting transactions with its customers The cost to make the experimental kiosks compliant is more than the cost of the trial itself However if the proof of concept is successful the final implementation would be built to comply with Section 508 In this case an undue burden could be determined for the proof of concept phase of the program Section Ill Alternate Means or Format of Access Describe the alternate access method or format being provided that allows the disabled individual to have access to and use of the information and data comparable to that provided by the less than compliant EIT Section IV Future Purchases If applicable describe the plans to obtain compliant EIT in future purchases Section V Comparison of Cost If applicable provide a summary of the cost analysis justifying acquisition of the less compliant EIT Section VI Approval The vice president or person in a higher level of the requiring organization must approve this justification Preparer Program Manager Vice President Required 36
200. e easy tracking of page content insert a descriptive text link before a repetitive navigation link so that users will be able to go directly to the main content of the page This link may either be displayed to all users or be transparent so that it can be read only by a screen reader To make a link transparent use either a 1 pixel GIF that is the same color as the background or the hyperlink The 1 pixel GIF can also be a transparent GIF This GIF file must also have an alt attribute that states Skip navigation or a hyperlink that is the same color as the background that contains the text Skip navigation between the A href gt tag and the A tag The user must be taken to the main content of the page e153 Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In your testing perform the following steps as applicable i Examine all repetitive navigation links Ensure that you insert a descriptive text link that will allow a user to skip the repetitive navigation links Check the link to make sure that it takes the user directly to the main content of that Web page i Examine links apart from the body of the document Make sure that descriptive text still makes sense when read out of context by the screen re
201. e format or access method 111 6 3 2 112 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Techniques Provide synchronized captions or transcripts of audio content Provide a descriptive text equivalent for audio clips if the information in the audio clip helps the user to interpret the content of the Web content See the requirements for non text elements in section 6 21 Provide text and audio descriptions of the action occurring in the video See the requirements for non text elements in section 6 2 Provide a link to any player or plug in that is required to render multimedia Update alternate formats and access methods concurrently with the audio and video Web content Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable m search for all audio and video objects Ensure that each audio and video object has a corresponding equivalent accessible alternate format E Verify that the content of the alternate format or access method is equivalent to and updated concurrently with the content of the primary audio and video Web source Ensure that no information has been lost and that the meaning has remained the same Use screen
202. e information documentation and support Testing for Compliance When testing products and systems for compliance it is crucial to be aware of the end user environment This includes an understanding of the product s stated accessibility features in the context of Postal Service use Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by disabled users Automated testing tools or integrated development environment IDE features useful in testing some technical classes of EIT are of little value for evaluation of information documentation and support Perhaps one of the best ways to test for accessibility of information documentation and support is to simulate use of product accessibility documentation alternate formats for product documentation and support services 11 2 Provide Support Documentation in Alternate 280 Formats 11 2 1 Product support documentation provided to end users must be made available in alternate formats upon request at no additional charge 81194 41 Provision a Rationale The goal of this provision is to enable people with disabilites to access independently and in a timely manner the information and support available to non disabled people From the Final Rule of Section 508 alternate formats are defined as follows Formats usable by people with disabilities may include but are not limited to Braille ASCII text large print record
203. e made accessible with minimal difficulty and expense In addition buying or building accessible video or multimedia products can benefit the population at large not just people with disabilities 203 8 1 5 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 8 1 5 General Requirements 204 Implementation of specific requirements will require research on the current accessibility features of the target platform operating system or transmission broadcast method All video and multimedia productions should be designed with the evolving open standards for accessibility that support cross platform use i e use of SMIL standards that are supported by most digital media players etc Sections 8 2 8 3 and 8 6 provide detailed requirements for hardware and software technologies used to produce transmit and display video and multimedia and 8 6 provide detailed requirements for authoring and encoding captioning and audio descriptions in video or multimedia content documentation or applications Captioning and audio description or an appropriate alternate format or alternate access method are required for all productions defined as mission critical by the agency This includes but is not limited to any pre produced video or multimedia productions used in training product or service demos health or safety videos or advertising produced for wide distribution on Postal or external television networks or on the Internet Manual in
204. e methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable m Test with Assistive Technology AT to ensure that all content from scripts applets or plug ins is accessible Use the most recent version screen reader with the Java Access Bridge and the Java plug in to test Java applications for accessibility Developers can ensure that the environment is set up appropriately by using the quick check utilities available from Sun a Verify that the content of the alternate format or alternate access method is equivalent to the content and functionality of the primary Web source and that it is updated concurrently with the primary Web source Ensure that no information has been lost and that the meaning has remained the same References The following references are provided for more information on this topic but must not be used in place of the Postal Service guidelines given above If these references are in conflict with the above techniques you must defer to the Postal Service guidelines Li Java Accessibilit htto www 3 ibm com able accessjava html Writing accessible Java applications http www 106 ibm com developerworks Java library access E Sun s JAVA accessibility utilities http www sun com access downloads sun Java Developer s Forum htto developer java sun com developer community chat index html E Trace Center examples of accessible Java
205. e of User Confirmation of Input 0 0 0 ccc ee III Exhibit 6 2 2 1 Example of Alternate Text for an Organization Chart lisse zucca D X cvcXETTTEEMTS 106 Using the Alternate Image Attribute isleeeeeeeeee RII 106 Exhibit 6 2 2 3 Using Long Descriptions lsseeseeeeeeeeeeee RR hs 107 Exhibit 6 2 2 4 Using Descriptive Links and Appropriate Use of Blank Alternates 0 0 00 c cece ees 110 Exhibit 6 5 2 1a Example of an Incorrect Use of Style Sheets 0 cc ccc cee eet een 115 Exhibit 6 5 2 1b Example of Style Sheets Used Correctly 0 0 c ccc tne nent s 116 XX Handbook AS 508 A Exhibits Exhibit 6 6 2a Example of a Client Side Image Map sseeseeee ns 118 Exhibit 6 6 2b Example of a Server Side Image Map With Redundant Text Links 0 0 00 ce eee 118 Exhibit 6 7 2 1 Example of a Simple Table Using the header and id Attributes 0 0 0 ccc eee 121 Exhibit 6 7 2 1b Example of a Simple Table Using the scope Attribute 0 0 cc ees 122 Exhibit 6 7 2 2b Example of a Complex Table Using the axis Attribute 2 0 00 cece eee eee ees Exhibit 6 7 2 2c Example of a Complex Table 0 0 eee teen ence tent ras 126 Exhibit 6 8 2 2 HIML Code f r Frames oi aida ad da 1rd adm ET RPE EIN ERE EDU TEBUS qud qu R RUE dba Rud dese 127 Exhibit 6 9 2 Dialog Box Controlli
206. e product offer a secondary method of input that does not require a particular biological feature 8 Does the product produce audio output 9 Is there a standard port to attach headsets 10 Can you start stop and pause the audio 255 Appendix 9 A Standard Questions to Ask Notes f 256 When products deliver voice output in a public area incremental volume control must be provided with output amplification up to a level of at least 65 dB Where the ambient noise level of the environment is above 45 dB a volume gain of at least 20 dB above the ambient level must be user selectable A function must be provided to automatically reset the volume to the default level after every use Color coding must not be used as the only means of conveying information indicating an action prompting a response or distinguishing a visual element When a product permits a user to adjust color and contrast settings a range of color selections capable of producing a variety of contrast levels must be provided Products must be designed to avoid causing the screen to flicker with a frequency greater than 2 Hz and lower than 55 Hz Products which are freestanding nonportable and intended to be used in one location and which have operable controls must comply with the following 1 The position of any operable control must be determined with respect to a vertical plane which is 48 inches in length centered on the operable cont
207. e to the program or component for which the product is being purchased Attempt to include all known facts and situations that influence the justification of significant difficulty or expense a Identify the specific applicable portions of the Section 508 standards for which a decision has been made to purchase something that is less compliant than what is available in the commercial marketplace Include a description of the market research performed b For each element describe the significant difficulty or expense Below are some examples of considerations that may constitute either a significant difficulty or expense September 2004 35 Considerations Incompatibility Consider the Postal Service s IT infrastructure including security and the difficulty of integrating the EIT product into that infrastructure Nature and cost of compliance Consider and address these elements in formulating the required cost benefit analysis as appropriate Overall financial resources available to the program of the requiring or ordering activity funding the purchase The number of persons members of the public and or Postal Service employees affected by noncompliance Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Example An agency wants to contract with a digital cellular provider for cellular phone service The agency learns that TTY signal protocols are required and the agency digital cellular network cannot accommodate them because th
208. e to the requirements for Web based information in chapter 6 for documentation provided via the Internet or Web Testing a Inspect the product or evaluate the supplier s VPAT or similar statement that describes whether the product in question s documentation is provided in alternate formats and that those formats are clearly communicated Alternate formats may include but are not limited to Braille ASCII text large print recorded audio and electronic formats that comply with applicable requirements depending on their delivery method b For documentation delivered via the Web or Internet adhere to the requirements for Web based information stated in Chapter 6 Web based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines C For documentation delivered within a software application i e executable demo adhere to the requirements for software applications stated in chapter 5 d For documentation delivered using video or multimedia adhere to the requirements for video and multimedia found in Video and Multimedia Products e Review the documentation using the appropriate testing methods based on delivery method Use the functional performance criteria found in section 4 2 1 to ensure that the documentation can be accessed by people with limited vision hearing speech or mobility f If an exception was taken for a product whose documentation is not fully accessible define and clearly communicate the appropriate alt
209. e used expose focus information to the operating and assistive technology and provide standard cursor representations Whenever ossible operating system a Figure A The focus information exposed in text input mode input event Techniqt 4 4 2 442 4 Expose Foc Figure B The focus information exposed in text selection movement mode 4 4 21 Expose Focu Whenever poss operating syste system focus I Figure C The focus information exposed in system busy state Some examples of using standard controls to expose focus information in the Microsoft Windows Operating System Windows provides built in support through Microsoft Active Accessibility or MSAA for focus cursor tracking and other accessibility features Windows based software applications should use standard user interface objects or controls e g buttons lists or menus to make focus information accessible to assistive technology Also the cursor representation can be programmatically controlled with appropriate API calls For example in Figure A the focus information is exposed in a standard control during text input or edit mode The text cursor the blinking I bar is appropriately displayed to indicate the point where text input will occur In Figure B the focus information is exposed in the same standard control during a text selection and movement activity Here the user has selected the text su
210. e with accessibility experts 2 Evaluate functions with an experienced user 3 Evaluate functions with a novice user September 2004 237 9 2 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide C If a touch screen is used for user input insure that all functions can be used by alternate key press system d If an exception was taken when procuring a device that is not fully accessible define the alternate format or alternate method needed to provide equivalent access to people with disabilities who can not readily use the device 9 24 References The following references apply to the specific requirements stated here m Trace Center Research on Kiosk accommodation Note sub page for unique approach EZ Access keys htto www tracecenter org world kiosks u Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Self Contained Closed Products 1194 25 htto www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 25 htm H PDA references California State University Northridge htto www csun edu cod cont 2004 proceedings 274 htm TechDis Accessibility and Generic Features of a PDA http www techdis ac uk PDA intro3 htm National Center on Accessible Information Technology in Education htto www washington edu accessit articles 62 palmOne Accessibility Program http www palmone com us company corporate pap http learningportal utoronto ca technology pda html 9 3 Allowing Sufficient Time 238 When a timed resp
211. e with disabilities including those who use certain classes of assistive technologies AT E Requirements Requirements are not tied to a product or supplier specific technologies or standards They a Contain a core statement and optionally exhibits related to an accepted design practice or alternate method that must be used when it applies to the EIT in question Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Can be used to evaluate how particular EIT conforms to the Postal Service Section 508 requirements or to develop solutions that conform Testing Testing methods validate that performance matches expected results Testing provides processes for evaluating and documenting accessibility compliance For purchased software it verifies that the product performs as stated For prototypes it evaluates how well innovative functionality satisfies user requirements For internally developed software it may find errors that need correction In all cases testing can validate compliance with the standards References Provides information related to specific requirements 1 6 Additional Sources for Accessibility When evaluating the requirements of the law the Postal Service accepts the published Federal Law or other information officially published by the Access Board httpz www access board gov 508 htm Additional publications that reinforce the Postal Service s institutionalization of accessibility considerations include the following
212. earch ICDR Summit September 2003 Summit on Interference to Hearing Technologies http www icar us Participants included representatives from the digital wireless telephone and hearing technologies industries disability organizations research centers and Federal agencies such as the FCC and the Food and Drug Administration FDA Presentations were made on laws that address hearing aid compatibility new technological developments and telephone designs that reduce interference and the results of laboratory and consumer testing 7 12 Controls and Keys Products that have mechanically operated controls or keys must comply with the following four requirements 1194 23 Provision j 1 Controls and keys must be tactilely discernible without activating the controls or keys 2 Controls and keys must be operable with one hand and must not require tight grasping pinching or twisting of the wrist The force required to activate controls and keys must be 5 Ibs 22 2 N maximum 8 If key repeat is supported the delay before repeat must be adjustable to at least 2 seconds Key repeat rate must be adjustable to 2 seconds per character 4 The status of all locking or toggle controls or keys must be visually discernible and must be discernible either through touch or sound September 2004 191 7 12 1 192 7 12 1 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Rationale These provisions apply to user operable controls which are co
213. eb Consortium W3C SMIL is an XML markup designed to be the standard markup language for timing and controlling synchronized media elements i e video audio tracks and descriptions captions and other media SMIL works for a media player similar to the way that HTML works for a Web browser And just as HTML markup displays in any browser the standardized SMIL language fosters interoperability among varieties of media players see the References below for more information 211 8 3 3 212 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide amp 33 Testing For each technology or service that is developed or purchased use the following general method to test compliance with the specific requirements in this section Examine the hardware and software equipment used to transmit or display video or multimedia production content including its associated online or offline documentation Hardware and software can include equipment such as broadcast or transmission equipment analog televisions and displays digital televisions and displays computer media players or captioning system technology Check to see if the hardware or software includes secondary audio program playback circuitry or a method for enabling and playing audio descriptions in video or multimedia production content If the equipment supports audio description enabling playback and user preferences attempt to play an audio described video or multimedia production on the equi
214. eb content has been enhanced a Use caution when using plug ins or enhancing Web content because accessibility aids may have difficulty identifying them i e accessibility aids require specific information to work successfully with screen elements When custom or enhanced Web content is used developers must use appropriate methods to allow Web content and information e g providing alternate or equivalent content to function with accessibility aids The nonproprietary information that is created using standard HTML XHTML XML or SGML allows for access using multiple clients tools reduces development costs and permits the interoperability of technologies unknown by the author or creator of the information Provide flexibility by allowing for a variety of input e g keyboard mouse and output e g color sound images text methods E Allow accessibility aids and nonstandard clients to use and configure the Web applications and information automatically For example detecting a specific browser and providing additional modification of Web content should not prevent unknown clients and accessibility aids from accessing the content Handbook AS 885 usps com Development Process and Standards provides processes and standards for building and maintaining an information presence or application on usps com and defines the design and development standards and best practices for use on that site This handbook may be accessed online
215. ece ccc cen Rees 5 7 2 MES CMS S siine airaa ea e ea aE alse a E a aa oa Ea GEE GaSe dom tain EE dears 5 7 2 1 Use Standard OS Functions to Provide Textual Information 5 7 2 2 Make Text Cursor Information Accessible 000 0c eee eee 5 7 3 WSU 3 aaa qn ee E 52 ee Ae oe eh ese Berean Seen oer ee 5 7 4 FCICICNCES PE 5 8 User Selected Display Attributes Color and Contrast 0 0 c cee 5 8 1 acer 5 8 2 Techniques 0 00 0 ccc cece hee 5 8 2 1 OS Level and Application Display Settings cece eee eee eee 5 8 2 2 Use Appropriate Color Combinations sssse ee 5 8 2 3 Testing ccc ccc cnn I ees Dg PEIN SS ia ccm apad NEEDS NEUEM EEE E RS nena 5 9 Animation isses RR hern 5 9 1 Rationale cee uude EEEE DO WechitiGUCS susce cates cietesadas cbehaogerestatesateeniehnsndeasdohenageaste 5 9 2 1 Provide Alternate Formats or Access Methods for Animated Elements 5 9 2 2 Offer User Preferences for Animation 00 cece eee 5 9 3 Testing ccc ccc cece Hh mehreren 5 9 4 References 0 ccc enn hh hes G40 Color GOdiNG METRE TTE TETTE 5 10 1 Rationale erento qoaa atten tos gripe Ree Eom whee nanan ch me NERA EH RUD RR SUE EUN ghia B 10 2 Techniques 00 cece IH he ees 5 10 2 1 Always Combine Color With an Alternate Format sess 5 10 3 Testing 00 ccc ccc RII I rere rre 5 10 4 References s 5 11 MIGCO FICQUCNICY aa reres
216. ecommunications Products 7 12 3 When key repeat is supported adhere to the following recommendations that support this requirement m Provide an option to disable the key repeat function Provide an option to set a key acceptance rate how long the key must be depressed before being recognized E If the intention of repeating a key is to reach a target goal provide an alternate way for the user to enter that target For example if a person were to increase volume from 1 to 20 by depressing a key 20 times it would be easier to simply or alternatively press the numbers 2 and O to enter 20 7 12 2 4 Status of Locking Toggle Controls or Keys Must Be Discernible Make sure that the status of all locking or toggle controls or keys is visually discernible and discernible either through touch or sound Adhere to the following recommendations that support this requirement Use two different types of feedback such as a combination of tactile audible and visual feedback to help make products easier for people with sensory disabilities to use When using audio feedback consider associating intuitively meaningful sounds with actions For example try using increasingly high pitched sounds with increasing amplitude Use cascading sounds with rotary or slide controls with the pitch associated with the change in control m Provide an audio indication of a toggle status instead of a continuous signal sufficiently long enough to al
217. ecommunications products can benefit the population at large not just people with disabilities General Requirements Accessibility is accomplished by purchasing or developing telecommunications products that accommodate the widest range of users including those with disabilities Listed below are some general requirements that will help the Postal Service ensure that its telecommunications products continue to be accessible E The Postal Service should develop and procure telecommunications products that take advantage of built in accessibility features when those features are available to both end users and product developers g The Postal Service should procure or develop telecommunications products that recognize and maximize the capabilities of the accessibility features installed and activated by a user e g native hardware as well as installed assistive technology Postal Service telecommunications products procurement personnel and developers should do the following E Buy or build products that support industry and regulatory telecommunications standards Accessibility features are often integrated with these standards to ensure accessibility in telecommunications usage including input compression transmission storage and output Standards related to each specific requirement are shown in the References area under that requirement E Use standard hardware and software controls instead of custom controls Standard contr
218. ecommunications products that provide telephone functions and that allow a user to adjust the volume must provide acceptable in range default volume level settings The default level could be set anywhere by manufacturer or users within the acceptable ranges described in Provide Automatic Reset of Volume Level and User Override Functions All telecommunications products that provide telephone functions and that allow a user to adjust the volume must provide automatic reset of volume level and user override functions If a telecommunications product allows a user to adjust the receive volume a function must be provided to reset the volume to the default level automatically after every use and the user must be able to override this reset Products that permit an override of automatic volume reset must comply with the terms in the FCC Report and Order discussed above under Rationale The FCC granted its waiver on the basis that telephone manufacturers meet the following conditions which are required as part of this requirement a The volume reset override switch must be labeled as such and located on the telephone in such a way as not to be accessible to accidental engagement m A bright indicator light must be prominently displayed on the front of the telephone and must light up when the override is engaged and the telephone is placed in an off hook condition m Next to the light must be a warning that the amplification is at a high
219. ected as indicated by the blue highlight or outline surrounding the Web Page Preview Page sets toolbar item s icon i e a diskette Pressing the Print Preview RETURN key would activate the Save function just as if amp Print Ctrl P clicked on with a mouse aa lo In addition as shown in Figure B this same Save Properties function can be accessed via a keyboard accessible 111 1HB508 v20 D3Nov20D3 SWanly doc File menu by using ALT F then pressing S or by 2 V ACH4 CHE WIP 20031029 dac CTRL S 3 4HBSO8_ 20_30Oct2003_CHs1 3 doc 4 MHBS08_ v2D 29Ock2003 doc Exil Figure B The File menu expanded to show redundant access to the Save function offered in the toolbar 5 223 Provide Keyboard Access to Window Elements Provide the ability to move the focus between application windows sections or panes of application windows and dialogs using standard keyboard equivalents It is common for software to use panes or splitter bars to display more information without requiring additional windows e g Windows Explorer Use standard keyboard equivalents to allow users to move resize minimize restore maximize scroll and close windows Applications that employ nonstandard access keys and methods for performing these functions must provide and communicate the alternate keyboard access methods September 2004 43 0 2 2 4 Exhibit 5 2 2 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide E
220. ed options are some user preferences for multimedia including a checkbox to indicate whether to allow animations to play in Web pages indicated by the solid orange highlight Microsoft VM Java console enabled requires restart Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Ju Multimedia Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing Enable Image Toolbar requires restart Ef Play tionis in web pages Play sounds in web pages Play videos in web pages Show image download placeholders Show pictures Smart image dithering 38 Printing S Print background colors and images of k Restore Defaults ea m Figure A The Internet Options Dialog Box in Microsoft Internet Explorer After selecting an option the system will open the main help system for the application with the selected guidance Figure C below right This animated Office Assistant can be disabled and the user can still access an equivalent input dialog within the main help system that is accessible from the Help menu This main help system can be read by assistive technology and does not require animation to offer equivalent functionality Figure B below left shows the Microsoft Office Assistant an animated avatar that presents a simple dialog window to capture a user request for help When a user types a question in the What would you like to do input and
221. ed audio and electronic formats that comply with this part In common usage the most universal fomat is HTML as defined in Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines This format separates content and format and if done properly constains proper document structure HTML also provides nonlinear access which is virtually essential for access to large and complex collections of information Many common help systems rely on HTML or have an interface that is accessible and functionally equivalent to a well structured Web resource For self contained closed products both the content and the accessibility functions need to be an integral aspect of the design Handbook AS 508 A Information Documentation and Support 11 2 3 September 2004 11 2 2 11 2 2 1 11 2 2 2 11 2 3 Techniques For Purchased Products Evaluate Whether Documentation Can Be Provided in Alternate Formats For purchased products evaluate the supplier s VPAT or similar statement that describes how the product s documentation can be provided in alternate formats If there are special needs that are required by the particular Postal Service technology implementation alternate formats can be specified as an additional deliverable at time of purchase For Developed Products Provide All Documentation on Alternate Formats For developed products ensure that all product documentation is provided in alternate formats Adher
222. ed for more information on this topic but must not be used in place of the Postal Service guidelines above If these references are in conflict with the above techniques you must defer to the Postal Service guidelines E HTML Techniques for Web Content Accessibility htto www w3 org T R WCAG10 TECHS tech scripts When electronic forms are designed to be completed online the form must allow access via assistive technologies to information field elements and functionality e g associated controls required to complete review revise and submit the form including directions and cues Section 508 Provision 1194 22n Rationale screen readers may have difficulty navigating through interactive forms without the required modification to the form Forms may require a timed response e g security functions Assistive technologies may prevent users from completing online forms within the required time limit Techniques Construct electronic forms for completion online so that assistive technologies Such as screen readers can relay the relevant field descriptors when tabbing from field to field Use logical tabbing order consistently throughout the form The assistive technology must be able to edit fields and allow users to read back and or revise information previously entered into a field When a timed response is required users must be alerted and given sufficient time to indicate that they need additional time to compl
223. ed in the Pacific 105 Westchester Cluster list box e g Caribbean Figure B A set of grouped list boxes with the New York Metro Some examples of exposing information about associated controls to assistive technology Figure A shows a Choose Drawing Type dialog window for a diagramming software application Here the user has selected a drawing category as indicated by the boldface text surrounding outline and open folder icon on the text Block Diagram Once a drawing category has been selected drawing templates for that category appear to the right of the category listing Here the user has clicked the mouse or used the TAB key to select the Basic Diagram template The focus is on this template object as indicated by solid blue line surrounding the template icon and the dotted line surrounding the text Basic Diagram While the focus remains on this template object an associated control displays a description of this template and is accessible to assistive technology Figures B and C show sets of grouped controls from a Postal Service executive reporting application In Figure B a user has selected the New York Metro Area in the Area list box Upon doing so associated clusters are Northern New Jersey etc In Figure C a different area Western has been selected by the user and a different set of associated clusters are dynamically updated and displayed in the C
224. ee section 8 1 6 E If the production is a multimedia production and the delivery method is unknown or not known to support closed captioning make sure that narrated audio portions of the production required to understand the content are permanently encoded in equivalent text elements used in the production i e open captioning m If the production is a multimedia production and the delivery method is known to support closed captioning e g SMIL make sure that the narrated portions of the production required to understand the content are encoded in a caption track or equivalent alternate text that can be enabled viewed and disabled by the user Handbook AS 508 A Video and Multimedia Products 8 4 4 844 References The following references provide additional guidance on the techniques described above but must not be used in place of the general and specific Postal Service requirements in this chapter If any of these references conflict with Postal Service requirements defer to the Postal Service requirements O O D o o UJ O se O pe O ct O 2 2 Q 1 3j D O o e O gt D Q D T pe ct O gt o lt Q mmr um X htto www section508 gov training docs captionCostMatrix doc E gt O Q D n o UJ O S o Q gt D O x n ud j O O RV oO c O 2 5 lt O D O o lt c 3 D O RV htto www section508 gov
225. ee eee ee ee i es cee ce ee ee ees 6 1 1 Contents ence k otek oe eee oe eee eee ee ae tekar ieies Ged eee ee Ee 6 1 2 E DAND E a gancecetceeea sgeue seeee E coud neane soeee nee ee TUNES PUPPES DUST 6 1 2 1 TECHNOLOGY o 6 1 2 2 AUGIBIICO odes Ex ESUANEREANEEEAMENEEDMNEEESEEEEERNUPEEBE NE EE EMEN SM awe 100 6 1 3 eiie and USE C 100 6 1 4 General Requirements 0 ccc eee eee hh hr 101 6 1 5 Testing for CoripliarniGe cese Scusa Rec ties dew sabes Re chew ae ates ate eee ee x 102 6 2 Non Text Elements 0 0 c ccc ccc rrr 103 6 2 1 MAIORA cuca Gencaden came nou tes ee ee een fac wens EEE EEEE 103 6 2 2 ee alae lt se wea 103 6 2 2 1 Provide Alternate Descriptive Text for Non Text Elements 103 6 2 2 2 Provide Alternate Text for Images 00 ccc eee eens 106 6 2 2 3 Provide Long Descriptions in Addition to Alternate Text 106 6 2 2 4 Use Descriptive Links 2 22cacc cue ne en oes en REESE AENEA NU catered oe 109 6 2 2 5 Appropriate Use of Blank Alternates 0 00 0 ccc eee 110 6 2 3 111 6 2 4 HOIBIOHCOS secodsd dE HARE IUE HUS E Ard EUR aH Antv So Peu ed Dua 111 6 3 MUO T T TP L 111 6 3 1 pie T R L rr 111 6 3 2 NECANIGUCS x 2x cede prex praceeq agre prre bues exu d smed e Sead eeu 112 6 3 3 MOS SUNNY P 112 6
226. eee 231 9 1 OVENICW LocruuxarucrerrexareeuussagaeesawereessdiessPeac rcg uber Or see 231 9 1 1 Contents 2 0 0 enhn has 231 9 1 2 SUMMA anscae ahis te ERE been laces stoke tases s aaked esas ENS HE E AEN E 231 9 1 2 1 TO ANOO A c c 231 9 1 2 2 sq 7 eeeee 233 9 1 3 Siruct re and m 233 9 1 4 Introduction to Self Contained Closed Product Accessibility 9 1 5 General Requirements lisse ees 9 1 6 Testing for Compliance 6 0 cc eee eee tenn ene nae 236 9 2 Usability Without Assistive Technology 0 eens 236 9 2 1 acil 236 9 2 2 TENDU uv c noem 236 9 2 2 1 god ELT 236 9 2 2 2 For Copiers Printers Calculators Fax Machines 000 0c eee eee 237 9 2 2 3 Fo PDAS X E 237 9 2 3 TEU m rrr 237 9 2 4 PeT ETE TT TETTE TOTIS TIT TT TIT 238 9 3 Allowing Sufficient Time lsseeeeeee RR I ran 238 9 3 1 Rationale MR T 238 9 3 2 l zesibi PpT 239 9 3 2 1 LOL WMIOSKS creer oiae REGE EPREFEP PTS dq P DEdedqP M d RSS 239 9 3 2 2 For Copiers Printers Calculators and Fax Machines
227. eee teen un 156 7 2 TTY Connections and Microphones 0 000 ccc cee eee eee e tenes 157 7 2 1 alui 157 7 2 2 WOCWMGUCS accent cree a tens eee wee den Gaew ee dene eee e cogs eee uae een eres 159 7 2 2 1 All Telephone Systems Must Provide TTY Connections 159 7 2 2 2 Ring Signal Must Be Passed to TTY cece eens 160 7 2 2 3 User Must Be Able to Turn Microphone On and Off 000 e 160 7 2 2 4 Computers With Telecommunications Functions Must Support or Emulate TIYS vic x bee bom mawaud dard a aod ad dered Wes Gade abe E 161 7 2 3 TTC 162 7 2 4 References 0 eee ee nent eee teen hrs 162 7 3 TEY Signal PIOIDOOS uas a9 daa e odes m icing adinim dr Gaede one t dd dpi eine as 163 7 3 1 GUO AIS es 163 7 3 2 Techniques 0 0 00 ccc ccc ees 7393 MEME eee ee ESS 7 3 4 References 0 0 es 7 4 Voice Mail Auto Attendant and Interactive Voice Response IVR Systems 165 7 4 1 giie els cu parce eens EET PET EES PEE PEPE ETTE TETTESTE TEN 165 7 4 2 WC TSS aca ea Ee a a E amp het es E e a mt E i Tea Gloom g ots Beate 166 7 4 2 1 Voice Mail Auto Attendant and IVR Systems Must Be Accessible to TIY AS ONES o 4 2190 6 So ence ec ede edadeneeee a EA a EE capes hee eee hee A os 166 7 4 2 2 IVRs Must Offer Access In a Way That Does Not Require User Speech 167 7 4 2 3 Not
228. een shot of a simple table that uses the scope attribute The code for this table immediately follows the screen shot Figure A Screen shot of a simple table that uses the scope attribute L Enfant Rosslyn Courthouse L Enfant Bus 1 10 00 am 10 30 am 10 45 am 11 00 am Bus 2 11 00 am 11 30 am 11 45 am 12 00 pm Bus 3 12 00 pm 12 30 pm 12 45 pm 1 00 pm Figure B HTML code for Figure A lt table summary The Postal Bus Schedule border 1 lt tr gt th width 70 gt lt th gt eth scope col wadth 103 sl Enfiant lt ths lt th scope col width 128 gt Rosslyn lt th gt eth scopes col widbhls 55 sCourthousec th eth sScopes ocol widths l4l sL Enfante ths lt th gt lt tr gt lt td scope row width 70 b Bus 1 lt b gt lt td gt lt td width 103 510 00 am lt td gt lt td width 128 510 30 am lt td gt lt td width 95 510 45 am td lt td width 141 511 00 am td lt tr gt lt tr gt td scope row width 70 gt lt b gt Bus 2 b td lt td width 103 511 00 am lt td gt td widthz 128 5211 30 am lt tds gt s td width 95 gt 511 45 am td td width 141 512 00 pm lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt td scope row width 70 b Bus 3 lt b gt lt td gt etd width 103 s12200 pm lt td gt lt td widths 128 312 30 pm lt td gt td width 95 212 45 pm lt td gt td width 141 51 00 pm lt td gt td lt tab
229. eir extension number or to make menu selections In addition telephone calling cards may require users to enter a personal identification number via DTMF Depending on the users equipment these tones may be entered directly via a push button telephone or through the dialing system of a TTY Note that DTMF tones are not the same as TTY tones and TTYs make DTMF tones only when set in a keyboard dialing mode Not all TTYs can generate DTMF tones so the ability to generate DTMF tones with the telephones is important Users with TTYs in the acoustic mode or with telephones connected in parallel with a direct connect TTY can enter DTMF tones directly from their telephone Vendors of TTY products can provide further information on how users may enter DTMF tones TTY Users Must Have Full Access to Voice Mail Offer TTY users the same central voice mail system answering service as non TTY users oince the voice mail system of the agency should be completely TTY compatible TTYs with answering machine functionality should not be needed though the voice mail may or may not be easier to use since TTY users could have their telephone answered by the central voice mail system like everyone else If TTY accessible answering machines are used instead of TTY accessible voic mail they must provide high enough fidelity to record and play back TTY tones accurately 743 Testing a For IVR systems and products identify the set of voice mail auto atten
230. eir system Techniques Provide Textual Information About Controls Use standard controls to provide both user visible and underlying programmatic textual information about form controls Standard controls eliminate the need for additional development or programming to expose the information about the control s identity role and state via text to the operating system and to assistive technology Information about controls is both displayed to the user i e meaningful labels list input terms or items and provided programmatically to assistive technology i e control role control state etc When no other option is available nonstandard controls must use reliable accessibility frameworks or component object models that use service interfaces event systems APIs and proxies to provide object information for the nonstandard controls to assistive technology For more techniques and information refer to Sections 5 5 User Interface and Programmatic Elements and 5 7 Textual Information 83 5 12 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 5 12 2 1 Example of Providing Textual Information About Controls An example of providing user visible and program Bascal uud ages matic textual information about controls located in a s B MEN M oo word processing software application Title This figure shows a standard wizard style form that uses standard form elements or controls i e radio buttons that provide accessi
231. elines 6 9 2 6 9 Screen Flicker 6 9 1 6 9 2 September 2004 Web pages must not use flashing or blinking text objects or other elements having a flash or blink frequency between 2 and 55 cycles per second 2 0 Hz and 55 0 Hz If flashing is present provide a way to change the frequency Section 508 Provision 1194 22 Rationale screen items that flash or blink can cause seizures or other involuntary responses particularly if they flash in high intensity with high contrast and in the frequency range between 2 and 55 cycles per second 2 0 Hz and 55 0 Hz Web applications must not use flash or blink rates in the range stated above This includes but is not limited to flashing text rapid screen rewrites images that cycle on and off and repeatedly changing or animated user interface elements If software uses flashing or blinking user interface elements a feature that allows the user to change their frequency or disable the function must be provided Techniques Provide graphics that do not flash or blink in the frequency range between 2 0 Hz and 55 0 cycles per second between 2 Hz and 55 Hz When Web applications do provide flashing elements such as animated images development techniques must be used to allow the user to control certain aspects of the flashing element s flash or blink rate to alleviate the risk of producing adverse physical affects These development techniques include the following a
232. els that use service interfaces event systems APIs and proxies to provide object information for the nonstandard controls Nonstandard controls must not disrupt or disable activated accessibility features The information that must be provided about objects includes name location type associated values parent control logical order for navigation and event notifications such as focus gain or loss 5 3 2 3 Support Audio Accessibility Features Provide support for operating system audio accessibility features These operating system features display visual indicators or cues when sounds are generated by certain operating system or software application events e g flashing backgrounds message or dialog windows status indicators in a taskbar or text messages in a status window etc When software applications employ audio alerts redundant visual cues must be provided ooftware applications that use nonstandard controls must not disable or disrupt activated accessibility features Note that when flashing is used refer to the frequency guideline in section 5 11 September 2004 51 9 3 2 4 Exhibit 5 3 2 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Example of Audio Accessibility Features Accessibility Options Sound entry Use Sounds entry Choose the visual warning Flash active caption bar Flash active window Flash desktop the speech and sounds they make Use Show ounds Keyboard sound Display Mouse
233. ent s flash or blink rate so as to alleviate the risk of producing adverse physical affects These development techniques include the following a Providing the user with the ability to adjust the flash speed b Minimizing the area of the screen that is flashing smaller areas are less likely to cause seizures C Avoiding flashing that has a high level of contrast between the states some individuals are more susceptible to high intensity flashing d Disabling the flashing altogether Exhibit 5 11 2 1 Example of Using Only Acceptable Flashing and Contrast Ranges Accexeitlifty Options a An example of using acceptable flashing and contrast ranges Keyboard Sound Display Mouse General This figure shows the Microsoft Windows XP Operating died eae eens tae wt System s Display Accessibility Options control panel which a ead includes an option to allow users to set the cursor blink rate This can be accessed by clicking the Start menu then a Control Panels then Accessibility Options Display tab Move the sliders to change the speed that the cursor blinks ae E v In the Cursor Options area of this control panel users can None J click and move the Blink Rate slider to change the cursor blink rate The rate can be set to 12 different options ranging Naww 5 from None no flash or O milliseconds to Fast 1 2 seconds Developers of Windows based software applications can set the s
234. ented via the Web with a soundtrack and a Macromedia Flash demo of a Postal Service Web application that uses both visual animation and audio narration are both considered multimedia productions Two kinds of captioning are used to provide access to the audio portions of video and multimedia products open captioning and closed captioning see the Glossary for definitions of these terms Besides aiding those with hearing loss captions also do the following E Help persons with hearing disabilities In an aging population this group is increasing According to the Census Bureau 8 percent of the population under age 45 reports a hearing loss This increases to 13 percent in the 45 64 age range and skyrockets to 30 percent after age 65 E Increase learning retention and literacy Allowing viewers to read the audio content provides additional reinforcement E Aid in learning a second language Viewers can hear the one language being spoken and simultaneously read the captions E Facilitate the conveyance of audio content in environments that are noisy or are not conducive to playing audio e g a quiet library or no sound card or speakers Techniques When Display Mechanisms Support Closed Captioning Include Closed Captioning on Broadcast or Taped Videos When Postal Service television or video productions are dubbed onto videotape or broadcast via mechanisms that support closed captioning the video production must include close
235. eople who are deaf or hard of hearing However the intent of this provision is to require support of more than just Baudot or ASCII At present only these two are commonly used in the U S but others may come into use later While the Access Board is committed to supporting users of current devices it does not want to exclude those who buy newer equipment as long as such devices use protocols that are not proprietary and are supported by more than one manufacturer Of course like all the requirements of these standards this provision is subject to commercial availability which is why the final rule used the phrase commonly used This provision applies to all telecommunications products that enable and support 2 way telephone functions Some examples include the following an analog or digital telephone system a personal data assistant PDA that includes telephone functions or a fax machine with handset and microphone Telecommunications products that do not support 2 way telephone functions for example a fax machine with a line monitoring speaker only 163 7 3 2 164 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide but that does not include either a handset with microphone or speakerphone are not covered by this provision Techniques All telecommunication equipment that provide telephone functions i e 2 way voice communication must support all commonly used cross manufacturer non proprietary standard signals used by TT
236. ernate formats or access methods that will be used to provide equivalent access to people with disabilities who can not readily use the product documentation 281 11 2 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 11 24 References The following reference applies to the specific requirements stated in this section E Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Equivalent Facilitation http www access board gov sec508 guide scope htm Equivalent 20 Facilitation 11 3 Provide Access to a Description of Accessibility Features End users must have access to a description of the accessibility and compatibility features of products in alternate formats or alternate methods upon request at no additional charge 1194 41 Provision b 11 31 Rationale For products that have built in accessibility features or Support the installation of assitive technology information on the use of these features must be have clear documentation of how to use such features effectively For self contained closed products both the content and the accessibility functions need to be an integral aspect of the design 11 232 Techniques 11 3 2 1 For Purchased Products Evaluate Whether Description of Accessibility Features Can Be Provided in Alternate Formats For purchased products evaluate the supplier s VPAT or similar statement that describes the product s built in accessibility features in an alternate format or alter
237. erprint scan the system provides an alternate access method by allowing the user to enter a password and answer some additional verification questions This alternative access method is also beneficial for all users either as a redundant check or in situations where the primary method is inadequate e g when the fingerprint scanner ceases to work properly when users have a temporary disability such as a broken hand that is in a cast 269 10 3 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide m A portable computer uses voice commands to allow users to activate key applications such as a contact database or calendar As an alternative to the voice commands the user can enter input using the computer keyboard 10 3 3 Testing a Inspect the product to determine if it uses biometric controls that require users to possess specific biological features e g voice retinal image fingerprint etc b For each biometric control determine if there is at least one alternative access method directly in the product that allows the user to perform the same functions that the biometric control supports C If the provision of an alternative access method directly in the product would compromise security and if there are no other commercial products available that would meet business needs an exception may need to be taken and documented see chapter 4 If an exception is taken an alternate format or alternate access method must be provided for people
238. ert the user to the position of the toggle switch 7123 Testing a For Requirement 1 Ensure that all mechanically operated controls and keys are tactilely discernable perform the following tests a Check for tactile marks on top of the keys not beside them and raised marks that have a minimum height of 0 5 mm i On telephone keypads check for a tactile marker such as a nib or bar on the top surface of the 5 key On QWERTY keyboards check for a raised bar on the F and J keys Bg Check for recessed keys or keys with concave tops which aid visually and mobility impaired users in locating keys E Check for key guards or overlays that help people with fine motor control problems m Check for other distinctions shape size spacing tactile markings that make keys easier to remember and tactilely discernable September 2004 195 7 12 4 196 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide For Requirement 2 Ensure that each control and key is operable with one hand and must not require tight grasping pinching or twisting of the wrist perform the following tests E For each control or key note if any of the following conditions exist two hands are required to operate the control or key a tight grasp is needed a pinching or twisting of the wrist is need to operate the control E For push controls measure the force needed to activate the control The force required to activate controls and k
239. ery Address This application contains a series of input screens JOHN PUBLIC JANE Q PUBLIC f US POSTAL SERVICE 125 W VALENCIA DR US POSTAC OERUOE m EU Sri that collect information from the user such as WASHINGTON DC 20260 0004 it Mv Delivery Address I EE ero EM MrDslten Address return and delivery addresses package Shipping Details information and service information After Package Information Service Information collecting such input the application offers a Weight 1Ibs oz Express Mail 17 85 T Shipping Date 11 18 2003 Total 17 85 Label Summary screen where users can Shipping from ZIP Code 20260 Edit My Service Options M i Edit My Package Information confirm their input choose to edit any of it and continue with the label print purchase and print Back Continue gt processes 5 12 2 7 Dynamic Forms The Postal Service uses certain software applications that allow users to access edit save complete print and electronically distribute dynamic forms These software applications must comply with the requirements stated in this chapter if applicable Because the same software that is used to complete the dynamic form can be used to edit the form users can unintentionally switch to an editable state if not informed properly Such software applications must clearly indicate what mode the user is in i e edit or read only This requirement to clarify the identity role operation and state of
240. es All expansion slots ports and connectors on desktop and portable computers must comply with publicly available cross manufacturer non proprietary industry standards Connection points on a computer system must comply with an industry standard technical specification that is available to other manufacturers Examples of publicly available industry standards may include RS 232 Centronics SCSI interfaces PCMCIA or USB 10 43 Testing a Conduct an inspection of the product to inventory the expansion slots ports and connectors b For each expansion slot port or connectors is at least one of each type slot port or connector compliant with a publicly available industry standard 10 44 References The following references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here EI Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Desktop and Portable Computer Products 1194 26 Updated June 21 2001 htto www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 26 htm E EIA232E Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange EIA Electronic Industries Association htto global ihs com doc_detail cfm currency_code USD amp customer_id 212543484D0A amp shopping_cart_id 27274833254B3020495A2020280 A amp country code US amp lang code ENGL amp item s key 00125234 amp item key date 020231 amp input doc number amp input doc title interfa
241. es in a way that is comparable to the access and use provided to employees without disabilities b Ensure that access to information and data by Postal customers with disabilities is comparable to that provided to people without disabilities Overview of Standards Classes of Technology Classes of Disability The provisions of Section 508 focus on making EIT accessible to people with different disabilities Specifically the standards describe the use of information with the disabilities of vision hearing and mobility To enable the use of information by people with disabilities Section 508 identifies six classes of information technology refer to chapters 5 11 and defines specific and functional requirements that enable people to interact with these technologies For example when using a word processor people 15 3 2 Hationale 16 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide without disabilities can use a mouse to highlight text cut the text from its original position and paste it into another location An accessible Section 508 compliant word processor would support the same functions without any use of the mouse As another example when using a website people without disabilities identify a hyperlink and then use a mouse to click on the link to move to another page A Web site designed with accessibility in mind would support the same functions without any use of the mouse In the absence of clear requirements that specify h
242. es will result in a character based PDF file b The second part of the process is to generate the initial tags automatically or manually for a character based PDF file E The third part of the process is to fine tune the tags for access by a MSAA compliant screen reader and adherence to Postal Service Section 508 Web Accessibility Guidelines d The final step in the process is to determine accessibility and compliance by testing the tagged PDF file using the most recent version of JAWS and the accessible version of Adobe Acrobat Reader To be an accessible and fully compliant tagged PDF file the contents must be read in the logical order intended by the author must be accessible to the MSAA compliant screen reader and must adhere to the Postal Service Section 508 Web Accessibility Guidelines Since the MSAA compliant screen reader is required accessible tagged PDF files can be tested only in the Windows environment Unlike other PDFs the accessible tagged PDF is not universally available to screen readers across all platforms Therefore an accessible and fully compliant version of a tagged PDF file must still have an alternate format or alternate access method posted on the Intranet and the Internet Provide an alternate format or access method that will be used in addition to or in place of the PDF file Alternate formats or access methods must have equivalent content and functionality to the primary Web source and must be upd
243. esident General Counsel 0 0 00 ccc eee ee eee eee RR RR es 2 8 Vice President Consumer Affairs csse e s 2 9 Vice President Public Affairs and Communications 00 cece eee ees 2 10 All Postal Service Officers 0 0 ccc cen RII n 2 11 All Functional Organizations 0 0 ccc eet n 2 12 Section 508 Stewards Liaisons for Accessibility 0 ccc ees 2 13 Importance of Compliance 0 0c ccc ete rre September 2004 a rol rol S S S alaia a Iz Se leeren on on Ed on E on cafe Ses eS E TES ER EE E ES es E EL E 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Section 508 Overview of Accessibility 15 3 1 What the Law Covers 00 ccc ccc cece ees 3 1 1 General Requirements isses es 3 1 2 Overview of Standards Classes of Technology Classes of Disability SO RANIG eese tonta Dames Eu EE FEER E Hag FURORE TREE o D 3 3 Assistive Technologies ssssss RR es 3 3 1 DCSCHIDUOM 2a sous adips bre PEEPPISIPSPREES LEID canst ss PEE obese PEERS 3 3 2 Postal Service Standards 0 ccc eee eee eee 3 4 Guiding FINCI 2g EIER 3 4 1 Integrate multiple technical standards 0 eee eens 3 4 2 Consider both information itself and authoring tools that create information 3 4 3 Consider all available techniques for access lellles ens 3 5 Whati OOImpbIIBr BE
244. ete the form Refer to Section 6 16 Timed Reponses 137 6 13 2 Exhibit 6 13 2a Section 508 Technical Reference Guide A LABEL tag must identify all form controls except for form controls that automatically have text descriptions associated with them such as submit buttons The LABEL tag must appear either immediately to the left or right or immediately above the field Image buttons also need descriptive text associated with the form control For forms that are laid out inside lt TABLE gt tags the LABEL tag must appear in the same table cell as the form control An implicit label is a label that surrounds a form control with a LABEL tag An explicit label uses the LABEL tag with the associated for attribute and with the equivalent id attribute in the form control Explicit labeling techniques must be used because implicit labels are not supported universally by screen readers In addition users will have difficulty interpreting the form if any text separates implicit labels from associated form controls Example of a Text Box and Buttons Figure A Screen shot of a form with text boxes and buttons Name Address submit Query Reset Figure B Relevant HTML code for Figure A form method post action cgi bin cgi pl p label for Name gt Name lt label gt input tabindex 1 type text id Name name Name size 30 maxlength 5 gt lt br gt labe
245. evice e If the touch screen functions can be emulated by an attached PC investigate control from a personal computer as an alternate mode of operation 9 44 References The following references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here m Trace Center Research on Kiosk accommodation Note sub page for unique approach EZ Access keys htto www tracecenter org world kiosks 242 Handbook AS 508 A Self Contained Closed Products 9 5 1 m Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Self Contained Closed Products 1194 25 http www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 25 htm E Tiresias International Information on Visual Disability guidelines for tactile identifiers on keys htto www tiresias org guidelines keys htm i Enable Tech Tools to Consider Keyboards http www enabletech ie Tools2 html E Section 4 27 4 of the ADA Accessibility Guidelines ADAAG codified as the ADA Standards for Accessible Design as part of the Department of Justice s regulation implementing title Ill of the ADA at 28 C F R pt 36 Appendix A Telecommunications Act Accessibility Guidelines http www access board gov adaag html adaag htmz4 27 m Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Ergonomics of a Non Visual Touchscreen Interface A Case Study http trace wisc edu docs touchscreen_ergonomics2000 ergonomics htm This document provides information on touch screen interfaces for
246. eys must not be more than 5 lbs 22 2 N The effects of knob diameter toggle configuration surface textures surrounding surfaces etc will likely influence this measurement Include measurements for push controls only as it may be difficult to measure the force required by non push button controls such as pull type rotary slide thumb wheels and toggles For Requirement 3 Ensure appropriate key repeat rate and delay perform the following tests Hold a key down for 2 seconds or more and observe if key repeat occurs E Hold a key down for less than 2 seconds and note whether the key repeat occurred it should not have Inspect the user manual and reference manual to determine if key repeat delay is adjustable If so note the allowed range of times for repeat delay For Requirement 3 Ensure that key repeat rate can be adjusted inspect the user manual and reference manual to determine if key repeat rate is adjustable If so note the allowed range of repeat rates For Requirement 4 Identify all locking or toggle controls or keys Note that all locking or toggle controls or keys which excludes maintenance and setup features are included in the complete set of elements covered by chapters 5 through For each locking or toggle control or key perform the following tests E Check that the status of the control or key is visually discernible m Check for either an audible or tactile indicator for the status of th
247. floor Operable controls must not be more than 24 inches behind the reference plane see Figure Blof this part 251 252 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Figure A Control Area Vertical Plane Relative to the Operable Control Figure A above illustrates two bird s eye views of the Vertical Plane Relative to Operative Control In both views the vertical plane is centered on the control area In the first view the vertical plane is set back from the control area by a protrusion on the device In the second view there are no protrusions on the device and the vertical plane is right up against the control area Figure B 10 24 in max 10 in max z55 h1 mm 255 mtm Vertical Plane Vertical Plane 380 1370 mm 390 1170 mm Height of Operable Control Relative to the Vertical Plane Figure B above illustrates two front views of Height of Operative Control Helative to a Vertical Plane The first view illustrates a reach of no more than 10 inches deep with the control area between 15 and 54 inches The second view illustrates a reach greater than 10 inches but not more than 24 inches deep with the control area between 15 and 46 inches 81194 25 Provision j Handbook AS 508 A Self Contained Closed Products 9 11 3 9 11 1 9 11 2 Rationale Provisions 1 4 above apply to the physical characteristics of large office equipment including reach ranges and the general
248. fm doid 360405 360435 TSSC is a relatively informal industry group consisting of representatives from companies developing speech enabled IVRs for business transactions The committee is developing standardizing terminology and definitions and set of common tasks across applications for which there will be standardized commands and prompts 169 7 5 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 7 5 Time Interval Alerts for IVR Systems 170 7291 Voice mail messaging auto attendant and interactive voice response telecommunications systems that require a response from a user within a time interval must give an alert when the time interval is about to run out and must provide sufficient time for the user to indicate more time is required 81194 23 Provision d Rationale When a system requires a user to respond within a specified time some people with mobility or dexterity disabilities or those using TTYs where they must read the messages may have difficulty completing actions before the timeout TTY users may require extra time to interact with voice mail messaging auto attendant and interactive voice response systems For these users limits on response time can present a real frustration and barrier to using such systems Another class of users that often have problems with voice mail messaging auto attendant and interactive voice response systems are TTY users of the Telecommunications Relay Service TRS The TRS is a fe
249. following a Provide a auditory description of the overall layout of the screen when a user touches the upper left hand corner of the screen b Provide an auditory name or description of each button or text input field as the user touches the control c Provide different button or text input field edge sounds that indicate when a user is entering and leaving a button d Provide a white noise sound as the user touches blank areas of the screen Provide an auditory linear listing of all screen controls or speedlist that allows users to quickly discern and select controls without activating them For activating controls offer a selection button that users can push to operate controls they have selected from the speedlist on the touchscreen In this technique buttons and text inputs are lined up in a linear list fashion along the left edge of the screen As the user runs their finger from the top left hand corner to the bottom left hand corner of the screen sometimes along the groove formed by the touchscreen and the left cowl a speedlist feature is turned on After activating the speedlist auditory descriptions of the buttons and text inputs are provided as the user moves their finger up and down the list or as they press up and down arrow keys in the hardware controls The first auditory description in the list is always a description of the overall function of the screen and the types of information and controls which would be
250. formation and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 1 4 6 1 4 General Requirements Accessibility is accomplished by designing software that accommodates the widest range of users including those with disabilities Listed below are some general requirements that will help the Postal Service ensure that Web based applications and information remain accessible E The Postal Service will take advantage of operating system and Web client built in accessibility features when those features are available to both end users and software developers m The Postal Service will maintain standards for the following accessibility aids or assistive technologies that are used by people with disabilities to access Web based applications and information E Screen magnifiers Help visually impaired people by allowing them to enlarge any part of the screen i e as with a magnifying glass E Screen readers Help blind people by making on screen information available as synthesized speech or for display as refreshable Braille m Voice input aids Help mobility or dexterity impaired people by allowing them to control the computer with their voice instead of with a mouse or keyboard u On screen keyboards Help people who are unable to use a standard keyboard by providing an on screen keyboard that can be used with a pointing device m Keyboard filters Help people who have trouble typing by compensating for erratic motion tremors or slow response ti
251. g references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here m Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Self Contained Closed Products 1194 25 http www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 25 htm Voting Systems Standards April 30 2002 Federal Election Commission FEC http www fec gov pages vssfinal vss html 247 9 8 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 9 8 Color Coding Color coding must not be used as the only means of conveying information indicating an action prompting a response or distinguishing a visual element 1194 25 Provision g 9 8 1 Rationale This provision defines a requirement for self contained devices with color displays and keys buttons in which color indicates meaning Any display that requires a user to distinguish among otherwise identical red and blue objects for different functions e g printing a document or saving a file would pose problems for anyone who is color blind Displays must therefore not rely on color as the sole indicator of meaning for a visual element See Software Applications and Operating Systems Color Coding This provision does not prohibit the use of color to enhance identification of important features It does however require that some other method of identification such as text labels be combined with the use of color whenever a visual object conveys information 982 Techniques Purchased products should be the
252. ge alt attribute tags are required u Verify that the content of the alternate format or alternate access method is equivalent to both the content and functionality of the primary Web content Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 11 2 E Update the alternate format content concurrently with the primary Web content Ensure that no information has been lost and that the meaning remains the same 6 11 Scripting Languages September 2004 6 11 1 6 11 2 When pages use scripting languages to display content or to create interface elements the script must provide meaningful text that can be read by assistive technology If an accurate message cannot be conveyed by the results of the script provide an equivalent alternate format or access method Section 508 Provision 1194 22l Rationale Assistive technologies may not support some scripting languages Scripting must follow Web standards otherwise a screen reader could read the content of the script as a meaningless mixture of numbers and letters Some browsers are unable to run scripts and some users browsers are configured not to run any scripts Web content must be accessible when the scripting is unavailable The design of Web content should be secondary to being able to access that content Scripts must not interfere with assistive technology Scripts frequently are used to change information and user focus Test your scr
253. h reduced radio frequency emissions for each air interface they employ within 2 years or must ensure that one quarter of its total handset models are HAC compliant with reduced radio frequency emissions within 2 years whichever option yields a greater number of handsets m Digital cellular telephone manufacturers must make available to carriers at least two HAC compliant handset models with telecoil coupling for each air interface they produce within 3 years Each carrier providing digital wireless services must make available to consumers at least two HAC compliant handset models with telecoil coupling for each air interface it offers within 3 years B Half of all digital cellular telephone models offered by a digital cellular manufacturer or carrier must be compliant with the reduced radio frequency emissions requirements by February 18 2008 E Manufacturers must label packages containing compliant handsets and must make information available in the package or product manual and service providers must make the performance ratings of compliant telephones available to consumers 183 7 9 3 184 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide In addition the FCC established an exemption for digital cellular manufacturers and carriers that offer a minimal number of handset models The FCC also encourages digital cellular telephone manufacturers and service providers to offer at least one compliant handset that is a lower priced model and one th
254. h such features as keyboard only access and other options important to people with disabilities Electronic methods of interaction e g Web forms IVR systems and online help systems must also work properly for the employees and customers of the Postal Service The requirements in this chapter support Part 1194 41 of Section 508 and cover all classes of technology The requirements are applicable to a single device a device that represents the convergence of multiple technical standards e g a fax machine that supports two way voice communications or a custom set of products within a complex system Audience This chapter applies to anyone who buys or develops information documentation and support services or technology for the Postal Service i e Postal Service employees suppliers contractors and business partners Structure and Use Each part of this chapter describes the specific requirements that support one or more provisions in the technical standards for information documentation and support services The technical standards of Section 508 were written primarily from a technology perspective The Postal Service may consolidate some provisions to help Postal Service employees and business partners understand Postal Service compliance requirements from the perspective of designing for accessibility Each specific requirement includes a rationale techniques testing methods and references as shown below in section
255. h the Purchase or Lease of IT and for the Build or Customization of IT September 2004 27 Exhibit 4 5 1 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Purchase or Lease of IT Section 508 Considerations in the EIT Life Cycle This chart clarifies key Section 508 considerations that must be factored into mandatory EIT life cycle tasks by the various people and functional organizations responsible described in Chapter 2 Roles and Responsibilities This information is aligned with the Information Technology Division s Integrated Systems Methodology ISM but can be used in other current or future EIT governance processes Boldface text indicates formal work products for which Section 508 considerations must be documented Phase Concept Define business need and solution concept Planning Develop business case and program plan obtain funding 28 Tasks amp Work Develop Business Needs Statement and Initial Solution Concept Produce program project and procurement schedules and plans Develop business case analysis and ensure alignment with Enterprise Architecture Evaluate EIT 508 Considerations Determine whether EIT is part of solution If it is do the following Identify applicable EIT standards based on access considerations for candidate stakeholder interactions interfaces Ascertain possible general exception Ensure that applicable Section 508 technical requirements are included in Procu
256. hat permit the use of such devices as modems printers keyboards mice and audio components Connectors are plugs and sockets that link two devices together either by wire or wirelessly Although taken for granted and rarely in the limelight these components are more critical than most people would imagine When not designed or constructed properly they can prevent peripherals such as assistive technology AT from interacting with a user s computer system An industry standard is one that is published and made available by the manufacturer so that third party and cross manufacturer developers may build compatible connections Some examples are listed in the 508 technical assistance material This provision requires connection points on a computer system to comply with an industry standard technical specification that is available to other manufacturers This assures that the developers of assistive technology will have access to information concerning the design of system connections and thus be able to produce products that can use those connections Examples of publicly available industry standards may include USB PS 2 Serial ADB SCSI interfaces RS 232 Centronics parallel SCSI interfaces and PCMCIA This requirement essentially implies that a manufacturer cannot have all connection ports that are proprietary where standard ports are available September 2004 271 10 4 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 10 42 Techniqu
257. hat will not automatically activate a function based on mere contact Fortunately most keyboards require some pressure on individual keys in order to enable a keystroke Therefore capacitance keyboards would not meet this provision because they react as soon as they are touched and have no raised marks or actual keys They may not react at all when touched by a person with a prosthesis A membrane keypad with keys that must be pressed can be made tactilely discernible by separating keys with raised ridges so that individual keys can be distinguished by touch At this time some telecommunications products with touchscreens and other contact sensitive controls do not conform with this provision For example there are PDAs with telephone functionality and touchscreens as well as desk telephones with touchscreen enhanced features that cannot be operated via tactile controls Every attempt should be made to acquire technology that can comply with this requirement where possible and practical Consider the following recommendations that support this requirement E Consider placing tactile marks on top of the keys not beside them and raising the marks a minimum of 0 5 mm i On numeric keypads the 5 key could have a tactile marker such as a nib or bar on the top surface of it m On QWERTY keyboards the F and J keys could have a raised bar on them E Recessed keys or keys with concave tops can be an aid to users opera
258. he anchor tag used to link to the description use the title attribute to identify the link destination For example img title Detailed information on the sales figures graph Descriptive links also involves providing usable naming of short hyper text links Consider the context of links such as providing a link labeled back to return to the calling page can be confusing when not clearly indicating purpose September 2004 109 6 2 2 5 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide If you wish to hide the descriptive link with style sheets use an inline style change to match the font color to the background color If you use static HTML then the font attribute is also an option The following graphic is a screen shot of an image that has uses the D Link technique The code for this image immediately follows the screen shot Exhibit 6 2 2 4 Using Descriptive Links and Appropriate Use of Blank Alternates Percentage of Cars Through Toll Booth Other 53 Trucks z a pr m 55 D W Trucks up from 10 percent over last years figures Figure A D Link Example Pie Chart showing percentage of cars through toll booth Figure B HTML code for image in Figure A lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt meta http equiv content type content text html charset ISO 8859 1 title Using Descriptive Links Example lt title gt lt head gt
259. he primary content are made ensure that the text equivalent or alternate formats are updated concurrently When converting documents created by office suites into HTML for compliance table headers and image alt attribute tags are required When converting such documents into plain text formats for the Web data tables must be converted so that the text data is equivalent to the original data table Exhibit 6 10 2 1 Example of a Microsoft Word Table Figure A Microsoft Word table Allowable Service Benefits Weight Priority Mail Dependable 2 to 3 day delivery Up to 70 lbs service for No extra cost for Saturday and residential expedited deliveries delivery First Class Great option for postcards letters and 13 oz or less Mail service large envelopes Simply affix a stamp and send 131 6 10 2 2 Exhibit 6 10 2 2b 6 10 2 2 Example of Link Images Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Automatically generated HTML such as created by Microsoft Word s File Save As Web Page option must comply with the other requirements for HTML in this chapter HTML content generated by this method is frequently not valid HTML and should be checked by using a web page validation tool such as that provided by the W3C MarkUp Validation Service Viewing the generated HTML in a Web browser is not a sufficient test of valid HTML Frequently Web browsers ignore defects in coding in order to provide a better end user
260. hms in codecs and from some implementations of digital signaling and audio signal compression schemes However the wireless industry under order from the FCC to make services compatible with TTYs has now completed its work in collaboration with handset and TTY manufacturers Wireless carriers have reported to the FCC that their services carry TTY signals intact This provision applies to products and systems that transmit or conduct information or communications regardless of format that may contain coding necessary for accessibility e g captioning information or video description in video transmissions It would also apply to any other devices that transmit information or encode information for transmission and decode it after This provision also clearly applies to TTY signals passed through office telecommunications products and services e g routers TTYs were designed to function as modems over standard telephone lines Some technological changes in telecommunications systems have caused problems for the TTY signals This provision is written broadly so as to cover future telecommunications services that may affect accessibility Captioning video description and TTY products that meet the criterion of cross manufacturer non proprietary industry standard should be supported Telecommunications is defined as the transmission between or among points specified by the user of information of the user s choosing without
261. hone headsets go over the ear and should not be confused with earphones that go inside the ear Currently there is no FCC requirement or industry standard specifically concerned with defining HAC for wireless telephones even though wireless telephones must comply with this provision because they do deliver audio output to a transducer normally held to the ear Therefore if the product is a fax machine that does not have a handset this provision does not apply Techniques Provide Support for Inductive Coupling Telecommunications products that provide telephone functions and that deliver output by an audio transducer that is held up to the ear must emit a magnetic field sufficient for effective inductive coupling with hearing technologies These hearing technologies include hearing aids and cochlear implants equipped with T coils The signal provided must be within the useful range prescribed by the applicable industry standards in order to assure good reception with the wide variety of hearing aids This provision is required because with developments in technology new kinds of speaker elements have been introduced that produce no magnetic signal or one that is far Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 9 2 2 September 2004 1 9 2 2 lower thus making it impossible to use a T coil in those products Because of this in 1988 the Hearing Aid Compatibility Act was passed requiring all wireline and wireless telephones
262. http www itc org uk codes guidelines broadcasting tv sub sign audio audio description stnds Joe Clark Media Access Comments on U K Guidelines for audio http Joeclark org access description ukad html Q D o O O E O Macromedia Flash Player Home http www macromedia com software flash Microsoft Windows Media Home Page htto www microsoft com windows windowsmedia default aspx NCAM National Center for Accessible Media htto www wgbh org wgbh pages ncan Real Networks SMIL Basics Tutorial htto www realnetworks com resources howto smil smilbasics html Washington Ear Audio Description htto www washear org audiod htm World Wide Web W3 Consortium s Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language Standard http www w3 org Audio Video World Wide Web W3 Consortium s Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language Standard htto www w3 org Audio Video Handbook AS 508 A Appendix 8 A Postal Service Video and Multimedia Accessibility Checklist Use this as a tool for high level guidance in determining if a video or multimedia production is compliant or accessible Yes Requirement N A Comments 8 2 Analog and Digital Video Caption Receivers Decoders and Displays All analog television displays 13 inches and larger and computer equipment that includes analog television receiver or display circuitry must be equipped with caption decoder circuitry that appropriately receives decodes and dis
263. ications Products 1194 23 c Techniques For Kiosks a ITM Kiosk without full PC interface For kiosks that have no full PC functionality e g an ATM machine if the functions of the machine include a timeout users must be notified when a process is about to time out and must be given an opportunity to answer a prompt asking whether additional time is needed E ITM Kiosk with full PC interface Some kiosk implementations are created by placing a PC in a kiosk enclosure Such implementations pose a challenge in that they provide access to operating system functions application functions and Web site access Refer to provision a for details For Copiers Printers Calculators and Fax Machines E COTS without PC interface Refer to provision a for details m COTS non standard with a PC interface For high end devices that have an interface via a connected PC either directly attached or on the network and fax interfaces insure that the dialog box on the PC follows the appropriate standard in chapter 9 For PDAs Hefer to provision a for details Testing a If the device has a timeout ensure that both a prompt is given and that more time is available b Performance For each case of a required response within a time interval does the product meet all of the following criteria 1 Does the product give an alert which is accessible when the time interval is about to run out 2 Does the product allow the
264. ide direct connect TTYs that offer secondary benefits by supporting auto answer features TTYs connected through an audio jack typically cannot act as answering machines even if they have answering machine features in them that work when they are 159 7 2 2 2 160 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide connected through an RJ 11 jack To answer a telephone or act as an answering machine TTYs typically need to have a direct connection to the telephone line In the future there may be a standard mechanism for TTYs to answer the telephone when connected through an audio connection point as opposed to a direct connection so that TTY auto answer or answering machines can work Direct connect TTYs should be connected only to analog telephones to prevent damage to the TTYs A TTY should not be plugged directly into a digital telephone network unless an analog jack or an analog converter is available E Cordless analog wireless equipment The most common nonacoustic connection for cordless analog wireless use is a 2 5 mm headphone jack Use of the 2 5 mm headphone jack carries limitations Telephones with audio jacks and no RJ 11 jack will not work with many popular office TTY models that only have RJ 11 jacks including many of the currently available TTYs with printers and answering machines m Digital wireless i e cellular equipment The most common nonacoustic connection for cellular equipment is a 2
265. ier Orders 2001 da010578 doc On the basis of these events the Access Board believes that a telecommunications product can conform to this provision if it has either a fixed automatic reset function or an optional override of that switch This interpretation does not change the 508 standards which still require an automatic reset function to be provided It simply acknowledges that a manufacturer via the FCC waiver may choose to allow users the ability to override the volume reset function if the manufacturer wishes to design a telephone that way Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 8 2 2 September 2004 7 8 2 7 8 2 1 7 8 2 2 It is important to draw attention to the word function in this provision There is a difference between requiring an automatic reset and requiring a function to reset automatically Requiring a reset after each call is a fixed action whereas including reset as an option provides flexibility to turn that function switch on or off This 508 provision requires a automatic reset function which is a broader requirement because it allows an override Provision 1194 23 g does not preclude an override function For safety reasons however it is recommended that the reset function on telephones normally used by people who are hard of hearing be deactivated only when those telephones will not be shared with other people Techniques Provide Acceptable In Range Default Volume Settings All tel
266. ify User When Touch Tone Response Is Required 168 7 4 2 4 TTY Users Must Have Full Access to Voice Mail 0 00 c cee ees 168 7 4 3 TESI Ge ee ee ee ee E ee ee 168 7 4 4 References 0 ee nnn hrs 169 7 5 Time Interval Alerts for IVR Systems 0 ccc eee tent n ena 170 7 5 1 aui E E E E T EE E E E E E EEE E E EE E E EE 170 7 5 2 TECNNIQUCS 171 7 5 2 1 Provide Warning Before Response Period Tlmeouts and Preserve sardi q 171 7 5 2 2 Provide Control of Playback of IVR Messages 00c eee neces 171 Handbook AS 508 A Contents 7 5 2 3 Use Both Visual and Audible Alerts 0 0 ccc eee 171 7 5 3 P 172 7 5 4 References 6 eese hehe 172 7 6 Caller ID and Similar Functions leseeseeee RII 173 7 6 1 aii 173 aon MN I NEQOE OTT T AA 7 6 2 1 Provide Talking Caller ID Functions lsseslseseseslelsnnne 7 6 2 2 Provide Access to Telephone Information Through Assistive Technology 7 6 2 3 Provide Time Sensitive Telephone Information Immediately 175 7 6 3 SWS SENN Yn cee ce E at geek eh eek ae ne ea ah ep eek ee ee ee ee 175 7 6 4 PiCICVONCCS 2 24 40 b ide ES eOEEE AE RECA ORLA PEER ROR EASE REED REE RSE E ER EES 176 7 7 VOIUIMG CONMO P cE
267. ify specific colors Section 508 Provision 1194 22c Style Sheets Documents must be organized so that they are readable without an associated style sheet Documents must be constructed so that the user does not need style sheets to interpret the content of the Web page This does not prohibit the use of style sheets Section 508 Provision 81194 224 Image Maps Use client side image maps whenever possible in place of server side image maps Section 508 Provision 1194 22e Provide equivalent redundant text links for all server side image map hot spot areas Section 508 Provision 1194 22f Tables Tables must be constructed so that they can be easily interpreted by all users and communicate the intent of the author Section 508 Provision 81194 22g h Frames Framesets must be constructed so that the user does not have to depend on visual cues to navigate the site Frames must be titled with text that facilitates frame identification and navigation Section 508 Provision 1194 22i Screen Flicker Web pages must not use flashing or blinking text objects or other elements having a flash or blink frequency between 2 and 55 cycles per second 2 0 Hz and 55 0 Hz If flashing is present provide a way to change the frequency Section 508 Provision 1194 22 Equivalent Text Content When compliance cannot be achieved provide an alternate format or alternate access method that will be used in addition to or in place of
268. ighted this indicates that if the user clicks the mouse or presses the ENTER key the associated feature will be invoked and that item has the focus Providing a visual focus indicator referred to as a cursor allows someone to use a software application effectively When a software application is being used by a person running assistive technology especially those with visual or mobility impairments the assistive technology must be able to discern and track the focus so that it can describe magnify or manipulate the object for the user e g a screen reader can translate information about the focused object into voice output 5 4 2 5 4 2 5 4 2 1 Exhibit 5 4 2 1 Example of Using Standard Controls to Expose Focus Information Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Software applications must allow assistive technology to track the focused object and focus changes by programmatically exposing information about focused objects available to assistive technology Software applications must also provide a visual indicator or cursor that identifies where the focus is or where an action will occur if an input event e g mouse click or keystroke takes place Techniques Use Standard Controls to Expose Focus Information Whenever possible software applications must use standard controls to allow operating system accessibility features and assistive technology to access and track system focus If nonstandard controls must b
269. il Investigations L Maxwell 5 1 Inspector in Charge Group 4 Emergency Preparedness and Homeland Security Z Hill 5 1 Inspector in Charge Group 5 International Affairs D Hill 5 1 Inspector in Charge Group 6 Intelligence J Wachuta 5 Assistant Chief Inspector Administrative Operations N Johnson 5 1 Manager Human Resource Performance V Bellinger 5 1 Inspector in Charge Career Development Division F Toogood 5 1 Inspector in Charge Finance and Administrative Services C Giusti 5 1 Inspector in Charge Information Technology Division S Guttman 5 Inspector in Charge Internal Affairs Division T Denneny 5 Manager Strategic Planning and Performance Management L Spallanzani September 2004 105 6 2 2 2 Exhibit 6 2 2 2 6 2 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Provide Alternate Text for Images Provide alternate descriptive text for images using the a t attribute of the img tag The description should be usable in place of the image It should contain equivalent information so that if you did not have access to the image itself the alternative text would convey the necessary meaning For images that are not used for comprehension or navigation or for images that are redundant use a blank alt attribute to cause assistive technology to ignore the image Examples of this include a block of color or a transparent graphic that is used as a filler or spacer a design element or
270. in the technical reference guidelines for recommended approaches Before accepting a purchase do the following E Test compliance with the stated accessibility standards u Work with the vendor to address issues where the vendor does not meet standards i Work with Supply Management to address the issue if the deliverable does not meet standards The Measure of Success Success is measured by compliance at the text or data interface i e where the person with a disability can access information Handbook AS 508 A Section 508 Postal Service Processes to Comply 4 5 Integrated Systems Methodology ISM Overview This section shows how Section 508 integrates into the systems development life cycle The ISM unifies Postal Service development life cycle methodologies used by contractors and Postal Service project managers The ISM defines a life cycle framework that provides a roadmap for conceiving planning developing implementing and maintaining business solutions It contains the key minimum mandatory deliverables that are required to deliver a business solution successfully to the customer The goals of the ISM are to do the following E Reduce solution development and deployment costs E Speed the time to deployment of technology solutions m Provide a single point of access to all the current policies procedures instructions and templates Exhibit 4 5 1 addresses elements of the Section 508 process for bot
271. information access needs to be addressed by design engineers for a telephone system to conform to the 508 standards Supply Management contract officers should know that this is not a problem with all digital telephone systems Products and services that deliver support or provide special telephone function information such as Caller ID are covered by this provision Automatic location identification ALI which displays a caller s address is also covered but is less commonly used Techniques Provide Talking Caller ID Functions Where possible and practical provide built in talking Caller ID functions that make telephone function information available directly in at least one nonvisual mode Most commonly the nonvisual format for presenting telecommunications information is audio so built in talking caller ID approaches that use speech to make textual information available would satisfy this provision Provide Access to Telephone Information Through Assistive Technology For systems for which talking Caller ID is not possible or practical provide indirect access to telephone function information via assistive technology in at least one nonvisual mode Making this information available to assistive technology allows users to read the text through refreshable Braille displays or hear it through screen readers and other Many landline office telephone systems support the TAPI interface which is a standard pro
272. interoperable universal two way cordless infrared light transmission data port IrDA Serial Infrared Physical Layer Link Specification IrPHY IrDA Serial Infrared Link Access Protocol IrLAP and IrDA Serial Infrared Link Management Protocol IrLMP IrDA Tiny TP 1 331KB and IrDA Point and Shoot Profile and Test Specification http www irda org standards specifications asp E IEEE Standard 1394b High Performance Serial Bus 2002 IEEE Standards Association IEEE SA http www ieee org products onlinepubs stand standards html September 2004 273 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank 274 Handbook AS 508 A Appendix 10 A 10 2 10 3 10 4 Desktop and Portable Computers Accessibility Checklist Use this as a tool for high level guidance in determining if a desktop or portable computer is compliant or accessible Yes No Requirement Number and Summary or N A Comments Mechanical or Touch Operated Controls Keys and Touch Screens Desktop and portable computer products that have mechanically operated controls and keys must comply with Section 7 12 in the Chapter 7 Telecommunications Products 1194 26 Provision a and 1194 26 Provision b 1 Controls and keys must be tactilely discernible without activating the controls or keys Controls and keys must be operable with one hand and must not require tight grasping pinching or twisting of the wrist The force required t
273. io Manager own Project Managers support Contracting Officers support Functional Organization Client own Executive Sponsor own IT Portfolio Manager support Enterprise Architecture Staff support Contracting Officers support IT Portfolio Manager own Enterprise Architecture Staff support Handbook AS 508 A Section 508 Postal Service Processes to Comply Phase Development Design build lease buy and test the EIT solution Implementation Certify accept and deploy EIT solution Operations Management Maintain and enhance solution close out project September 2004 Tasks amp Work Perform requirements analysis IF a custom solution is to be constructed by a supplier perform procurement processes send RFP evaluate vendor responses Design build and test the solution Develop design documents Produce development code and materials Plan and conduct solution tests Certify and document Section 508 compliance in certification and system documentation Obtain user feedback and evaluate EIT solution for ongoing Section 508 compliance Create change requests to resolve Section 508 compliance issues and improve solution performance 508 Considerations Ensure that applicable Section 508 technical requirements are addressed in relevant areas of the Requirements Document Functional Technical Data Interfaces Security and I
274. ion 1194 25b Touch Screens or Contact Sensitive controls Provision 1194 25c Biometric Forms of User Identification or Control Provision 1194 25d Auditory Output Provision 1194 25e 233 9 1 4 234 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Voice Output in a Public Area Provision 1194 25f Color Coding Provision 81194 259 Range of Color Selections Provision 81194 25h 9 10 Screen Flickering Provision 1194 251 Operable controls on Freestanding Non Portable devices Provision 1194 25j Appendix 9 Aj Checklist Introduction to Self Contained Closed Product Accessibility Products covered by this standard present challenges from the perspective of device size and dimensions e g can someone in a wheelchair reach the controls of a copier user input what touch screen area or button controls which function user feedback did the function activate what is the error message These challenges vary by type of physical impairment Deaf persons and hearing impaired but not deaf persons are typically faced with challenges such as audible beeps that have no visual counterpart E Visually impaired and blind persons are typically faced with challenges such as E Identification of buttons and controls for input B Interaction with an alternative to a touch screen keypad or alternative E Enlarged print or synthetic speech to convey device output E Dexterity or mobility impaired persons are typic
275. ioned or an alternate format or alternate access method must be provided 208 Handbook AS 508 A Video and Multimedia Products 8 2 4 824 References The following references provide additional guidance on the techniques described above but must not be used in place of the general and specific Postal Service requirements in this chapter If any of these references conflict with Postal Service requirements defer to the Postal Service requirements E Advanced Television Systems Committee ATSC decision that digital television displays will eventually need to be equipped with the capability to provide an alternative to audio playback e g captioning htto www atsc org a Apple Computer s Quicktime and SMIL Page http www apple com quicktime authoring qtsmil html B CPB WGBH s National Center for Accessible Media Common DTV Issues http ncam wgbh org dtv basics atvissues html m CPB WGBH s National Center for Accessible Media Motion Picture Access Project MOPIX http ncam wgbh org mopix aboutproject html EIA 708 Specification for Digital Television Closed Captioning http global ihs com E FCC DTV Regulations htto www fcc gov dtv Macromedia Flash Player Home htto www macromedia com software flash Microsoft Windows Media Home Page http www microsoft com windows windowsmedia default aspx m Real Networks SMIL Basics Tutorial http www realnetworks com resources howto smil smilbasics html
276. ipts with accessible technology to ensure that your scripts do not create content that is inaccessible Techniques If the results of a script cannot be accessed by assistive technology or if a meaningful message cannot be conveyed with the use of assistive technology provide an alternate format or access method Use the lt NOSCRIPT gt tag to provide content to browsers that cannot run scripts Do not use redirects or scripts in place of Uniform Resource Locators URLs Scripts that directly call functions e g a href javascript DoSome Function must use a URL e g a href htto www usps com Do SomeFunction gt Provide accessible URLs if you use scripts functions in links e g a href http www usps com on Click javascript DoSomeFunction gt Warn if scripts are changing focus such as opening a link in a new window Browser detection routines must not require a specific browser client Browser detection routines should always allow the user the option to view the Web content Assistive technology and alternative Web browsers may meet the technical requirements to view your Web content but may not be 133 6 11 2 1 134 6 11 2 1 6 11 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide allowed to view that content by a poorly written or defective browser detection routine When recommending use of specific browsers design your scripts to allow users to continue accessing the Web content even if
277. irectly via a network research of a COTS vendor s VPAT specification will enable the Postal Service to find the most compliant device that needs the business requirements m COTS non standard with a PC interface For high end devices that do have an interface via a connected PC either directly attached or on the network research of vendor s VPAT specification will enable the Postal Service to find the most compliant device that meets the business requirements through a software interface that complies with the provisions of Chapter 5 Software Applications and Operating Systems 9 223 For PDAs E For PDAs that are closed systems Despite the difficulty of finding compliant devices in this category the essential functions can often be adapted See the references listed below E For PDAs that have operating systems As of the draft date of this publication no existing PDA has the rich array of assistive technology found in a PC platform However AT software for these devices can be developed VPAT comparison and business requirements should drive a continual advance toward full compliance 923 Testing a Inspect the product to identify if the device provides a function allowing access as specified by persons with limited vision hearing or mobility b If the voice output is designed to be usable by people who are blind perform the following tests on the device with all visible outputs disabled 1 Evaluate a prototyp
278. is required E Ensure that timeouts notify the user that a timeout has occurred and the reason for the timeout This includes notifying the user a redirect is going to occur Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 16 3 E Ensure users are asked if they wish to have auto refresh of content enabled Default to not using auto refresh m Ensure that users are notified of fixed time limits before they begin September 2004 147 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank 148 Handbook AS 508 A Appendix 6 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Checklist Use this as a tool for determining if a Web based application or information is compliant or accessible Yes No or Requirement Number and Summary N A Comments Non Text Elements A descriptive text equivalent must be provided for all non text elements that render information required for comprehension of the content as well as those that facilitate navigation Non text items include images video graphs charts animation and audio Section 508 Provision 1194 22a Multimedia Provide equivalent alternate formats or alternate access methods for any multimedia presentation and synchronize them with the presentation Section 508 Provision 81194 22b Color Web pages must be designed so that all information required for navigation or meaning is independent of the ability to ident
279. ision 81194 22n Portable Document Format PDF Files On Postal Service Internet and Intranet sites all PDF files must have an accessible alternate format posted for use by the public and employees Repetitive Navigation Provide a method that will permit users of assistive technology the option to skip repetitive navigation links URL hyperlinks must have a descriptive text link Timed Responses When a timed response is required users must be alerted and given both a mechanism and sufficient time to indicate that they need additional time Handbook AS 508 A F Telecommunications Products 7 1 Overview 711 Contents This chapter contains the specific electronic and information technology EIT performance requirements related to the following subpart of Section 508 EIT Technical Standard 1194 23 Telecommunications Products Provisions a thru j 712 Summary 7 1 2 1 Technology The requirements in this chapter cover the following E Any product whose primary function is to provide telephone functions i e 2 way voice communication regardless of type ranging from traditional business telephones to a wide variety of new and emerging products g For products with multiple functions these requirements apply only to the telephone functions of those products The convergence of telephony and information technology is blurring the line between different product types as a variety of new and innovative products
280. ision covers self contained devices for which the output needs to be expressed as speech to an end user with a headset Testing therefore is best done by operating the system with the screen turned off and headsets used as the output mode Error conditions and introductory text prompts should also be clear C If an exception was taken when procuring a device that is not fully accessible define the alternate format or method needed to provide equivalent access to people with disabilities who can not readily use the device References The following references apply to the specific requirements stated in this section E Trace Center Research on Kiosk accommodation Note sub page for unique approach EZ Access keys htto www tracecenter org world kiosks m Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Self Contained Closed Products 1194 25 http www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 25 htm Handbook AS 508 A Self Contained Closed Products 9 7 4 9 7 Voice Output in a Public Area September 2004 9 7 1 9 7 2 9 7 3 9 7 4 When products deliver voice output in a public area incremental volume control must be provided with output amplification up to a level of at least 65 dB Where the ambient noise level of the environment is above 45 dB a volume gain of at least 20 dB above the ambient level must be user selectable A function must be provided to automatically reset the volume to the defa
281. it on Interference to Hearing Technologies http www icdr us Participants included representatives from the digital wireless telephone and hearing technologies industries disability organizations research centers and Federal agencies such as the FCC and the Food and Drug Administration FDA Presentations were made on laws that address hearing aid compatibility new technological developments and telephone designs that reduce interference and the results of laboratory and consumer testing 7 11 Transmission Conducting Information 188 7 11 1 Products that transmit or conduct information or communication must pass through cross manufacturer non proprietary industry standard codes translation protocols formats or other information necessary to provide the information or communication in a usable format Technologies that use encoding signal compression format transformation or similar techniques must not remove information needed for access or must restore it upon delivery 81194 23 Provision j Rationale Services such as closed captioning and video description provide access to multimedia transmission for people with disabilities see Chapter 8 Video and Multimedia The information communicated through these services includes text audio and coded information for delivery and or display of the information This telecommunications product provision was created largely in response to problems with transmission of cl
282. ity number the announcement and ensuing interaction should not erase the information entered by the user to that point Resetting the system to provide the user with another timed try with no more time to complete it than the first time is not sufficient to conform to the requirement of allowing the individual to indicate that more time is required In addition the alert should repeat at the end of each response period until the user successfully completes the entire operation i e message flow or intentionally exits the function so that a destructive timeout does not occur Preservation of user input and granting extensions of response time have the added benefit of helping ensure that users do not tie up the system for extended periods of time 7 5 2 2 Provide Control of Playback of IVR Messages Where possible and practical provide a way for users to repeat slow down or increase the volume of IVR messages Some people with partial hearing loss only recognize some of the words in a message and may need to have messages repeated repeated more loudly or repeated more slowly so that they may comprehend what is being said 7 5 33 Use Both Visual and Audible Alerts Where possible and practical provide multiple sensory mode alerts Multiple sensory methods can be used to alert users that the end of a response period is approaching For example in addition to having an audible alert inform a user that a timeout is about to occur a visual
283. jects When the focus is on the object or control the assistive technology should be able to access and state the object name its role type its state and its current value C Use a screen magnifier to navigate through the user interface of the operating system or software application i e windows menus toolbars or controls to ensure that the focused object is tracked and that an appropriate operating system standard cursor is displayed for the various focused objects d Note any objects for which focus is not tracked the object name role state and value of which are not accessible to assistive technology or which display an inappropriate standard cursor e For the objects in question fix then retest using this procedure References htto msdn microsoft com library default asp url nhp default asp contentid 28000544 E Sun Java Developing Accessible JFC Applications http www sun com access developers developing accessible apps n http developer gnome org projects gap The accessibility framework includes an accessibility toolkit application programming interface and an assistive technology service provider interface Note Postal Service developers and purchasing agents are strongly urged to obtain updated references for application or operating system accessibility references when designing or purchasing Postal Service applications 57 5 5 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 5 5 User Interf
284. k AS 508 A Appendix 5 A Software Applications and Operating Systems Accessibility Checklist Use this as a tool for high level guidance in determining if a software application or operating system is compliant or accessible Requirement Number and Summary Yes No or N A Comments 1 Keyboard Access When software applications are designed to run on a system that has a keyboard software application functions must be executable from a keyboard where the function itself or the result of performing the function can be identified or labeled with text Section 508 1194 21a 2 Activated Accessibility Features Software applications must not disrupt or disable activated features of other products that are identified as accessibility features where those features are developed and documented according to industry standards Software applications also must not disrupt or disable activated accessibility features of any operating system where the application programming interface API for those accessibility features has been documented by the manufacturer of the operating system and is available to the product developer Section 508 1194 21b 3 On Screen Focus Operating systems and software applications must provide a well defined on screen indication of the current focus that moves among user interface elements as the input focus changes The focus must be programmatically exposed so that assistive technology can track focus
285. ky Pig lt option gt lt option value 4 gt Wile E Coyote and Road Runner lt option gt lt option value 5 gt Sylvester and Tweety lt option gt lt select gt September 2004 139 6 13 2 Exhibit 6 13 2d Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Example of a Check Box Figure A Screen shot of check boxes Choose a Stamp Li Bison O Red Fox Li Eagle Figure B Relevant HTML code for Figure A lt form name forml method post action checkbox cfm Choose input label lt input lt label lt input lt labelfor eagle gt Eagle lt label gt lt form gt a Stamp lt br gt id bison type checkbox name checkbox value checkbox tabindex 1 gt for bison gt Bison lt label gt lt br gt id fox type checkbox name checkbox2 value checkbox tabindex 2 gt for fox gt Red Fox lt label gt lt br gt id eagle type checkbox name checkbox3 value checkbox tabindex 3 Exhibit 6 13 2e Example of Radio Buttons Figure A Screen shot of radio buttons Choose a Product Cancelled Panes Envelopes First Day Covers Figure B Relevant HTML code for Figure A lt form name form2 method post action radiobutton cfm gt Choose lt input lt label lt input lt label lt input lt label lt form gt a Product lt BR gt id cp type radio name radio value cp tabindex 1 for cp Cancelled Panes lt label gt lt br gt id envelopes type radio name radi
286. l Multimedia Productions Narrated portions of mission critical Postal Service multimedia productions regardless of how delivered e g Web delivered CD ROM DVD or software application must be either open or closed captioned Many multimedia productions used in product or service demos training or educational media and health and safety demos are considered mission critical Closed captioning is preferred when the delivery and display mechanisms are known and available to support it see section 8 2 However if the broadcast and display mechanisms are unknown or cannot support closed captioning open captioning must be used 215 8 4 3 216 8 4 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Computer based training CBT products including e learning applications and other Postal training productions can include multimedia as components of larger software applications Web based applications or closed products In these cases relevant specific requirements for video and multimedia captioning and audio description must be satisfied in addition to other specific requirements found in other chapters For example a multimedia demo for Click N Ship distributed as an executable software application on CD ROM would have to comply with video and multimedia captioning and audio description requirements in addition to applicable software application requirements Some training software development applications e g Macrome
287. l for Address sAddress lt label gt input tabindex 2 type text name Address id Address size 50 maxlength lt p gt lt p gt Iinput tabindex 3 type submit name SubmitButton value Submit Query gt lt input tabindex 4 type reset name ResetButton value Reset gt lt p gt lt form gt 75 gt 138 Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines Exhibit 6 13 2b Example of a Text Area Box 6 13 2 Figure A Screen shot of a text area box aie El Explain how your website adheres to the Section 508 Standards Figure B Relevant HTML code for Figure A lt form name text box method post action test cfm gt label for motives gt Explain how your web content adheres to the Section 508 Standards label lt p gt lt textarea id motives name motives tabindex 1 gt lt textarea gt lt p gt lt form gt Exhibit 6 13 2c Example of a Select Box Figure A Screen shot of a select box What is your favorite stamp Daffy Duck Daty Duck Bugs Bunny Forky Fig Wile E Coyote and Road Runner avlvester and wee Figure B Relevant HTML code for Figure A label for IfavstampI What is your favorite stamp lt label gt select id favstamp name favstamp gt option value 1 gt Daffy Duck lt option gt lt option value 2 gt Bugs Bunny lt option gt lt option value 3 gt Por
288. l keyboards e Shortcut keys for all mouse actions These types of technology are used to accommodate employees They are also used to verify that desktop software and websites are accessible section 508 does not require the Postal Service or other government agencies to provide assistive technology to the general public but must provide accessible information and data Federal agencies and the Postal Service must provide employees with assistive technologies necessary to perform their work Postal Service Standards The Postal Service standard assistive technologies are listed in the Infrastructure Tool Kit ITK at http itk This list is evolving and will expand as needed The current ITK assistive technology includes a Screen Reader Software JAWS for Windows 98 95 NT and Windows 2000 http www freedomscientific com b Screen Magnification Software MAGic for Windows 98 95 NT and Windows 2000 http www freedomscientific com C Speech to Text Software Dragon NaturallySpeaking for Windows 98 95 NT and Windows 2000 http www scansoft com naturallyspeakingl d Middleware for Speech to Text and Screen Reader Software JawBone for Windows 98 95 NT and Windows 2000 http www ngtvoice com This standardized software allows the Postal Service to determine compliance with the functional performance criteria and allows testing technical compliance using tools approved for use in the postal computing environment
289. le gt 122 Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 7 2 2 September 2004 Complex Tables When a data table has more than one logical level of row or column headers it is a complex table The axis attribute is used to create categories in a complex table The table used in the following example lists travel expenses at two locations San Jose and Seattle by date and category meals hotels and transport The caption centered above the table reads Travel Expense Report The axis attributes or categories of the table are as follows E City E Travel dates E Meal expenses g Hotel expenses E Transport expenses The first row of the table contains these headers Meals Hotels Transport and Subtotals The first row group shows the expenses in San Jose for those categories on August 25 26 1997 Below that row group the subtotals of all expenses in San Jose are listed The second row group presents similar data for expenses incurred in Seattle on August 27 28 1997 Below that row subtotals of all expenses in Seattle are listed The final row of the table lists the combined total expenses for San Jose and Seattle for Meals Hotels and Transport It also provides the total of all money expensed on the entire report 123 6 7 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 6 7 2 2b p 1 Example of a Complex Table Using the axis
290. le with disabilities to access the information that is available to non disabled citizens Compliance is as clearly defined as possible within the context of best practices in both electronic information technology and assistive technology Since all technologies evolve adherence to only specific provisions of each applicable technical standard may not result in full compliance with the law To address this problem the law includes 1194 31 Functional Performance Criteria which requires overall usability by people with disabilities Essentially the six Functional Performance Criteria require that the EIT must be usable at least one mode of operation and information retrieval by people with functional limitations in vision mobility hearing and speech Compliance with the law requires that EIT meet both the applicable technical standards and thel functional performance criteria htto www section508 gov index cfm FuseAction Content amp ID 12 Functional Build and Buy section 508 states that When developing procuring maintaining or using electronic and information technology each agency shall ensure that the products comply with the applicable provisions Therefore accessibility is a requirement of both purchased information technology and technology developed to meet a unique Postal Service requirement When Procuring an EIT Solution Starting with the market research phase of product selection and moving thr
291. lection or focused object the No button is indicated clearly and available An example of using standard user interface controls to make Ul and programmatic elements accessible to assistive technology This figure shows a Security Warning dialog box that is invoked by a Web browser software application that uses standard user interface controls Because standard controls have been used properly this dialog box is accessible to assistive technology A screen reader would read the Window title then the text of the warning message the check box label Always trust content from Sun Microsystems Inc and each label for the three push buttons Yes No More Info 5 5 2 2 Controls Use Reliable Accessibility Frameworks for Nonstandard When no other option is available nonstandard controls must use reliable accessibility frameworks or component object models that use service interfaces event systems APIs and proxies to provide object information to assistive technology Exhibit 5 5 2 2 Example of Using Reliable Accessibility Frameworks for Nonstandard UI Controls Function Key Display Hest Field Move Test Create Auto Close or Exit Restore All Hest Window 4 521 Nest Misspelliri Macros View Field C pu Maximize All Visual Basic Next Vvindow 4 5 2 reader nonstandard controls but the information about the controls including their name state and
292. ler ID or an indirect approach via assistive technology compatibility For example if users have a talking Caller ID function on their telephones the function must be user selectable and be able to speak the Caller ID information immediately if it is immediately displayed for other users Testing a For telecommunications products that include Caller ID or similar functions identify the Caller ID or similar functions that are applicable This must include all of the operational functions which excludes maintenance and setup features that end users have to use b For customer premises equipment CPE or equipment employed on the premises of a person other than a carrier to originate route or terminate telecommunications do the following ES Determine if the product provides visual Caller ID If it does check for voice output Talking Caller ID E If the product does not include visual Caller ID check for the ability to add an external device specifically providing talking caller ID a Check for exposure of the Caller ID info to a computer workstation For such products check to see if software or a protocol e g TAPI or extended TAPI protocol is in use that will make Caller ID and other information available in least one non visual mode C For telecommunication equipment other than customer premise equipment used by a carrier to provide telecommunications services including software integral to such equipmen
293. lf contained closed products and desktop and portable computers They are referred to as assistive technology any item or system whether acquired modified or customized used to increase maintain or improve functional capabilities of people with disabilities These technical standards translate into day to day business functions such as using the Web to look up postal rates using a kiosk to purchase stamps receiving messages with email and using a computer to view a presentation Functional performance criteria define overarching performance measures that ensure interaction across all classes of technology The functional performance criteria ensure that from the perspective of a person with a disability all interactions are consistent and accessible regardless of the class of technology Business functions often span multiple classes of technology When you apply Section 508 you must consider all applicable technical standards and functional performance criteria For example an e learning system may include Internet based technology and video and multimedia access from a desktop with consistent functional performance When we adhere to both technical standards and functional performance criteria people with functional limitations can use all Information Technology IT systems Handbook AS 508 A Introduction Exhibit 1 2 2 1 3 1 Access to Technology and Function win kon Multimedia i ael containaed
294. lication requirements Some training or CBT software development applications offer support for audio describing multimedia 853 Testing For each multimedia or video production that is developed or purchased determine the delivery method for the production then use the following general method to test compliance with the specific requirements in this section E If the production is a video and the delivery method is unknown or not known to support closed audio description whether on tape or via broadcast make sure that where possible open audio descriptions are permanently encoded on the audio track of the production If they are not author and encode them before distribution E If the production is a video and the delivery method is external or known to support closed audio description make sure that where possible the production is encoded with closed audio descriptions Test the video broadcast and display on equipment that is capable of SAP playback Ensure that the user can enable view and disable the secondary audio program track i e closed audio descriptions on the video a If the production is a live event e g conference or webcast determine if a real time audio descriptions of critical visual information can be provided using either a technology based system e g remote transmission of audio via radio or phone lines satellite feeds or fiber optics or a non technology solution such as a modified presentatio
295. limited to Braille large print cassette recordings and recorded audio m Other alternate access methods may include but are not limited to voice fax relay service and TTY 8 2 Analog and Digital Video Caption Receivers Decoders and Displays 206 8 2 1 All analog television displays 13 inches and larger and computer equipment that includes analog television receiver or display circuitry must be equipped with caption decoder circuitry that appropriately receives decodes and displays closed captions from broadcast cable videotape and DVD signals As soon as practicable but not later than July 1 2002 widescreen digital television DTV displays measuring at least 7 8 inches vertically DTV sets with conventional displays measuring at least 13 inches vertically and stand alone DTV tuners whether or not they are marketed with display screens and computer equipment that includes DTV receiver or display circuitry must be equipped with caption decoder circuitry that appropriately receives decodes and displays closed captions from broadcast cable videotape and DVD signals Section 508 Provision 1194 24a Rationale This requirement addresses the techniques used to ensure that all applicable Postal Service video receivers and displays are capable of displaying closed captioning in a variety of contexts This requirement does not address the techniques used to author or encode the open or closed captioning in the vi
296. logies must be provided 81194 23 Provision h Rationale There are several different ways in which hearing aid wearers use the telephone Some use the microphone on their hearing aid to pick up sound from the telephone speaker i e acoustic coupling Some others use a hard wired electrical connection between the telephone and the hearing aid i e direct audio input or DAI A sizeable minority of hearing aid wearers typically but not exclusively those with higher degrees of hearing loss use the telecoil feature found in many hearing aids to pick up the speech i e inductive coupling The term hearing aid compatibility HAC as used in this section refers to inductive coupling or telecoil compatibility There are several problems that hearing aid users contend with that lead them to choose inductive coupling One is acoustic feedback also known as whistling or squealing This is caused when the telephone speaker is held against the part of the hearing aid with the microphone Two other problems are that the speech signal is weakened as it passes across the distance between the telephone speaker and the hearing aid microphone and ambient noise may enter the hearing aid along with the speech The solution to these problems for many people is to bypass the microphone completely and change to the telecoil T setting on their hearing aid colloquially called the telephone switch or T coil A T coil is a small induc
297. lopers must be aware of sequential keyboard access issues when creating nonstandard input routines Beyond use of latched and locked modifier keys appropriate on screen focus and cursor representation must be provided see Section 5 4 On Screen Focus September 2004 47 5 2 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 5 2 2 6 Example of Latched and Locked Keyboard Access Accessibility Options Keyboard Sound Display Mouse General ShickyReys Use Sticky eus if you want ta use SHIFT CTF Windows logo key bv pressing one key at a tir Filterk eps Use FilterKeys if you want Windows to ignore keystrokes or slow the repeat rate C Use FilterKeys TagaleKaevys Use TaggleKeus if vou want to hear tenes whe CAPS LOCK NUM LOCK and SCROLL LOCH Use ToggleKeys An example of the Windows XP Operating System s Accessibility Options control panel The Accessibility Options control panel can be found under the Windows XP Start Menu Settings Control Panel StickyKeys FilterKeys and ToggleKeys can all be activated using this control panel Any Windows XP software application can detect and use these settings to provide users with keyboard accessibility options Because users that need these features will probably not be using a mouse Windows XP provides keyboard shortcuts that are enabled by default The keyboard shortcut for StickyKeys is to press the SHIFT key five times The ke
298. luster list box e g Hawkeye Northland Dakotas Big Sky etc In each case both the on screen focus and textual information for both list box selections must be made accessible to assistive technology 56 Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 4 4 September 2004 543 Testing 5 4 4 Manual inspection based testing using the methods described in this chapter must accompany any automated tests Some of these manual tests may be automated using testing tools or Integrated Development Environment IDE features as long as testing occurs in the context of usage by assistive technology users Conduct a manual inspection of the software application or operating system with and without assistive technology to verify that the on screen focus is well defined a Using only the keyboard and keyboard equivalents navigate through the user interface of the operating system or software application i e windows menus toolbars and controls to ensure that the focused object is tracked and that an appropriate operating system standard cursor or highlight element is displayed for the various focused objects b Use a screen reader to navigate through the user interface of the operating system or software application i e windows menus toolbars or controls to ensure that the focused object is tracked and that a appropriate object information is read by the screen reader for the various focused ob
299. me E Alternative input devices Help people who would prefer to control their computer with a device other than a keyboard or mouse m The Postal Service will develop Web based applications that are based on interoperable specifications and do not interfere with accessibility features installed and activated by a user e g operating system features and Web client capabilities as well as installed accessibility aids Web based developers should do the following E Support native operating system and activated accessibility features for major operating systems that are integrated with input and output devices e g keyboard sound display or mouse These features are supported by most Web clients and Web browsers Developers should be aware of how these features will be used in combination with Web based technologies Standards for each operating system related to each specific requirement are shown in the References area under each specific requirement in Chapter 5 Software Applications and Operating Systems E Use standard markup tags in creating Web content where possible i e use the W3C recommendations Standardized markup is often already supported by Web clients and operating September 2004 101 6 1 5 102 6 1 5 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide system accessibility features Using these tags will often eliminate the need for software to provide explicit accessibility support unless the behavior of the W
300. me digital wireline telephone systems do not offer standard nonacoustic connectors Use the following guidance to satisfy this requirement depending on the type of system being considered m Wireline equipment Wireline equipment must provide a standard non acoustic connection i e an analog RJ 11 jack with a ring equivalence of 1 in addition to the 1 ring equivalent provided for the telephone The following additional guidance is offered E Ports that connect directly into the PSTN must conform to FCC Part 68 standards for analog PSTN telephone lines m For digital wireline telephone systems e g multi line business telephones operating through a PBX provide either an analog drop line a SmartAdapter or data port that supports connection of an analog TTY Note that both the capabilities of the system and the capabilities of handset units should be assessed when determining where to provide the analog connection There may be cases in which the connection is best made at the PBX level by installing analog drop telephone lines where necessary similar to what would be provided for a fax machine In other cases a Smart Adapter or DataPort may be necessary similar to those used on many hotel telephones Note that some adapters and converters have circuitry that determines the nature of the line and plug in equipment and makes the adjustment automatically whereas others are manual E For analog wireline telephone systems only prov
301. mplementation Ensure that Section 508 considerations are enforced in a procurement processes Develop solicitations RFPs and statements of work Assist in evaluation of supplier responses including development of evaluation criteria Ensure that applicable Section 508 technical requirements are included in design specifications Design and create Section 508 compliant development code and materials Plan and conduct solution and customer acceptance tests using applicable Section 508 testing methods see Chapters 5 11 Ensure that Section 508 testing methods are included in customer acceptance tests Certify and document level of Section 508 compliance after customer acceptance test in a Postal Service standard operational environment Create Section 508 Exception Documents where necessary prior to deployment see appendix 4 A Update certification and system documentation Update appropriate databases EIR for Postal Service built solutions Evaluate and update Section 508 exception documents when solutions are modified see appendix 4 A People or Organizations Responsible Functional Organization Client own IT Portfolio Manager support Business Solution Services IBSSCs support Development Teams and Vendors support Contracting Officers own Functional Organization Client support IT Portfolio Manager support Project Managers support IT Po
302. mponents of a product that are operated by physical contact Typically the control panel or user interface and their major components buttons keys and knobs are the primary items of concern However mechanically operated controls such as latches are also covered as long as they require contact for normal operation Examples of normal operation would include selecting features and pressing keys Operable controls required for maintenance service repair installation and configuration or occasional monitoring are not covered by this provision e g an RJ 11 plug that may be connected into a jack only one time Some of the reasons behind the four provisions in this requirement are given below m Requirement 1 requires that individual keys be locatable and distinguishable from the product surface and adjacent keys by touch This provision only applies to products that have mechanically operated controls or keys such as standard telephone keypads and computer keyboards It is not intended to apply to touchscreens Touchscreens and other contact sensitive controls are not specifically prohibited by any of the telecommunications product provisions However since all devices need to meet the Functional Performance Criteria see section 4 2 1 products that incorporate touchscreens or contact sensitive controls can meet these criteria only if an alternative way of operating them using tactilely discernable controls is provided At this
303. n script or off screen audio describer Ensure that an appropriate 221 8 5 4 222 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide real time alternate format or access method is available to all participants see section 8 1 6 i If the production is a multimedia production and the delivery method is unknown or not known to support closed audio description make sure that visual portions of the production required to understand the content are permanently encoded in a primary audio track or in equivalent text elements used in the production If the production is a multimedia production and the delivery method is known to support audio descriptions make sure that the visual portions of the production required to understand the content are encoded in a secondary audio track or equivalent alternate text that can be enabled viewed and disabled by the user 854 References The following references provide additional guidance on the techniques described above but must not be used in place of the general and specific Postal Service requirements in this chapter If any of these references conflict with Postal Service requirements defer to the Postal Service requirements E Access Board 508 Universe My training courses Accessible Conferences http www section508 gov training index cfm FuseAction CourseMenu amp CourselD 2 Note Site registration is required to access this link E Access Board Checklist for Audio Describing Video and
304. n h section 7 9 That provision was written at a time when wireless cellular telephones were analog and most of those telephones did not cause interference 185 7 10 2 186 7 10 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide However in keeping with the new challenges posed by digital technologies the FCC recently redefined HAC for digital wireless cellular telephones to mean a combination of magnetic coupling and minimized interference In August 2003 the Federal Communications Commission FCC issued a ruling directing wireless cellular telephone manufacturers and wireless cellular service providers to take steps to reduce the amount of interference caused by wireless cellular telephone handsets The FCC s http ftp fcc gov cgb consumerfacts accessiblewireless html is intended to ensure that redesigned compatible cellular telephone handsets will be widely available and hearing aid immunity will continue to improve Specifically it requires a percentage of wireless cellular digital telephones with reduced interference within 3 years The hearing technology industry and cellular telephone industry recently completed a standard ANSI C63 19 2001 which provides specific tests and target parameters for hearing aids and wireless cellular telephones that should be used to determine compliance with this requirement This requirement applies to all products that provide a voice telecommunications function Techniques All products
305. n software applications use nonstandard protocols for writing text on the screen or use graphics assistive technology may not be able to interpret the information This guideline does not prohibit or limit an application programmer from developing unique display techniques It requires that when a unique method i e a nonstandard protocol or nonstandard text control is used the text should also be written to the screen through standard operating system functions for displaying text Techniques Use Standard OS Functions to Provide Textual Information Use standard operating system and application API calls to provide text to any user interface or programmatic elements Standard operating system API calls eliminate the need for additional development or programming to expose text information name identity role and state to the operating system for use by assistive technology Textual information refers to both the text provided to or manipulated by the user e g text input boxes text displays tool tips captions window titles dialog text content copied text or about this software text information and to textual information provided programmatically through the operating system for use by assistive technology When no other option is available refer to the techniques stated in User Interface and Programmatic Elements regarding nonstandard controls For nonstandard text display make text attributes i e character set font
306. n the EIT Life Cycle Exhibit 5 2 2 1 Example of Keyboard Access to a Menu ssssssss es Exhibit 5 2 2 2 Example of Keyboard Access to Toolbars 0 ccc eet ee Exhibit 5 2 2 3 Example of Keyboard Access to Window Elements 0 0 c cence eee een eee eee enna Exhibit 5 2 2 4 Example of Keyboard Access to Controls es Exhibit 5 2 2 5 Examples of Keyboard Access to Commonly Used Functions p 1 0 cc cece eee ees Exhibit 5 2 2 5 Examples of Keyboard Access to Commonly Used Functions p 2 0 0 cece ee eee Exhibit 5 2 2 6 Example of Latched and Locked Keyboard Access 00 ccc cece cece en Exhibit 5 3 2 3 Example of Audio Accessibility Features 0 0c cette Exhibit 5 4 2 1 Example of Using Standard Controls to Expose Focus Information 00 cece eee eee Exhibit 5 4 2 2 Examples of Exposing Information for Associated Controls 0 0 ccc eee eens Exhibit 5 5 2 1 Use Standard UI Controls Example 00 000 cece eee Rene Exhibit 5 5 2 2 Example of Using Reliable Accessibility Frameworks for Nonstandard UI Controls Exhibit 5 5 2 3 Example of Key UI Object Accessibility 0 0 0 0 0 nr Exhibit 5 5 2 4 Example of How to Make Changed Images Accessible 0 0 00 ccc cette eens Exhibit 5 5 2 5 Example of Timeout Security Dialogs for an Operating System 0 ccc eee September 2004 xix Section 5
307. nate access method If there are special needs that are required by the particular Postal Service implementation alternate formats can be specified as an additional deliverable at time of purchase 11 3 2 2 For Developed Products Provide Description of Accessibility Features in Alternate Formats For developed products ensure that all product documentation includes a description of the product s built in accessibility features in an appropriate alternate format or alternate access method Adhere to the requirements for Web based information in chapter 6 for documentation provided via the Internet or Web 282 Handbook AS 508 A Information Documentation and Support 11 4 1 1133 Testing a Inspect the product or evaluate the supplier s VPAT or similar statement that describes whether the product in question s documentation includes a description of the product s built in accessibility features Review the description of the product s built in accessibility features and test those features using the documentation and the functional performance criteria found in section 4 2 1 to ensure that the documentation can be accessed by people with limited vision hearing speech or mobility If an exception was taken for a product whose documentation does not provide built in accessibility features or a description of those accessibility features define and clearly communicate the appropriate alternate formats or access methods that
308. nd SCROLL LOC as each checkbox item and push button contains underlined Use ToggleKeys characters that indicate a keyboard shortcut e g pushing the S key will select the Settings for StickyKeys Show extra keyboard help in programs Canc 5 225 Provide Keyboard Access to Commonly Used Functions Provide standard keyboard access keys or key combinations for functions that are most commonly used and that are normally provided through mouse operations This includes commonly used commands such as text or object selection clipboard commands e g cut copy and paste or graphic resizing September 2004 45 5 2 2 5 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 5 2 2 5 Examples of Keyboard Access to Commonly Used Functions p 1 Figures A through E show examples of keyboard access to functions L that are commonly used and that are normally provided though mouse operations Size Figure A shows a standard Microsoft Windows global window menu Minimize that contains commands for manipulating an active window This menu Maximize can be accessed by pressing ALT and SPACEBAR at the same time X Close Alt F4 The ARROW keys can be used to move the focus between menu items Here the Move menu item is selected as indicated by the blue filled box surrounding it If the user presses the ENTER key while over this item they will be able to move the active window using their ARROW key
309. nd live performances accessible to people who are blind visually impaired or cognitively impaired Multimedia productions refers to productions that present information in more than one sensory mode i e both audibly and visually regardless of delivery method For instance streaming video presented via the Web with a soundtrack and a Macromedia Flash demo of a Postal Service Web application that uses both visual animation and audio narration are both considered multimedia productions There are two kinds of audio description that are used to provide access to visual portions of video and multimedia productions that are critical for their comprehension open audio description and closed audio description see the Glossary for definitions of these terms The advantages of audio descriptions cited most by blind and visually impaired viewers include the following a Gaining knowledge about the visual world and a better understanding of televised materials a Feeling independent and reducing the burden on sighted viewers with whom they watch E Experiencing social connection enjoyment and equality with those without visual impairments Handbook AS 508 A Video and Multimedia Products 8 5 2 2 September 2004 852 Techniques 8 5 2 1 8 5 2 2 When Display Mechanisms Do Not Support SAP Playback Include Open Audio Description on Taped Videos Where possible and practical include open audio descriptions on video productions
310. nd multimedia products The technical standards of Section 508 were written primarily from a technology perspective The Postal Service has detailed these technical standards to aid Postal Service employees suppliers contractors and business partners with understanding Postal compliance requirements from the perspective of designing for accessibility Each specific requirement includes a Rationale Techniques Testing Methods and References as shown below in Overview Analog and Digital Video Caption Receivers Decoders and Displays Provision 1194 24a m Rationale E Techniques and Exhibits E Testing m References Television Tuners and Secondary Audio Playback Circuitry Provision 1194 24b Open or Closed Captioning of Video and Multimedia Productions Provision 1194 24c Handbook AS 508 A Video and Multimedia Products 8 1 4 September 2004 8 1 4 Audio Description of Video and Multimedia Productions Provision 81194 24d User Selectable Captions or Audio Descriptions Provision 81194 246 Appendix 8 A Postal Service Video and Multimedia Accessibility Checklist Appendix 8 B Summary of Video and Multimedia Delivery Methods and Requirements Introduction to Video and Multimedia Accessibility While looking at video and multimedia barriers it is helpful to understand the challenges that people with various disabilities face in accessing and viewing videos and other multimedia The need for a solution to thes
311. nd nonstandard controls allow operating system accessibility features and assistive technology to access and track system focus For nonstandard controls expose focus information to the operating and assistive technology and provide standard cursor representations Programmatically control the cursor representation with appropriate API calls i e calls that set the cursor representation size or shape change the position of the cursor representation make the cursor representation visible or specify a new cursor representation For more techniques and information see Section 5 4 On Screen Focus September 2004 85 5 12 2 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 5 12 2 3 Example of Exposing On Screen Input Focus Which style would you like Which style would yau like Professional C Contemporary C Elegant Professional C Contemporary C Elegant Heading Fields Recipient Closing Fields Header Footer Finish BI Cancel Back Next gt Finish E Cancel Back Net Figure A A wizard style form with focus on a radio Figure B The same wizard style form with button input focus on a push button An example of exposing focus information for input controls located in a word processing software application These figures show a standard wizard style form that uses standard form elements or controls i e radio buttons and push buttons and exposes the focus information for these sta
312. ndard controls The on screen focus can be moved with the TAB key in a logical order as described in In Figure A the focus is on the first input option a radio button labeled Professional In Figure B the focus has been moved with the TAB key to the default push button labeled Next gt 5 12 2 4 Associating Labels with Controls Provide explicit labels for all form controls and associate those labels and other field descriptors with their related controls Position labels in a logical location relative to their associated data entry input fields i e immediately to the left or above the associated input field Note that some assistive technology e g screen readers use proximity to identify labels if they are not exposed programmatically Exhibit 5 12 2 4 Example of Associating Labels With Controls An example of associating labels with form inputs used to change a user password in a Postal Service supply management application To change your password you must complete all of the fields below and click on Save Password In this figure there are three text inputs and two s n push buttons The explicit or user visible labels Jew Password TE T E for the text inputs are positioned properly immediately to the left of their associated input Save Password Clase Preferences fields These labels can be read properly by a screen reader or other assistive technology
313. ng Frame Rate of Animation ssssseeeee eens 130 Exhibit 6 10 2 1 Example of a Microsoft Word Table sssseseeeeseeeee e 131 Exhibit 6 10 2 2a Example of the Proper Use of a Descriptive Link llelelee 132 Exhibit 6 10 2 2b Example of Link Images ias 9x Ee tE ELA RR ERDO honed dae d SR E EGO E Eee Rea ORE EX GONE eens 132 Exhibit 6 12 2 zio Tm PD r nr 136 Exhibit 6 13 2a Example of a Text Box and Buttons 0 ccc eee ene hh hh 138 Exhibit 6 13 2b Example ora Text Area BOX tase ta rh cnenw ae xw ge S a pate Ea RoHS D A cda gig earn adus RR h i9 paces ahem 139 Exhibit 6 13 2c Example ofa Select BOX WP MC EEE TRIM 139 Exhibit 6 13 2d Example of a Check BOX zu cendumcad dqeeusmceiasemsrsbsz exe Seessadetewd quud d CERE dba ceeds 140 Exhibit 6 13 2e Example or Radio Buttons a a 2n 9o ERRORES CR ERNE Sm Dre ad IR dor dp ia due auR abb S a Jp o 140 Exhibit 6 15 2 1 Web Session Timeout Warning Dialog sesseeeeeee eet n tenet e eens 145 September 2004 xxi Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank xxii Handbook AS 508 A 1 Introduction 1 1 Policy The United States Postal Service complies with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act This compliance ensures that development procurement maintenance or use of electronic and information technology EIT enables our customers and employee
314. ng systems and software applications must not use color as the only means of conveying information indicating an action prompting a response or distinguishing a visual element Section 508 Provision 81194 211 Rationale People who cannot differentiate between certain color combinations are otherwise visually impaired or who are blind may have difficulty using software applications or interpreting content that depends on the ability to identify color In addition when foreground and background colors are too close to the same hue such people may not be able to distinguish between them Operating systems and software applications should not use color as the only method for conveying information indicating an action prompting a response or distinguishing a visual event Using color to enhance the identification of important features of the interface is acceptable as long as other methods of identification are also used e g alternative or descriptive text or image based enhancement Techniques Always Combine Color With an Alternate Format Operating systems or software applications must not use color alone to convey information indicate an action prompt a response or distinguish an important visual event For example do not instruct a user to select an item from those listed in green Instead relay that information without referring to color If color is used provide an accessible alternate format or method such as a tex
315. nicate entirely by TTY On the other hand because some TTY users make use of speech for outgoing communications the microphone enablement feature must be automatic or easy to switch back and forth or a push to talk mode should be Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 2 2 4 September 2004 1 2 2 4 provided Therefore telephone systems must support the ability for voice and TTY tones to alternate not to be sent at the same time Note Some TTY users have reported instances in which they connected a TTY to a cellular telephone which resulted in a deactivation of the telephone s microphone In those cases there was no way to talk into the telephone no way to turn the microphone on This is frustrating to people with a hearing disability and intelligible speech who prefer to talk instead of type People who are deaf and use the TTY for both typing and reading would have less of a problem with a connection that disables the microphone However even they would be concerned if the telephone was disabled to a point where it was unable to transmit tones for responding to IVR systems TTY signals are not the same as touch tone sounds and some TTYs may not readily make the necessary tones On the other extreme some TTY phone setups keep a microphone on throughout the entire conversation never toggling it off This can cause a problem if the microphone picks up extraneous noise during the data reception mode resulting in errors
316. nization stewardships that correspond to the non technical specifications of the law and standards for the following areas 1 Purchasing 2 Consumer complaints 3 Employee complaints 4 Legal guidance Prepares and provides the Postal Service s input to the U S Department of Justice for inclusion in the Attorney General s biennial government wide accessibility report to the President Prepares other reports as required by the Department of Justice Identifies an agency Section 508 coordinator and backup coordinator and provides this information to the Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board hereafter Access Board and General services Administration GSA Section 508 Interagency Program Serves as the Postal Service liaison to the Access Board and GSA Interagency Program Directs the Section 508 Program Team by doing the following 1 Managing the day to day program activities 2 Addressing the varying demands of the program 3 Establishing program objectives 4 Facilitating coordination of stewardships across the Postal Service in the following areas a Standards definitions and integration b Evaluation processes c Training for all audiences 5 Providing a framework for communication vehicles handbook brochures videos 6 Creating and conducting education and awareness throughout the agency 7 Reporting program status to senior management Coordinates an
317. nly 6 74 References The following references are provided for more information on this topic but must not be used in place of the Postal Service guidelines given above If these references conflict with the above techniques you must defer to the Postal Service guidelines a Identify row and column headers htto www w3 org T R WCAG10 HTML TECHS A tables a Postal Service accessible tables FAQs htto cto usps gov pls itorodnp page psite id 10 amp pnode id 305 126 Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 8 2 2 6 8 Frames Exhibit 6 8 2 2 Framesets must be constructed so that the user does not have to depend on visual cues to navigate the site Frames must be titled with text that facilitates frame identification and navigation Section 508 Provision 1194 22i 6 8 1 Rationale Frames must be titled so that screen reader software can identify the frame content to the visually impaired Untitled frames make it difficult for the visually impaired to navigate the Web content Descriptive titles allow assistive technology such as screen reader software to identify the frame content to end users 6 8 2 Techniques 6 8 2 1 Avoid Using Frames Organize the presentation of your Web pages so that the use of frames is minimal or not required Consider that users may not be able to link or create bookmarks to frame content A bookmark or forwarded link would show the initial framese
318. nnan nanna 187 7 11 Transmission Conducting Information nannaa aaaeeeaa aeaea 188 7 11 1 pius oHm 188 7 11 2 Techniques seeeeeeeeeeeeer hh hh heh hh rr 189 Giles NOSUNG seeds ates aeduntatedb quede etes Reduced heure ipud dere ap 190 7 114 Referents a acc ged cn tien pee sn neie peed 0T TTL 190 September 2004 xi Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 12 GONMOls and Keys x casi uivirva sit Coupee ee E Md ced xd ue eee D eU a EPOR ROPA 191 7 12 1 scu o padac ood en bade e den be den eed ee Sede bee ee Gade bee ee eden bee en Hs 192 7 12 2 Techniques 0 een eee nent e nett n eee n eens 193 12 2 1 Ensure That Users Can Locate Keys By Touch Without Activating Them 193 7 12 2 2 Ensure That All Controls and Keys Are Easy to Use sss 7 12 2 3 Key Repeat Must Be Adjustable 00 0 c cece ne 7 12 2 4 Status of Locking Toggle Controls or Keys Must Be Discernible 195 rs TENG Pm 195 7 12 4 References 466505henc5 FEES RPHePREE PIS RE RC RPRE AP EGRE RE EEE RE E RETE 196 Appendix 7 A Telecommunications Products Accessibility Checklist luu 199 8 Video and Multimedia Products sssseseseeeeeee een 8 1 OvervieW E R EEMEES 201 8 1 1 CORICHIS cus ae ERN ICTU MURPIMNEPEAMEPEEAUENS DAMES EAS ES HAE ES HANS esas 201 8 1 2 elis M CRTCTTT m 201 8 1 2 1 Bene rM 201 8 1 2 2 neige q P
319. nology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable m Mouse over the active regions of the client side image map to ensure that an equivalent text description appears for each hot spot m Verify that all redundant text links in a server side image map work properly References The following reference is provided for more information on this topic but must not be used in place of the Postal Service guidelines given above If these references conflict with the above techniques you must defer to the Postal Service guidelines E Redundant text links htto www w3 org T R WCAG10 TECHS tech redundant server links Tables must be constructed so that they can be easily interpreted by all users and communicate the intent of the author Section 508 Provision 1194 22g h Rationale Screen readers have difficulty interpreting data if the tables are not designed properly A sighted person can scan down a column and across a row of a data table For a visually impaired person listening to this same information with a screen reader can be a daunting task When tables are created using software for generating HTML pages e g HTML editors or office suites the underlying source code may not be accessible using screen reader software The techniques outlined in section 6 7 2 must be applied rega
320. ns 4 1 Background for Purchasing Compliant EIT September 2004 This section provides policy and guidance for the creation and approval of purchasing requests for Section 508 compliant EIT It also includes policy and procedures to follow when a solution does not meet the technical standards and functional performance criteria for accessibility cited by Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act requires that EIT purchased by the Postal Service on and after June 21 2001 complies with the Section 508 Electronic and Information Technology Accessibility Standards or updates The standards were published in the Federal Register by the Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board Access Board in December 2000 Note For purposes of this chapter the term EIT is equivalent to the Postal Service s use of the term information technology IT as defined in the Purchasing Manual The law also governs the purchase of electronic products that are not generally purchased by an Information Technology department These products are primarily closed self contained products such as printers copiers and FAX machines 21 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 4 2 Processes to Comply With Section 508 22 4 2 1 4 2 3 Specific Standards and Functional Performance Criteria The intent of Section 508 is to insure that the core technology infrastructure of all government agencies enables peop
321. ns and Operating oystems e g keyboard access textual information or on screen focus Offer Features for User Selection of Closed Audio Descriptions When audio description is provided video or multimedia productions or the information technology of which they are a component must offer a feature where possible that allows user to turn them on and off independently The method used for selecting closed audio descriptions varies greatly depending on the type of video and multimedia format and display used For example an on screen menu that offers a feature to enable or disable audio description must be made audible or otherwise readily selectable so that people with visual disabilities can independently gain access to audio descriptions The menu should also be intuitive and easy to use so that the procedure will be convenient and possible to follow In addition controls provided to enable or disable audio descriptions must comply with other specific requirements found in other chapters of this handbook Testing For each multimedia or video production that is developed or purchased determine the delivery method for the production then use the following general method to test compliance with the specific requirements in this section If the production is a closed captioned video or multimedia production that can be viewed by an individual user regardless of the display mechanism e g Postal Service television IP based televi
322. nspector in Charge New York W Kezer 4 1 Inspector in Charge Philadelphia Carle 4 1 Inspector in Charge Washington T Brady 4 1 Inspector in Charge Pittsburgh R Dalgleish Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 2 2 1 Exhibit 6 2 2 1 p 2 Example of Alternate Text for an Organization Chart 4 Deputy Chief Inspector Field Operations South A Crawford 4 1 Inspector in Charge Miami J Belz 4 1 Inspector in Charge Houston R Dodd 4 1 Inspector in Charge Denver M Cobos 4 1 Inspector in Charge Atlanta D Collins 4 1 Inspector in Charge Ft Worth O Villanueva 4 Deputy Chief Inspector Field Operations West M Ahern 4 1 Inspector in Charge Detroit Y Allen 4 1 Inspector in Charge St Louis Vacant 4 1 Inspector in Charge San Francisco W Atkins 4 1 Inspector in Charge Chicago A Davidson 4 1 Inspector in Charge Seattle W Morris 4 1 Inspector in Charge Los Angeles J Somerset 5 Inspector in Charge Congressional and Public Affairs D Mihalko 5 Inspector in Charge Forensic and Technical Services R Geffen 5 1 Laboratory Director R Muehlberger 5 Assistant Chief Inspector Investigations and Security A Clemmons 5 1 Inspector in Charge Group 1 Safety and Security K Bond 5 1 Inspector in Charge Group 2 Internal and External Investigations K Roberts 5 1 Inspector in Charge Group 3 Fraud and Dangerous Ma
323. ntent must be open or closed captioned Section 508 Provision 81194 24c Rationale Whereas section 8 2 addresses the reception decoding and display elements necessary to display captions this requirement addresses the techniques used to author or encode the caption content in video or multimedia productions widely distributed via Postal Service television Web sites training software and other information systems The Postal Service must provide captioning for any video or multimedia production that is distributed externally or that are considered critical to the Postal Service s mission Such productions include but are not limited to those used in training product or service demos health or safety videos or advertising produced for distribution on television or on the Internet In applicable productions the audio portions necessary for the comprehension 213 8 4 2 214 8 4 2 8 4 2 1 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide of the production s content must be captioned so that people who are deaf or hearing impaired can access them Captioning is the standard method of making narrative content in television videos multimedia productions and live performances accessible to people who are deaf and hearing impaired Multimedia productions refers to productions that present information in more than one sensory mode i e both audibly and visually regardless of delivery method For instance streaming video pres
324. nts related to electronic and information technology The Information Technology Organization conducts limited oversight monitoring of corporate wide Section 508 compliance with a focus on capturing information for reporting purposes Functional Organizations For all phases of the EIT life cycle compliance monitoring resides with the responsible functional organization The functional organizations have this responsibility for both purchased and Postal developed EIT Postal Service Employees This handbook applies to Postal Service functional organizations and personnel who do the following a Have job responsibilities that relate to any aspect of Postal Service electronic and information technology systems b Determine or maintain policies related to Section 5068 i e internal or external complaints and their processing G Promote Postal Service information technology based products and services Suppliers This handbook also applies to suppliers contractors and business partners throughout the IT life cycle including the design supply and development phases of Postal Service electronic and information technology Handbook AS 508 A Introduction 1 4 3 1 5 3 Enterprise Architecture and Information Infrastructure This handbook applies to the entire Postal Service enterprise architecture which provides the framework for our business solutions and supports our information technology infrastructure The Info
325. o activate controls and keys must be 5 Ibs 22 2 N maximum If key repeat is supported the delay before repeat must be adjustable to at least 2 seconds Key repeat rate must be adjustable to 2 seconds per character The status of all locking or toggle controls or keys must be visually discernible and discernible either through touch or sound Biometric User Identification and Controls When biometric forms of user identification or control are used an alternative form of identification or activation which does not require the user to possess particular biological characteristics must also be provided 1194 26 Provision c Industry Standard Expansion Slots Ports and Connectors Where provided at least one of each type of expansion slots ports and connectors must comply with publicly available industry standards 1194 26 Provision d September 2004 275 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank 276 Handbook AS 508 A 11 Information Documentation and Support 11 1 Overview September 2004 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 1 2 1 Contents This chapter contains the specific electronic and information technology EIT performance requirements related to the following subpart of Section 508 EIT Technical Standard 1194 41 11 Information Documentation and Support provisions a thru c Summary Technology The phrase information documentation and support is used t
326. o another page in this application Figure A The alert that warns users of an impending timeout in the Click N Ship application September 2004 6 16 2 2 Hepeat the process until the user indicates that additional time is not required If the user does not respond or indicates that no more time is needed the timeout can take place Fixed Time Limit When Applications Do Not Allow More Time If the business or security requirement is that a timed feature in a Web application is only for a fixed session or time limit combined activity or inactivity then the user must be notified at the start of the session that the session will timeout after a fixed amount of time Before the fixed time limit an alert must communicate the impending timeout to the user Then the user can be timed out at the appointed time In such cases a longer fixed session for persons with disabilities is not necessary 145 6 16 2 3 146 6 16 2 3 6 16 2 4 6 16 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide The specific time that is appropriate from when the timeout message is given to the point when the timeout takes place varies by the complexity of the application Notifying Users That A Change Has Occurred Once a timeout has been reached Web content must not be automatically updated or refreshed unless the update is based on a user selection or the user is notified a refresh is going to occur An example of a user selection would be
327. o define the support material required to understand and use EIT It includes interactions that support people with limited vision mobility speech or hearing The requirements in this chapter cover the following All information about EIT products and their support services regardless of technology type Persons with disabilities need this information to support their effective use of the EIT products covered by Section 508 Any documentation provided by the Postal Service or its EIT suppliers to its technology users must be available upon request in appropriate alternate formats Agencies are required to supply end users with information about accessibility or compatibility features that are built into a product upon request This information is vital in knowing how to use certain products such as self contained closed products It is also essential for the installation of assistive technology in IT devices that are open to software which provides functions as speech output speech recognition screen enlargement or keyboard alternatives Help desks and other technology support services serving the Postal Service s employees and customers must be able to accommodate the communications needs of persons with disabilities For example an agency help desk may need to communicate through a TTY The help 277 11 1 2 2 278 11 1 2 2 11 1 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide desk or support service must also be familiar wit
328. o provide information to TTY users that is usually provided on some landline digital telephone systems The second problem is an issue when TTY users do not use landline digital telephone systems due to the potential for the system to corrupt TTY signals The kind of information pertinent to this provision is information about telephone functions Many current office and wireless telephones have displays that provide information such as Caller ID or an indication of new voice mail messages to the user Caller ID functions display both the name 173 7 6 2 174 7 6 2 7 6 2 1 7 6 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide and number of a caller Someone with a visual disability might not be able to see this information and therefore would not experience comparable access to the telephone system unless that information was provided in another format TTY users may have special problems obtaining this telephone function information which is commonly transmitted and displayed via digital channels on landline telephone systems TTY users have often been limited to the use of analog lines which provide a connection point support ring signaling assistive technology and avoid garbling of TTY through the digital telecommunications system see sections 7 3 and 7 11 However this approach does not provide some additional information provided through a digital telephone system Therefore this problem of TTY user telephone function
329. o value envelopes tabindex 2 gt for envelopes gt Envelopes lt label gt lt BR gt id fdc type radio name radio value fdc tabindex 3 gt for fdc First Day Covers lt label gt 140 Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 14 1 6 13 3 6 13 4 Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable a Test all forms for accessibility using JAWS The form must be tested in both the forms mode and the Virtual PC cursor mode The forms mode ensures that fields can be edited The Virtual PC cursor mode ensures that responses can be read back or changed by the user b Verify that LABEL tags text descriptions tabbing order and the like read correctly c Verify that the user can ask for additional time to complete a form when timed responses are required References The following reference is provided for more information on this topic but must not be used in place of the Postal Service guidelines given above If these references conflict with the above techniques you must defer to the Postal Service guidelines E USPS accessible forms FAQs htto blue usps gov 508web FormsHelp html 6 14 Po
330. obal Guaranteed Rate Rate Group 5 Group 8 EL 20 00 52400 28 00 40 00 60 00 1 o 00 4 00 5100 7200 3100 3400 41 00 65 00 87 00 3 200 300 60 00 80 00 102 00 Figure B HTML code for Figure A Weight not over Ibs lt table width 66 border 1 summary This table summarizes the rates for Priority Mail Global Guaranteed postage rates gt caption Rate Table for Priority Mail Global Guaranteed lt caption gt lt tr gt lt th id headerl gt Weight not over lbs lt th gt th id header2 Rate Groups 1 and 2 th th id header3 Rate Groups 3 and 7 th th id header4 Rate Groups 4 and 6 lt th gt th id header5 Rate Group 5 lt th gt th id header6 Rate Group 8 th lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td id rowl gt lt center gt 0 5 lt center gt lt td gt lt td header rowl header2 gt lt center gt 20 00 center td lt td header rowl header3 center 24 00 center td lt td header rowl header4 gt lt center gt 29 00 center td lt td header rowl header5 gt lt center gt 40 00 center td lt td header rowl header6 center 60 00 center td lt tr gt lt tr gt td id row2 center l center td td header row2 header2 center 31 00 center td td header row2 header3 center 34 00
331. oftware application to query this setting by calling GetCaretBlinkTime Aligning any blinking software user Cancel interface elements with this setting will help ensure acceptable flash rates for individual users 5 313 Testing Manual inspection based testing using the methods described in this chapter must accompany any automated tests Some of these manual tests may be automated using testing tools or Integrated Development Environment IDE features as long as testing occurs in the context of usage by assistive technology users Conduct a manual inspection of the software without assistive technology to test for acceptable frequency and a disable function for all flashing or blinking elements a Navigate the software application through usage scenarios that cover all core functionality September 2004 81 5 11 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide b Search for flashing or blinking text objects or other user interface elements Also search for elements that employ a quick change from dark to light similar to strobe lights C Use an electronic tester i e screen calibrator or a software test feature to determine the time interval between flashes for all blinking or flashing user interface elements d If any flashing or blinking objects cannot be tested they will need to be omitted from the software application altogether e Adjust or fix any flashing or blinking elements that have an unacce
332. ols often already support product accessibility features Using them may eliminate the need for additional configuration or programming to provide explicit accessibility support unless the behavior of the standard control has been enhanced E Buy or build products that support a variety of input methods and output methods 155 7 1 6 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide E Buy or build products that can query or detect the assistive technology in use and configure the telecommunications product automatically For example IVR systems might detect the presence of TTY signals and automatically route calls to the appropriate system or subsystem E The Postal Service will maintain standards for the following categories of assistive technologies that people with disabilities use to access telecommunications products E Teletypewriter TTY devices or emulating software modes Help people with hearing disabilities by allowing them to transmit text based conversations by telephone in real time m Teleconference systems supported by assistive listening systems Help people with hearing disabilities participate in meetings and other public settings by transmitting sounds using infrared or FM radio frequencies directly to a personal receiver i e headphones using a direct feed Finally Postal Service employees are required to register certain software applications and operating systems in the Enterprise Information Repository EIR at http
333. ommunications Products 7 4 2 2 following methods are recommended see also requirements in Section 7 5 Time Interval Alerts for IVR Systems i Establish a separate number for TTY users with the TTY compatible voice mail auto attendant and interactive voice response system at that number If a separate number for TTY users is used it must be equally publicized i For systems that support multiple language messaging use software that recognizes the TTY tones and then treats them as a language variant In this approach messages are delivered to TTY users much as some users might choose a language and receive messages in their preferred language One challenge with this approach is that many TTY callers do not make TTY tones until they see the call is answered with a Hello GA TTY message Therefore they may not readily get connected to the TTY channel in a voice mail auto attendant and interactive voice response system There are methods as described below for eliciting a response from the caller in TTY that could then be used to do the automatic switchover Provide a parallel system for TTY calls accessed from the initial message in the message tree In this approach a TTY call is identified using the same greeting heard by non TTY callers This may be done by using integrated messages that contain both Baudot TTY text and voice content in such a way that both voice and TTY users can be served from a single voice file In this
334. on The provision specifically states that keys and controls must not require twisting However this does not mean that rotary knobs cannot be used If the knobs can be operated within the 22 2 N force limit and without requiring the user to twist pinch or tightly grasp then they would conform Many knobs that have a reasonable surface coefficient of friction and which turn without great effort would meet the requirements of this provision It is important to keep in mind that sufficient room should be provided around the knobs if they are to be operated in this fashion e g with the side of the hand Key Repeat Must Be Adjustable If key repeat is supported the delay before repeat must be adjustable to a rate of at least 2 seconds per character When key repeat is supported adhere to the following recommendations that support this requirement E Provide an option to disable the key repeat function a Provide an option to set a key acceptance rate how long the key must be depressed before being recognized g If the intention of repeating a key is to reach a target goal provide an alternate way for the user to enter that target For example if a person were to increase volume from 1 to 20 by depressing a key 20 times it would be easier to simply or alternatively press the numbers 2 and O to enter 20 Status of Locking Toggle Controls or Keys Must Be Discernible Make sure that the status of all locking or toggle controls or
335. on some TTY models do not have acoustic couplers Another important reason for requiring a direct connection is improved signal quality Acoustic coupling is subject to audio interference from noise in the environment Also increasingly handsets are diverse in design and many do not fit well into standard acoustic couplers If an acoustic modem picks up ambient noise while receiving data it could display unintended characters making the conversation difficult to understand Therefore a direct connection enables TTYs to obtain a clearer signal The requirement enabling the intermix of voice and TTY tones is important because it allows some people depending on their abilities to use TTYs more efficiently Originally TTY users would use TTYs for both typing and reading Those that could speak however quickly determined that if the other person could hear they could pick up the receiver when it was their turn to talk and just speak to the other person who would then type back on their turn This was much faster and preferred by both sides of the conversation TTYs can be used in two distinct ways by people with disabilities using Voice Carry Over VCO and or Hearing Carry Over HCO VCO is for people who have difficulty hearing clearly through the telephone and prefer to speak for themselves in a telephone conversation Using a VCO telephone TTY the VCO user speaks directly to the other person Everything 157 7 2 1 158
336. on 5 8 User Selected Display Attributes Color and Contrast This accessibility requirement applies to all aspects of software application use including installation operation and removal Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 3 2 3 5 3 2 Techniques 5 3 2 1 Provide Operating System Accessibility Features Where possible operating systems should provide accessibility features and application programming interfaces APIs for those features that make the operation and state of software application components and information accessible via various input and output devices e g keyboard mouse audio or video The accessibility features and APIs should be documented by the manufacturer of the operating system so that software product developers can use them 5 3 2 2 Support Accessibility Features Through Use of Standard Controls Frameworks and APIs Where possible use integrated standard operating system controls frameworks and APIs to provide object information because they are integrated with operating system accessibility features A control is defined as any user interface element or object that accepts input i e menus list boxes and buttons Use of integrated standard controls frameworks and APIs eliminates the need for additional programmatic work to expose an object s identity role and state When using nonstandard controls use reliable accessibility frameworks or component object mod
337. on of a control without additional user input such as a mouse click or keystroke This automatic focus change can be confusing to all users especially people with visual impairments When the focus is automatically changed it is critical that associated information about changed associated controls is exposed to assistive technology via the operating system this exposure will also allow the operating system to move and or change the cursor 55 0 4 2 2 Exhibit 5 4 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Examples of Exposing Information for Associated Controls Choose Drawing Type Template Category 3 Block Diagram Building Plan Flowchart 9 Forms and Charts Map 1 Network m Basic Diagram Template asic Disarm one ene sacri ee eee shapes and directional lines For Feedback loops and For Functional decomposition hierarchical data structure data Flow black and data block diagrams Figure A A Choose Drawing Type dialog window that exposes information about associated controls to assistive technology Originating Cluster Mew York Metro Mortheast Fl oy BB Area selected Originating Cluster Mea York Metra Mortheast Easter E gestern Figure C A set of grouped list boxes with the Western Area selected Northern New Jersey Eastern Central New Jersey i Westem 100 Hew York City dynamically updated and display
338. on off screen to describe the visuals quickly and discreetly Make sure you alert all of the meeting participants of this need to allow time for description so that they can adjust their presentation accordingly E During a webcast when a presenter is demonstrating features of new purchasing software the presenter should exactly describe the actions she is performing i e from the File menu select the Import option When the Import dialog box appears select the Browse button to select a file to import That way even those participants with visual impairments will still be able to follow the presentation For additional requirements related to live events see Section 8 1 6 Alternate Formats Alternate Access Methods and Reasonable Accommodation Where Possible Include Audio Descriptions in Mission Critical Multimedia Productions Where possible provide audio description for critical visual portions of mission critical Postal Service multimedia productions regardless of how delivered e g web delivered CD ROM DVD or software application Many multimedia productions used in product or service demos training or educational media and health and safety demos are considered mission critical When such productions contain visual elements that are critical for comprehension of the content an audio description or appropriate alternate format or alternate access method must be provided Handbook AS 50
339. onduct a manual inspection of the software application to verify compatibility with operating system OS accessibility features For each OS the software application runs on list the set of operating system accessibility features e g keyboard audio sound display mouse input or general Then do the following for each accessibility feature a b Turn on the operating system accessibility feature Exercise all software application functions to verify that information about associated controls identity role and state is accessible When the focus is on the object or control the assistive technology should be able to access and state the object name its role type its state and its current value Note any application function for which object or control name role state and value is not accessible or that disables disrupts or interferes with OS accessibility features Fix any functions that disable or interfere with OS accessibility features then repeat this test to verify that the functions do not disable or interfere with OS accessibility features Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 4 1 e If object or control information remains inaccessible to the operating system and assistive technology or if it continues to disable disrupt or interfere with activated accessibility features fix then retest using this procedure 5 33 References m Microsoft Active Accessibilit htto ms
340. one jack on the front of the ATM where the output can be heard The instructions for use of the machine are also available in the audio format Although headphones a form of assistive technology for a visually impaired person are not supplied by the bank the bank has a responsibility to provide an alternate format for the information In a desktop computer environment the potential information displays are limitless Therefore the provisions of the law do not require recorded speech for each screen element rather what is needed is a standard software applications and operating systems that allows assistive technology software to access the text or a text equivalent of each screen element and present synthetic speech as an audio format In both examples the goal is the same access to information by all However the techniques used are specific to the class of technology Handbook AS 508 A Section 508 Overview of Accessibility 3 3 2 3 3 Assistive Technologies September 2004 3 3 1 3 3 2 Description Assistive technology is used in the Postal Service desktop environment to help people with disabilities access computer systems and data or information Examples include the following a Ascreen reader that converts text to speech b Ascreen magnifier that enlarges the screen display C Speech to text software that converts speech to text or software commands d Keyboard alternatives such as split or natura
341. onse is required the user must be alerted and given sufficient time to indicate more time is required Where a product uses touch screens or contact sensitive controls an input method must be provided that complies with 1194 23 k 1 through 4 When biometric forms of user identification or control are used an alternative form of identification or activation which does not require the user to possess particular biological characteristics must also be provided When products provide auditory output the audio signal must be provided at a standard signal level through an industry standard connector that will allow for private listening The product must provide the ability to interrupt pause and restart the audio at any time September 2004 1 Is the product able to be used by someone with a vision hearing mobility including dexterity or speech disability without the use of AT 2 Do any of the product s functions include a time out If so does the product alert the user and provide enough time to request more time 3 Is the alert given in both visual and audio formats 4 Does the product require the user to touch the screen or another component that responds to touch 5 Is there a keypad If so ensure that it complies with the standards listed in the telecommunications section 6 Does the product require input using a specific biological feature e g retina voice fingerprint 7 Does th
342. onse is required the user must be alerted and given sufficient time to indicate more time is required 81194 25 Provision b Rationale When a system requires a user to respond within a specified time some people with mobility or dexterity limitations will be unable to complete input functions This provision addresses access problems that can arise when self contained closed products require a response from a user within a certain time For example persons with dexterity related disabilities might find entering information such as a Social Security number within a specified time to be difficult or impossible This provision requires that users must be notified when a process is about to time out and must be given an opportunity to answer a prompt asking whether additional time is needed oince some self contained closed products do not require a timed user response this provision does not apply to them However in some devices e g entry of receiving fax number into a fax machine the provision applies Handbook AS 508 A Self Contained Closed Products 9 3 3 September 2004 9 3 2 2 9 3 2 3 The provision has a pervasive application within Section 508 A corresponding provision exists in the Web standard where assistive technology can be installed Chapter 6 Web based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 1194 22 p and also in the telecommunications standard specifically IVR interactions Telecommun
343. onts or sizes Avoid use of fixed size windows and dialog boxes Provide options for either scaling the contents of windows or displaying more information in an alternate view Also use scroll bars for windows or individual controls when the content will no longer fit in the window Do not display images behind or over text as users in high contrast settings cannot view them Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 8 2 2 Exhibit 5 8 2 1 Example of OS Level and Application Display Settings i HBS08_v20_13Nov2003b_SWonly doc Microsoft Word An example of a word processing application that is designed to inherit the Microsoft Windows File Edit View Insert Format Tools Table Window Help Acrobat OSHHR 6RY t ev o o S6RORB 4 i ae epee e B z u Bese Operating System s display or appearance c settings The Windows display settings can be 481 Rationale accessed by either opening the Display Control Panel or by right clicking on the desktop and People who cannot differentiate between HE Quen may have difficulty navigating or interpret choosing Properties or Advanced Options content that is dependent upon the ability Figure A shows a word processing application that is inheriting a rich low contrast color scheme that has been set by the user in the Windows ij HB508 v20 13Nov2003b SWwonly doc Microsoft Word Oper ating System s display control panel E File Edi
344. ople with hearing loss are more sensitive to noise and less able to recognize words in the presence of noise than individuals with normal hearing Therefore increased volume assists these users in achieving a volume level and speech to noise ratio sufficient for their needs This provision applies to all telecommunications products that provide telephone functions i e that transmit and receive a two way voice signal and for which the frequency response of the receiver is conducive to voice communication Products that only provide one way communications such as speakers that give operating instructions to the user are not covered by this provision This provision is consistent with the 1998 ANSI A117 1 document Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities see references ANSI is the voluntary standard setting body that issues accessibility standards used by the nation s model building codes This provision is also consistent with the Telecommunications Act Accessibility Guidelines and proposed revisions to the ADA and Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Revised Guidelines 772 Techniques Telecommunications products that provide telephone functions i e 2 way voice communication must provide acoustic output i e volume control that is user controllable and which provides amplification adjustable to a gain of at least 20 dB above the default volume 176 Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 7 4 Septembe
345. ops allowing T coil users in the audience to receive the performance or presentation through a magnetic signal Portable assistive listening systems have also been developed that transmit discussions and lectures from a microphone directly to an attendee s T coil via a receiver with a magnetic coupler It is noteworthy that some cochlear implants the new ear level style also have a telecoil incorporated in them Previously cochlear implant users could plug their speech processors into an adapter on landline telephones for direct listening However the inductive coupling method allows them to use telecommunications products effectively in a wireless fashion With developments in technology new kinds of speaker elements were introduced Some of these speaker elements produced no magnetic signal or one that is far lower thus making it impossible to use a T coil in those products Because of this in 1988 the Hearing Aid Compatibility Act was passed requiring all wireline and cordless telephones to provide a magnetic signal sufficient to support the use of a T coil The FCC enforces this industry requirement in Part 68 of its rules In its rules the FCC adopted EIA RS 504 as the technical requirements for hearing aid compatibility This provision applies to both wireline and wireless telecommunications products that deliver an audio output to a transducer normally held to the ear such as a traditional telephone handset or headset Note telep
346. orks com resources howto smil smilbasics html Washington Ear Audio Description htto www washear org audiod htm E World Wide Web W3 Consortium s Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language Standard htto www w3 org Audio Video 8 6 User Selectable Captions or Audio Descriptions September 2004 8 6 1 Display or presentation of alternate text presentation i e captions or audio descriptions must be user selectable unless they are permanent Section 508 Provision 1194 24e Rationale When video and multimedia productions provide either closed captioning or closed audio description regardless of their delivery method viewers must be given the ability to enable or disable them using an intuitive and easy to use selection feature Given the current state and prevalence of analog technology the user selectable requirement applies only to forms of closed approaches for captioning and audio description when the production transmission and display mechanisms are known available to support it and at the control of the viewer see sections 8 2 and 8 3 In some situations such as Postal Service television broadcasts in public spaces the viewer does not control the display In this case the user selectable requirement does not apply to the individual user but to the persons administrating the system However if video content containing closed captions is played on a desktop computer where the viewer does hav
347. ormat or alternate access method 8 2 3 Testing For each technology or service that is developed or purchased use the following general method to test compliance with the specific requirements in this section E Examine the hardware and software equipment used to transmit or display video or multimedia production content including its associated online or offline documentation Hardware and software can include equipment such as broadcast or transmission equipment analog televisions and displays digital televisions and displays computer media players or captioning system technology E Check to see if the hardware or software includes caption decoder circuitry or a method for enabling and displaying closed captions in video or multimedia production content that would be played on it E If the equipment does support closed captioning enabling display and user preferences attempt to play a closed captioned video or multimedia production on the equipment Check to see if closed captions can be enabled displayed and disabled properly E If the equipment does not support closed captioning display it should either be adapted to do so or not purchased by the Postal Service If it is purchased a general exception must be documented and approved by the responsible functional and Supply Management organizations E If the equipment is used by the Postal Service all video or multimedia productions played on the equipment must be open capt
348. ortance of Compliance 0 ccc tenet eee ene 1 3 2 jenen 1 3 2 1 Department of Justice issues eue n Ry ERR Rn baw xa eR RC Rm E Rn Rd Rn 1 3 2 2 Postal SEV CE tcaaevenwe stapes cuceteuduecaseesausenaeeecebaeo set esasue 1 3 2 3 Functional Organizations 0 ccc teen n 1 4 SCODG sacuaeredsecsdaeesdseeee beet ae ees E acess ae eed E S cae ae 1 4 1 Postal Service Employees 0 00 ccc cece nn 1 4 2 0 0 6 2 oe ee ee amd 1 4 3 Enterprise Architecture and Information Infrastructure 000c cena 1 5 ADO TRIS HandDOON ucoeaucuunsin anode Rhe ORE Eo ERROR ahaa EIER ES Duci 1 5 1 Generally Speaking 42a Set pe na Ra OE RD YR rea e E Edce Eabb a bec aet ds 1 5 2 Introductory Chapters 1 4 0 0 eee eee e teen eens 1 5 3 Technical Chapters 5 11 lllellllleseeeeeeee Rr 1 6 Additional Sources for Accessibility lll eller 2 Roles and Responsibilities else 2 1 Vice President Chief Technology Officer 0 0 cc cece eee eee eee eens 2 2 section 508 Program Manager Information Technology 0 00 ce cece eee eae 2 3 section 508 Technical Stewards esee 2 4 TP ORMOuOIMANAOQGKS sacs ics caine TETTE TTE 2 5 Vice President Labor Relations 0 0 0 00 ee eee eee ee eee es 2 6 Vice President Supply Management lesen 2 7 Vice Pr
349. osed captioning information being distorted or removed due to transmission problems but it also applies to TTY tones which are covered specifically in other telecommunications product provisions as well Historical sources of problems have been stripping and garbling or loss of synchronization of caption data due to compression duplication transmission frame loss or removal re encoding or digital rights management methods Some systems completely remove captioning accidentally during transmission or compression simply because the designers are not aware that it exists in the synchronization periods of the signal On other systems compression techniques may corrupt the captions because the compression techniques were designed without knowledge of or consideration for captions Still other systems to save bandwidth do not deliver secondary or auxiliary channels that carry accessibility information Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 11 2 September 2004 7 11 2 Thus the captioning or video description information is blocked and the users who rely on these services for accessibility are denied their benefit Another example of TTY problems with digital service is in wireless e g cellular communications In some systems frame errors occur at levels that are tolerated well for voice communications but are very disruptive to TTY communication Other problems have arisen from some noise cancellation algorit
350. ough contract award and delivery implementation the Postal Service procures the most compliant product that meets business requirements The Voluntary Product Accessibility Template VPAT http www itic org policy vpat html is a standardized template used by agencies and suppliers of information technology to define compliance with Section 508 standards To achieve Section 508 compliance on an ongoing basis the Postal Service must do the following a Include Section 508 compliance language in all procurement documents b Require vendors to provide information on how their solution addresses the applicable standards When available the Postal Service must request that the vendor provide the Voluntary Product Accessibility Template VPAT of all potential products VPAT is one method that Handbook AS 508 A Section 508 Postal Service Processes to Comply 4 2 4 September 2004 suppliers use to document how their products are Section 508 compliant If no VPAT is available other documentation identifying how the vendor complies with the standards is required C Verify product compliance with the relevant standards Testing for accessibility with appropriate methodologies including using assistive technology should be done when necessary during pre award evaluations and during acceptance testing after delivery The above applies to both commercial off the shelf COTS products and purchased customized solutions
351. over IP service a voice mail service or a wireless phone service Note You may need to synchronize requirements in this chapter with requirements given in other chapters in this handbook Products that provide telephone functions are subject to the requirements stated in this chapter However products often have features that are subject to requirements in other technical chapters i e chapters 5 10 In addition all products must be assessed using both the applicable specific requirements and the Functional Performance Criteria see For example using only the requirements in this chapter it would be possible to design a touchscreen only product with no keypad and no voice output that would be completely inaccessible to people who are blind However to ensure that the product would be accessible to people who are blind i e and therefore conforming to Section 508 standards the Functional Performance Criteria must also be applied Some examples of how the requirements in this chapter should be applied are offered here m Example 1 Typical desktop telephone with answering machine capability This product is clearly covered by this chapter s requirements because its primary function is to provide telephone functions i e 2 way voice communication The product is also covered by the Functional Performance Criteria as well as requirements in other chapters depending on the telephone design and features E Example 2 A
352. ow accessibility can be achieved technology has often been designed so that only able bodied people could use it Just as a multi level building without stairs can exclude people with mobility impairments information technology can be a barrier too A display of information presented in graphical form without a text equivalent is not usable by people with significant visual impairments A video without captioning bars a deaf person from understanding the message A copier with operational controls in the back denies a person in a wheelchair full access oection 508 defines technical standards for six classes of technology software applications and operating systems Web based intranet and internet information and applications telecommunications products video and multimedia products self contained closed products and desktop and portable computers To insure that adherence results in functional access by people with disabilities the law also specifies performance criteria The law addresses both simple technologies and complex solutions Complex systems often include components from more than one class of technology each individual component within its class must meet its specific standard For example in a bank ATM a self contained closed product where the output of the machine is displayed on a screen an alternate format for the information is speech Reasonable accommodation for visually impaired and blind users includes a headph
353. physical accessibility of controls and features Examples of these products include but are not limited to copiers information kiosks and floor standing printers These provisions are based on the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines ADAAG 4 2 Space Allowance and Reach Ranges some examples may clarify the applicable standards m If a document feeder is built within the technical specifications but access to the platen glass is outside the reach range a copier would not be in compliance with this provision Users need to be able to access both the paper feed and the platen glass Some documents are too small or too large to be run through a paper feed If copier paper trays are not reachable on the other hand the copier may still be compliant because replacing paper is considered to be a maintenance function not a normal daily operation Operable controls include but are not limited to mechanically operated controls input and output trays card slots keyboards or key pads The standards apply to products in their normal operation rather than to maintenance repair or occasional monitoring Other tasks such as initial setup and configuration adding and replacing parts and repair and service tasks are also not covered by the standards Techniques Purchased products should be the most compliant available developed products must be compliant If kiosks are developed by the Postal Service they must meet
354. plate for Undue Burden Justification Documentation This template provides guidance for preparing an undue burden justification document The requiring organization must use this template when either of the following is true i A decision is made to purchase electronic and information technology EIT that is less compliant with Section 508 than what is available in the commercial marketplace m The purchase of the more compliant EIT would impose a significant difficulty or expense to the entire program or component for which the product is being purchased Instructions E Prepare written documentation addressing the applicable sections below The depth of detail provided will vary depending on the dollar value of the purchase importance to the agency number of potential users business or operational affect and other issues a Obtain purchasing and legal advice as needed throughout the process E Obtain necessary approvals and signatures m Provide completed justification documentation to the contracting officer a Update the Enterprise Information Repository EIR system where appropriate Section I General a Program Name b Preparer s Name C General description of the program Section Il Basis for Justifying the Undue Burden Exception An undue burden is defined as a significant difficulty or expense When making an undue burden determination the requiring organization must consider the entire resources availabl
355. plays closed captions from broadcast cable videotape and DVD signals As soon as practicable but not later than July 1 2002 widescreen digital television DTV displays measuring at least 7 8 inches vertically DTV sets with conventional displays measuring at least 13 inches vertically and stand alone DTV tuners whether or not they are marketed with display screens and computer equipment that includes DTV receiver or display circuitry must be equipped with caption decoder circuitry which appropriately receives decodes and displays closed captions from broadcast cable videotape and DVD signals Section 508 Provision 1194 24a 8 3 Television Tuners and Secondary Audio Playback Circuitry Television tuners including tuner cards for use in computers must be equipped with secondary audio program playback circuitry Section 508 Provision 1194 24b 8 4 Open or Closed Captioning of Video and Multimedia Productions All training and informational video and multimedia productions that support the agency s mission regardless of format that contain speech or other audio information necessary for the comprehension of the content must be open or closed captioned Section 508 Provision 1194 24c September 2004 227 Appendix 8 A 228 Yes No Requirement N A Audio Description of Video and Multimedia Productions All training and informational video and multimedia productions that support the agency s mission reg
356. pment Check to see if audio descriptions can be enabled played and disabled properly If the equipment does not support audio description playback it should either be adapted to do so or not purchased by the Postal Service If it is purchased a general exception must be documented and approved by the responsible functional and Supply Management organizations If the equipment is used by the Postal Service all video or multimedia productions played on the equipment must include open audio descriptions or an alternate format or alternate access method must be provided References The following references provide additional guidance on the techniques described above but must not be used in place of the general and specific Postal Service requirements in this chapter If any of these references conflict with Postal Service requirements defer to the Postal Service requirements Access Board 508 Universe My training courses Accessible Conferences htto www section508 gov training index cfm FuseAction CourseMenu amp CourselD 2 Note Site registration is required to access this link Apple Computer s Quicktime and SMIL Page http www apple com quicktime authoring qtsmil html CPB WGBH National Center for Accessible Media Description FAQ htto ncam wgbh org dtv basics description html CPB WGBH s National Center for Accessible Media Motion Picture Access Project MOPIX htto ncam wgbh org mopix aboutproject html Han
357. pplet gt lt applet gt lt object gt applet code gravity class width 200 height 250 alt Java gravity Provide a text description of an object within the lt OBJECT gt tag Exhibit 6 12 2b Example of an Object lt object classid java gravity class width 200 height 250 gt When gravity acts on an object the weight 136 If a plug in applet or other application is necessary to access the Web content provide a hyperlink to the plug in The plug in must comply with the Access Board s standard 36 CFR 1194 21 Software Applications and Operating Systems If the plug in is not accessible provide an alternate format or alternate access method to the content Note Plugins for PDF formats are covered in Section 6 13 Forms Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 13 2 6 12 3 6 12 4 6 13 Forms September 2004 6 13 1 6 13 2 Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following step Ensure that the applet or plug in is compliant with the Access Board s standard 36 CFR 1194 21 Software applications and Operating Systems References The following references are provid
358. primarily devices without electronic sophistication newer designs often contain higher degrees of functionality such as the ability to interface with desktop computers that can be made universally accessible Printers Like copiers printers have extensive functions many of which can be accessed by standard control panels displayed and updated from personal computers To the extent that the control panels follow the standards described in Software Applications and Operating Systems these devices may be fully compliant Calculators Although most calculator functions are an integral part of PC application software and governed by the standards described in Software Applications and Operating Systems accessible calculators usable by people with disabilities can be acquired Specialized procurement for a specific accommodation of an employee is a 504 solution rather than a 508 compliance decision Information on possible alternate formats or modes can be noted when a non accessible EIT purchase is made For more information see the FAQ on accessible calculators at Tech Connections htto www techconnections org resources guides Calculators cfm Fax machines Like copiers fax machines have extensive functions many of which can be accessed from standard control panels displayed and updated from personal computers To the extent that the control panels follow the standards described in Software Applications and Operating oystems
359. ptable Hertz range or that have a high level of contrast between states Ensure that flashing areas of the screen are kept to as small an area as possible f For all blinking or flashing elements that are included a method must also be offered that allows users to change the elements flash rate or disable them altogether 5 114 References u Epilepsy Action Photosensitive Epilepsy http www epilepsy org uk info photofrm html E Microsoft Developers Network Flashing User Interface and the GetCaretBlinkTime Function htto msdn microsoft com library default asp url library en us dnacc html ATG AvoidFlashing asp frame true E International Code Council ICC ANSI A117 standard Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities ICC ANSI A117 1 199 htto www iccsafe org a11 7 ansi98 html Note Postal Service developers and purchasing agents are strongly urged to obtain updated references for application or operating system accessibility references when designing or purchasing Postal Service applications 82 Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 12 2 1 5 12 Forms September 2004 5 12 1 5 12 2 5 12 2 1 When a form is included in a software application it must allow people using assistive technology to access the information controls e g input fields checkboxes radio buttons or push buttons and functionality required to complete review revise and submit it including all dire
360. quirement E Just as simultaneous two handed operation is prohibited operations that require the use of more than one finger at a time and simultaneous operations of all types should be avoided and are prohibited by section which prohibits simultaneous actions and applies to all products E Using controls and latches which require light pressure to operate such as push buttons up down control buttons instead of side to side control buttons concave rocker switches or sliding controls would make it easier for users with various types of physical disabilities i Avoid using controls that must be held down for more than 5 seconds if there is no other way to achieve the function The provision specifically states that keys and controls must not require twisting This does not mean however that rotary knobs cannot be used If the knobs can be operated within the 22 2 N force limit and without requiring the user to twist pinch or tightly grasp then they would conform Many that have a reasonable surface coefficient of friction and which turn without great effort would meet the requirements of this provision Keep in mind that sufficient room should be provided around the knobs if they are to be operated in this fashion e g with the side of the hand 7 12 23 Key Repeat Must Be Adjustable If key repeat is supported the delay before repeat must be adjustable to a rate of at least 2 seconds per character 194 Handbook AS 508 A Tel
361. r 2004 7 7 3 1 7 4 The term dB refers to decibel a unit of relative sound intensity or a logarithmic unit used to describe a ratio When used with Sound Pressure Level SPL e g 65 db SPL dB expresses an absolute measure of sound pressure level SPL or against no sound Most telecommunications standards now define gain in terms of Receive Output Loudness Rating ROLR not SPL If a volume control e g a calibrated wheel or slider is provided that allows a user to set the gain anywhere from O to the minimum requirement of 20 dB gain above default then there is no need to specify an intermediate i e incremental step of 12 dB If an incremental volume control is provided e g pressing a volume button repeatedly one of the intermediate levels must provide 12 dB of gain above default Some telephones are set with a higher default than others These telephones are not given credit for providing a high default setting and must still provide 20 dB of gain above their default setting in order to conform to this provision Some telephones may allow the user to reset the default volume In these cases the default is that setting that the manufacturer normally uses for the telephones at sales time Testing a Conduct a manual inspection of the product or device s telephone functions for presence of volume control Determine the default volume level of the device b If the device provides continuous amplification via a c
362. r a fixed amount of time A couple of minutes before the fixed time limit an alert must communicate the impending timeout to the user Then the user can be timed out at the appointed time 87 5 12 2 5 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 5 12 2 5 Example of a Timeout Feature peus eem An example of a timeout feature in the Postal customer shipping label application Click N Ship This application captures return and delivery addresses package details and services information from the user before presenting a custom shipping label with or without postage The label is presented USPS PRIORITY MAI using the Java based application shown in Figure A THAN O PUBLIC After presenting the label the user can print and 475 L ENFANT PLACA SW attach it to their mail package WASHINGTON OC 20260 0004 Due to security requirements there is a fixed 15 minute timeout during the label presentation event Figure A The Java based custom shipping label Figure B shows the alert message that is presented pun aana e n a ppc to a user 2 minutes before a timeout is about to occur in the application Clear instructions for how to extend the session are provided so that the user can ask for more time to complete his or her task A USPS Click N Ship Session Timeout Warning Web Page Dialog E Your session will expire in approximately 7 minutes To extend your session and prevent losing your saved d
363. r input field i Check for auditory cues or audio features that allow users to spatially explore the screen or access a linear listing of all controls and inputs 267 10 2 4 268 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide b Check for a hardware based activation controls and optional up and down arrow buttons that allows users to navigate lists and activate controls once they have made a selection E Check for an optional layered help system that allows users to have more information than the button or text input name activated by an additional hardware control 10 24 References The following references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here E Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Telecommunications Products 1194 23 Updated June 21 2001 htto www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 23 htm m Section 4 27 4 of the ADA Accessibility Guidelines ADAAG codified as the ADA Standards for Accessible Design as part of the Department of Justice s regulation implementing title III of the ADA at 28 C F R pt 36 Appendix A Telecommunications Act Accessibility Guidelines http www access board gov adaag html adaag htm 4 27 Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Guide to Section 508 Telecommunications http www trace wisc edu docs 2002 508 collation index shtml style default telecomm u Trace Center Research University of Wisconsin Kiosk accommoda
364. r to adjust the receive volume a function must be provided to reset the volume to the default level automatically after every use 81194 23 Provision g Rationale This provision applies to all telecommunications products that provide telephone functions and that allow a user to adjust the volume It was adopted from the ADA Accessibility Guidelines where it applies to public telephones used by many people It also has roots in the FCC s Part 68 rule which requires an automatic reset when a landline telephone is hung up after a call in which the volume exceeds 18 dB gain This reset provision is a safety feature for handsets implemented by the FCC and does not apply when a product is in hands free i e speakerphone mode The ability to override the reset is helpful to people with hearing loss who find it inconvenient to adjust their preferred amplification level for every call especially on incoming calls In other words the telephone will be loud every time that they answer it In December 2000 when the Access Board published the Section 508 standards in the Federal Register it wrote in the preamble that allowing override of the reset function would require a waiver from the FCC Since that time the FCC did in fact issue such a waiver in March 2001 http ftp fcc gov cgb dro vc notic doc that states specific conditions see Techniques below There is also a Memorandum Opinion and Order at http ftp fec gov Bureaus Common_Carr
365. ram in the call manager A deaf person could then walk up to any of the 10 000 telephones in an organization and communicate via text or text and voice without needing any special equipment This approach does not require any changes to the telephones themselves It could be implemented using the VoIP telephones that are already installed 161 7 2 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 723 Testing a Inspect the product to identify if it provides telephone i e 2 way voice communication functions b Regardless of product type if the product does provide telephone functions conduct a visual inspection using the following steps 1 Determine if product provides TTY functionality 2 If not check for a standard nonacoustic connection point e g RJ 11 TIA TSB 121 etc 3 Check for microphone off on or mute switch or similar function C After conducting the visual inspection conduct a performance test to ensure product complies with the requirements of this provision using the following steps 1 Attach a TTY product to the product using the non acoustic connection point 2 Test the product s ability to allow the user to intermix speech with TTY on the same call to insure that VCO is functioning properly On some telephones when the microphone is muted the telephone also prevents the TTY from transmitting through the direct connect port This is a problem 724 References The following references
366. range of contrast levels must be provided Section 508 Provision 1194 21g and Provision 81194 21j Rationale People who cannot differentiate between certain color combinations or have some other visual impairment may have difficulty navigating or interpreting software application or operating system content that depends on the ability to identify color or differentiate between colors with low contrast i e when foreground and background colors are too close to the same hue or value People who are sensitive to bright displays or who cannot focus on a bright screen need color choices that provide a softer background and appropriate foreground color Persons with disabilities often increase their efficiency with a system by selecting operating system level display settings that affect the presentation of user interface elements e g windows menus toolbars icons standard controls or display resolution ooftware applications must use standard display protocols to inherit operating system wide display settings offering the user a consistency of presentation in the user interface When a software application disables or interferes with these operating system wide settings the system s accessibility is reduced When software applications offer nonstandard display options there must be an option that allows the user to use whatever settings are already in place i e operating system level display settings instead of application nonstan
367. rdless of the software used to generate HTML There are three general uses for tables data tables simple and or complex data document layout tables and forms within data tables If a data table has one logical level of row or column headers it is a simple table Complex tables are data tables that have more than one logical level of row or column headers When a table is used for layout purposes ensure that the layout is not required to understand the information The page content layout should be transparent to the interpretation of the page content Forms within tables are addressed in section 6 13 119 6 7 2 120 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 6 7 2 Techniques 6 7 2 1 Use the lt TABLE gt tag primarily for the display of tabular data Non tabular tables may be used for layout if the table uses appropriate HTML to summarize the intent of the design Identify row and column headers for data tables Associate data cells with their headers for all tables that have two or more logical levels of row or column headers The table must be constructed so that it can be read logically from left to right and from top to bottom Where appropriate use the CAPTION tag and or the summary attribute for tabular data It is not necessary to include summary attributes in data tables that are nested within a table However the outermost TABLE tag must contain a CAPTION tag and or summary attribute The content of
368. re consistent and meaningful a List all images used in the user interface to represent a control or provide access to a tool including their associated label Identify the application functions associated with them Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 7 1 5 6 4 b Navigate the software application through usage scenarios and identify where the same image or label appears in different phases of the scenarios C For duplicate images and labels note where the image or label represents different application functions d For duplicate images and labels that represent different functions resolve the difference by changing image s and or label s to ensure that the same image does not represent different functions e Repeat steps b through d with screen reader and screen magnifier assistive technology to ensure that the labels for images are stated i e read and that they are consistent and meaningful When the focus is on the image object the assistive technology should be able to access and state a meaningful object name its role type its state or its current value Note any images functioning as an user interface object for which a meaningful object name role state or value is not accessible to assistive technology f For the image objects in question fix then retest using this procedure References i oun Java Look and Feel Design Guidelines Application Graphics htto java sun com
369. reader software to ensure that the player or plug in is accessible E Ensure that the plug in or player itself is compliant with the Access Board s standard 36 CFR 1194 21 Software Applications and Operating Systems References The following reference is provided for more information on this topic but must not be used in place of the Postal Service guidelines above If these references are in conflict with the above techniques you must defer to the Postal Service guidelines E oynchronize equivalents htto www w3 org T R WCAG10 TECHS tech synchronize equivalents Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 4 4 6 4 Color September 2004 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 4 4 Web pages must be designed so that all information required for navigation or meaning is independent of the ability to identify specific colors Section 508 Provision 1194 22c Rationale People who cannot differentiate between certain color combinations or have some other visual impairment may have difficulty navigating or interpreting content that depends on the ability to identify color When foreground and background colors are too close to the same hue they may not provide sufficient contrast between colors Techniques Identify information in such a way that the message is not conveyed through color alone For example do not instruct a user to select an item from those listed in green Instead
370. rement Plans Include estimates for resources required to support compliance with Section 508 requirements Position possible EIT solution scenarios e g lease or buy vs build internal vs outsource Include Section 508 business value affects and risks related to the EIT solution Conduct a product and solution type market research potential vendors Section 508 compliance qualifications or VPATS cross solution research via trusted research sources such as Gartner Giga etc Ensure that solution components will be included in the Infrastructure Toolkit ITK People or Organizations Responsible Functional Organization Client own IT Portfolio Manager support IT Portfolio Manager own Project Managers support Contracting Officers support Functional Organization Client own Executive Sponsor own IT Portfolio Manager support Enterprise Architecture Staff support Contracting Officer support IT Portfolio Manager own Enterprise Architecture Staff support Handbook AS 508 A Section 508 Postal Service Processes to Comply Phase Development Design build lease buy and test the EIT solution Implementation Certify accept and deploy EIT solution Operations Management Maintain and enhance solution close out project September 2004 Tasks amp Work Perform requirements analysis 508 Considerations Ensure that applicable
371. repeat was faster than they can move This could potentially result in the same character displaying several times on the screen It could also result in the same function Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 12 2 1 September 2004 repeating e g causing the telephone volume to get too high The key repeat requirement applies only to controls that have a key repeat function Most telephone products would not have a repeat function on the dial pad However many telephones have key repeat functionality on menu navigation arrows backspaces or volume controls Telephony functions on products with a keyboard may also have other repeat functions Requirement 4 requires that the status of all locking or toggle controls or keys e g caps lock scroll lock etc must be visually discernible and discernible either through touch or sound For example adding audio patterns such as ascending and descending pitch tones that indicate when a control is turned on or off would alleviate the problem of a person who is blind inadvertently pressing the locking or toggle controls Also buttons that remain depressed when activated and switches with distinct positions may meet this provision 7122 Techniques 7 12 2 1 Ensure That Users Can Locate Keys By Touch Without Activating Them Ensure that individual keys are tactilely discernable without activating the controls or keys Tactilely discernable
372. request at no additional charge End users must have access to a description of the accessibility and compatibility features of products in alternate formats or alternate methods upon request at no additional charge September 2004 Heview comments for Subpart B standards b d e and f 22 Does the product incorporate any audio or video e g tutorial or help files 23 If so is an alternate output provided e g a text script or captions 24 Does the application use error tones If so are text messages associated with each error Review comments for Subpart B standard d 25 Does any part of the application require speech input or recognition Review comments for Subpart B standards b c and j 26 Does the program come with documentation that is accessible to persons with disabilities 27 Can the vendor provide a description of accessibility features e g the VPAT 257 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank 258 Handbook AS 508 A 10 Desktop and Portable Computers 10 1 Overview September 2004 10 1 1 10 1 2 10 1 2 1 Contents This chapter contains the specific electronic and information technology EIT performance requirements related to the following subpart of Section 508 EIT Technical Standard 1194 26 Desktop and Portable Computers Provisions a thru d Summary Technology The requirements in this
373. resetting of a Web application to an initial login page after the user selects OK on a timed logout notice Automatic Updating of Web content Use the refresh meta tag only when the user has requested auto refresh Notify the user of any changes resulting in a redirect Most redirects are done without the user s control Web content developers should update content to reflect changes in hypertext links and notify users when it is known that redirects will occur An example of HTML code for an automatic refresh is given below lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN S lt html gt lt head gt meta content text html charset ISO 8859 1 http equiv content type gt lt title gt lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt meta content 3 url http www usps com http equiv refresh You will be redirected to the United States Postal Service in 3 seconds meta http equiv refresh content 3 url http www usps com gt lt body gt lt html gt Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing In testing perform the following steps as applicable E Ensure that if given the option any timeouts will allow a user to indicate that additional time
374. rmation Alternate methods can include text labels or text formatting 79 5 10 4 5 10 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide References W3C Accessibility Guidelines Colors htto www w3 org T R WCAG10 TECHS tech color convey m Sun Java Developing Accessible JFC Applications http www sun com access developers developing accessible apps Note Postal Service developers and purchasing agents are strongly urged to obtain updated references for application or operating system accessibility references when designing or purchasing Postal Service applications 5 11 Video Frequency 80 5 11 1 5 11 2 5 11 2 1 Software must not use flashing or blinking text objects or other user interface elements having a flash or blink frequency between 2 and 55 cycles per second 2 0 Hz and 55 0 Hz If provided offer a way to change the frequency or disable flashing altogether Section 508 Provision 1194 21k Rationale User interface elements and screen items that flash or blink can cause seizures or other involuntary responses particularly if they flash in high intensity with high contrast and in the frequency range between 2 and 55 cycles per second 2 0 Hz and 55 0 Hz The 2 0 Hz limit was chosen by the Access Board to be consistent with proposed revisions to the ADA Accessibility Guidelines that in turn are being harmonized with the International Code Council ICC ANSI A117 ANSI A1117 1 1998 standard Ac
375. rmation technology infrastructure includes both the information text and data and the technology used to present them 1 5 About This Handbook September 2004 1 5 1 1 5 2 1 5 3 Generally Speaking The purpose of this handbook is to help you understand and implement the accessibility guidelines In the absence of explicit Postal Service direction related to a general requirement or technical standard of the law use the law itself Software purchased or created after June 21 2001 is as compliant with Section 508 standards as possible This handbook helps you B Gain a better understanding of the general requirements of Section 508 E Know the specific technical requirements of the six EIT standards and related provisions m Know how they translate into Postal Service requirements Federal agencies industry and the general public interested in Section 508 activities may also find this book useful Introductory Chapters 1 4 These chapters provide information about Postal Service policy roles and responsibilities a snapshot view of the requirements of Section 508 and information on using this handbook Technical Chapters 5 11 Here you will find Postal Service requirements to implement the technical standards contained in Section 508 Each chapter contains the legal provisions and the following sections Rationale Describes how the technical area addressed by the provision affects certain peopl
376. rogram Voice Mail and IVR http tap gallaudet edu l VH htm m Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions IVR Accessibility Forum http www atis org atis Ivr ivrhom htm E Inclusive com IVR Accessibilit htto inclusive com ivr_access m ITU T ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector DTMF Standard http www itu int home The ITU T is a committee of the International Telecommunications Union ITU The ITU T is responsible for making technical recommendations about telephone and data communication systems DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency tones are those used by touch tone telephones for tone dialing E ISO IEC IS 13714 1994 Information technology Document processing and related communication User Interface to Telephone based Services Voice Messaging Applications http www iso org Iso en CatalogueDetailPage CatalogueDetail CSNUMBER 22721 ISO 13714 is the most detailed of the three standards but also the narrowest It applies to voice mail and voice messaging specifically and cannot be applied in its entirety to IVR systems m Human Factors amp Ergonomics Society HFES 200 5 Human Factors Engineering of Software User Interfaces Interactive Voice Response IVR and Telephony htto www atis org pub IVR HFES 200 5 paf E The Telephone Speech Standards Committee TSSC user interface guidelines for speech enabled or speech recognition business IVR applications htto oortal acm org citation c
377. rogram plan obtain funding 30 Tasks amp Work Develop Business Needs Statement and Initial Solution Concept Produce program project and procurement schedules and plans Develop business case analysis and ensure alignment with Enterprise Architecture Register EIT 508 Considerations Determine whether EIT is part of solution If it is do the following Include persons with disabilities in stakeholder profiles Identify applicable EIT standards based on access considerations for candidate stakeholder interactions or interfaces Ascertain possible general exception Ensure that applicable Section 508 technical requirements are included in procurement plans Include estimates for resources required to support compliance with Section 508 requirements Position possible EIT solution scenarios e g lease or buy vs build internal vs outsource Include Section 508 business value affects and risks related to the EIT solution Conduct a product and solution type market research potential vendors Section 508 compliance qualifications or VPATS cross solution research via trusted research sources such as Gartner Giga etc Ensure alignment with enterprise architecture Register the solution in the Enterprise Information Repository EIR People or Organizations Responsible Functional Organization Client own IT Portfolio Manager Support IT Portfol
378. rol and at the maximum protrusion of the product within the 48 inch length see section 9 11 Figure A 2 Where any operable control is 10 inches or less behind the reference plane the height must be 54 inches maximum and 15 inches minimum above the floor 3 Where any operable control is more than 10 inches and not more than 24 inches behind the reference plane the height must be 46 inches maximum and 15 inches minimum above the floor 4 Operable controls must not be more than 24 inches behind the reference plane see section 9 11 Figure BJ Subpart C Functional Performance Criteria Is at least one mode of operation and information retrieval provided that does not require user vision Is at least one mode of operation and information retrieval that does not require visual acuity greater than 20 70 provided in audio and enlarged print output working together or independently Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 11 Does the product have voice output i e other than beeps 12 Can you adjust the volume to at least 65 dB 13 If the ambient noise exceeds 45 dB can you adjust the volume to at least 20 dB louder than the environment 14 When you finish using the product does the product automatically reset the audio to a default level 15 Whenever an element such as a control is distinguished by a color is another method e g text label used to denote the element 16 Does the product allow use
379. rols and keys must be operable with one hand and that they must not require tight grasping pinching or twisting of the wrist Individuals with tremor cerebral palsy or other disabilities may have difficulty operating systems that require fine motor control a steady hand or the use of both hands simultaneously for operation Individuals with high spinal cord injuries arthritis and other conditions may have difficulty operating controls that require significant strength The requirement s force limit 5 pounds is based on section 4 27 4 of the ADA Accessibility Guidelines m Requirement 3 requires that if key repeat is supported the delay before repeat must be adjustable to at least 2 seconds Key repeat rate must be adjustable to 2 seconds per character This requirement addresses a challenge encountered by some people without fine motor coordination Sometimes they accidentally don t release a key fast enough and get several auto repeated characters when they only intended to type one because the key repeat was faster than they can move This could potentially result in the same character displaying several times on the screen It could also result in the same function repeating e g sending the same fax multiple times The key repeat requirement applies only to controls that have a key repeat function m Requirement 4 specifies that the status of all locking or toggle controls or keys e g caps lock scroll lock
380. rom the perspective of designing for accessibility Each specific requirement includes a rationale techniques testing methods and references as shown below in Overview Keyboard Access Provision 1194 21a a Rationale E Techniques and Exhibits E Testing a References 5 3 Activated Accessibility Features Provision 1194 21b On Screen Focus Provision 81194 21c User Interface and Programmatic Elements Provision 1194 21d Consistent Use of Images Provision 1194 21e Textual Information Provision 1194 21f User Selected Display Attributes Color and Contrast Provisions 1194 21g and 1194 21 Animation Provision 1194 21h 5 10 Color Coding Provision 1194 21i Video Frequency Provision 1194 21k Forms Provision 81194 211 Checklist Testing Methods Note The exhibits used to illustrate various techniques that satisfy specific requirements often refer to the Microsoft Windows operating Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 1 5 September 2004 5 1 5 system and its compatible applications This is because the Microsoft Windows platform represents the largest base of installed systems within the Postal Service Introduction to Software Accessibility Software is the program that runs on electronic equipment The general concept of software accessibility is that the assistive technology should work with the program to allow its features and functions to be unde
381. rosoft com enable products winkeyboard htm Sun Java Application Design Guidelines Keyboard Operations htto java sun com products jIf ed2 book HIG Behavior3 html Sun Java Developing Accessible JFC Applications http www sun com access developers developing accessible apps Macintosh Human Interface Guidelines htto developer apple com documentation UserExperience Conceptual AquaHlGuidelines index html UNIX Motif and CDE 2 1 Style Guide htto zikova cvut cz oublikace aix motit motifsg toc htm UNIX KDE User Interface Guidelines htto developer kde org documentation standards kde style basics index html Gnome Linux Keyboard Navigation for Gtk 2 0 Draft htto developer gnome org projects gap keyboardnav html Note Postal Service developers and purchasing agents are strongly urged to obtain updated references for application or operating system accessibility references when designing or purchasing Postal Service applications September 2004 49 5 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 5 3 Activated Accessibility Features 5 3 1 50 Software applications must not disrupt or disable activated features of other products that are identified as accessibility features if those features are developed and documented according to industry standards Software applications also must not disrupt or disable activated accessibility features of any operating system if the application programming interface API for those a
382. rovided for more information on this topic but must not be used in place of the Postal Service guidelines given above If these references conflict with the above techniques you must defer to the Postal Service guidelines a Avoiding flicker htto www w3 org T R WCAG10 TECHS tech avoid flicker i Effective color contrast htto www lighthouse org color_contrast htm 130 Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 10 2 1 6 10 Equivalent Text Content 6 10 1 6 10 2 6 10 2 1 September 2004 When compliance cannot be achieved provide an alternate format or alternate access method that will be used in addition to or in place of the primary Web page site application information links or data Section 508 Provision 81194 22k Rationale Alternate formats or access methods are intended to be equivalent to the primary Web source in both content and functionality and must be updated concurrently with the primary Web source URL hyperlinks or text links such as click here do not clearly indicate the destination or purpose of the link Descriptive text links enable assistive technology to provide information that describes the destination or purpose of the link Techniques Use Standard Accessible Formats Create your original Web application information links and data in a standard accessible format so that text only or alternate formats are not needed When updates to t
383. rrectly In this example if a user elected to use his or her own style sheets or if style sheets were disabled in the browser the sentence would read correctly The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog Figure A Screen capture of correctly formatted CSS web content Figure B HTML code for Figure A lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt html head lt title gt Correct Use of Style Sheets Example lt title gt lt style type text css partl The quick padding left 0 position absolute top 0 color red font size 14pt font family copperplate gothic bold fantasy sans serif part2 brown fox padding left 100px position absolute top 25px color brown font size 10pt font family times new roman desdemona serif part3 jumped over padding left 300px position absolute top 40px color purple font size 18pt font family desdemona times new roman serif part4 the lazy dog padding left 350px position absolute top 70px color blue font size 24pt font family fantasy copperplate gothic bold sans serif lt style gt lt head gt lt body gt div class partl1 gt The quick lt div gt lt div class part2 brown fox lt div gt lt div class part3 gt jumped over lt div gt lt div class part4 gt the lazy dog lt div gt lt body gt lt html gt 116
384. rrounded by a black solid fill and then moved the input cursor to the new insertion point indicated by the dotted I bar cursor This can be done either by dragging the mouse or selecting the F2 key and moving the input cursor using the ARROW keys In Figure C the focus information is exposed during a File Save operation when the system is busy and cannot accept user input The cursor representation an hourglass cursor has been changed to indicate a system busy state 54 Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 4 2 2 September 2004 5 4 2 2 Expose Information for Associated Controls When a control is associated with another control or object i e when interaction with one control affects another control or object expose the information about each control to assistive technology Visually impaired users may not be aware of on screen changes resulting from the operation of a given control changes another control or object associated with the control the user operated In this example the software application must make sure the operating system is instructed properly that the change occurred so that any activated accessibility features or assistive technologies can process the change This instruction is critical since the cursor moves with the system focus In addition associated controls can sometimes provide an automatic focus change i e movement of the focus based on user operati
385. rs to set color and or contrast settings If SO are several options provided 17 Is there any blinking text or graphics in the program If so verify that it falls within the accepted frequency range 18 Is the product freestanding i e not placed on a stand or table 19 Are all controls placed within an acceptable reach range Heview comments for Subpart B standards b c d g and h 20 Does the product require a user to use an input method other than a keyboard or view a monitor 21 Does any of the product s features require a user to view small text and or graphics Handbook AS 508 A Self Contained Closed Products Accessibility Questions Appendix 9 A Standard Questions to Ask Notes Is at least one mode of operation and information retrieval provided that does not require user hearing Where audio information is important for the use of the product is at least one mode of operation and information retrieval provided in an enhanced auditory fashion Is at least one mode of operation and information retrieval provided that does not require user speech Is at least one mode of operation and information retrieval provided that does not require fine motor control or simultaneous actions and that is operable with limited reach and strength Subpart D Information Documentation and Support Product support documentation provided to end users must be made available in alternate formats upon
386. rstood software developers are responsible for helping the screen reader understand the screen For instance a mouse can be used with a piece of software but blind users do not use mice They need another method to understand the functions of a toolbar radio buttons push buttons drop down menus Or pop up messages explaining the function of an icon Since several different programming languages are used in software and operating system coding specific code examples and techniques cannot be provided The main goal of this chapter is to help developers create software applications that recognize and maximize the capabilities of the accessibility features installed and activated by a user e g native hardware and operating system features or installed assistive technologies aids Developers are required to make specific applications compliant with Section 508 by developing their own methods and approaches that result in compliant software There are two main ways to do this First the developer can make the software application accessible using the native operating system accessibility features or second the developer can make the application compatible with assistive technologies Section 3 3 Assistive Technologies lists the assitive technologies with which software applications must be tested with in the postal computing environment General Requirements Accessibility is accomplished by designing software that accommodates the wide
387. rtable Document Format PDF Files September 2004 6 14 1 On Postal Service Internet and Intranet sites all portable document format PDF files must have an additional alternate accessible format posted for use by the public and employees Rationale PDF files may be completely or partially inaccessible to a screen reader or may be read in an illogical order by a screen reader Posting an alternate format or access method along with the PDF is the only way to ensure accessibility An accessible PDF file uses tags to make the content of a character based document available to a screen reader Tags define the logical structure of the character based document such as titles headings paragraphs tables etc The underlying process of tagging a PDF file is similar to tagging an HTML or XML file Original source files must be accessible before the conversion process begins or the resulting PDF will likely be inaccessible The accessible tagged PDF file must be used with the accessible version of Adobe Acrobat Reader and a Microsoft Active Accessibility MSAA compliant screen reader such as JAWS 141 6 14 2 142 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 6 142 Techniques There are four basic steps to generating accessible tagged PDF files a Adocuments origin may be an original source file a PDF file character based or image based or a paper document Each of these requires different procedures However all of the procedur
388. rtfolio Manager own Functional Organization Client support Business Solution Services IBSSCs support Development Teams and Vendors support Functional Organization Client own Contracting Officer own IT Portfolio Manager own Development Teams amp Vendors support System Documentation Caretaker support Functional Organization Client own IT Portfolio Manager own System Documentation Caretaker support 31 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 4 6 About Exceptions and Undue Burden 32 4 6 1 4 6 2 There are three types of exceptions that can be invoked and still achieve Section 508 compliance The three types general exceptions specific exceptions and undue burdens are described below These exemptions exist for different reasons and may be invoked at different stages of the procurement or development cycle see exhibits 4 5 1 and 4 5 2 Some technology solutions are inherently exempt by nature of the technology use These are general exceptions and involve such fields as military security or other areas of national defense General Exceptions The determination of a general exception is based on how the EIT is to be used General exceptions are typically identified very early in the process General exceptions include a Purchases of EIT required for national security as described in the Electronic and Information Technology Accessibility Standards 36 CFR Section
389. s m Documentation available only in print i Documentation available only in proprietary electronic formats E Multimedia information that does not include an accessible and appropriate audio channel m Graphics and diagrams that do not include text based alternate descriptions E People who have dexterity or mobility impairments are typically faced with challenges such as m Navigation of graphical information systems that rely on mouse input E Lack of timeout controls and saving of user input upon timeout in IVR and interactive forms E Lack of error recovery features 11 15 General Requirements Accessibility is accomplished not only by purchasing or developing compliant products that accommodate the widest range of users but also by insuring that the information documentation and support services for the products are also compliant Listed below are some general requirements that will help the Postal Service ensure continued accessibility of both purchased and developed EIT information documentation and support B The Postal Service will procure products and systems with documentation and support that are accessible to the users of the system These users may be Postal Service employees who access the system or customers who will interact with the system or its developed outputs 279 11 1 6 11 1 6 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide i The Postal Service will develop products and systems that have accessibl
390. s Touchscreens or contact sensitive controls often provide no tactile cues so they require the user to be able to see the areas of the screen in order to activate a touch control People with visual impairments cannot locate the areas of the touchscreen to activate the controls In addition since touch operated controls often require physical body contact people with various disabilities may not be able to operate the control Techniques Ensure That Users Can Locate Keys By Touch Without Activating Them Ensure that individual keys are tactilely discernable without activating the controls or keys Tactilely discernable means that the keys are locatable and distinguishable from the product surface and adjacent keys by touch through use of various shapes spacing or tactile markings The normal desktop computer 263 10 2 2 2 264 10 2 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide keyboard for example would meet this provision because the tactile marks on the j and P keys permit a user to locate all other keys tactilely from these landmarks and the edges of the keyboard In addition the physical spacing of the function num pad and cursor keys make them easy to locate by touch Many telephones also have a raised dot on the number 5 button enabling them to orient their fingers around the 12 keys Because touch is necessary to discern tactile features this provision requires keyboards to allow exploration by touch t
391. s The user could also select the Move menu item by selecting the M key which is indicated as a keyboard equivalent here Notepad Serr Figure A Selecting items in an active window s menu using the keyboard Figure B shows an example of selecting text using the keyboard ina POSTALEASE text editor program The user can hold the SHIFT key down and press the ARROW keys to select contiguous characters near the text input cursor Oo vau know your Postal AS E FI health benefits open season Nov The user can also press CTRL SHIFT ARROW keys to highlight one enrollment vou need to use Posta l T word at a time Pressing CTRL A will select all text in the active And to use PostalEASE you neeg window If you don t know your PIN dant p Information Enclosed Many empl date Figure B Selecting text using the keyboard Ele Edit View Insert Format Figure C shows an example of the Copy function being accessed D g O Undo Borders and shading and selected from the Edit drop down menu in a word processing AT 5 Repeat Borders and Shading software application This menu has been accessed using d X ot techniques described in Section 5 2 2 1 Final Copy In addition to being accessed via the Edit menu the Copy Eh office Clipboard function can be accessed using its standard keyboard equivalent for A Paste the Windows Operating System CTRL C which has been di
392. s a thru e Summary Technology The requirements in this chapter cover the following All mission critical video and multimedia products and productions used by the Postal Service as defined by the Access Board regardless of size or whether purchased or developed internally Multimedia is defined by the Access Board as including more than one medium or sensory mode like a VHS or streaming Web video since it includes both audio and visual elements The multimedia must also be both of the following E A production as it must be intended for broadcast rebroadcast or multiple viewings E Helated to the mission of the organization i e it must be considered mission critical All associated data information training material and documents related to those mission critical video and multimedia productions Multimedia elements that are part of a live presentation For example a video presented during a graphics slideshow would need to comply with the specific requirements in this chapter The presentation equipment often must comply with either Chapter 9 Self Contained Closed Products or Chapter 10 Desktop and Portable Computers Elements that use only one sensory mode e g a graphical animation that does not contain any audio or an audio file that does not contain or synchronize with any visual content Such elements often qualify as non text elements Based on the mode of delivery e g Web 201 8 1 2 2
393. s checkboxes list boxes drop down menus push buttons etc C Document which form user interface elements inputs and controls are not accessible via the screen reader including names content attributes and cursor location d For the form user interface elements inputs and controls in question fix then retest using this procedure Conduct a manual inspection of the electronic form to verify keyboard access Unplug or disable all input devices except the keyboard then attempt to access complete review revise and submit the electronic form using only the keyboard Standard keyboard equivalents should be used where possible but if nonstandard keyboard equivalents are used they must be communicated to the user via the application s user assistance Whether using standard or nonstandard keyboard equivalents the following keyboard operations should be tested a If menus are included in the electronic form navigate to display and select each menu and menu item with keyboard equivalents This includes the menu bar and context sensitive menus b If toolbars are included in the electronic form access and select all functions provided on toolbars via redundant menu items or using keyboard equivalents CG Move the focus between any windows sections panes and modeless dialogs using standard keyboard equivalents d Navigate logically to every control in the electronic form windows and dialogs and operate all controls u
394. s in this chapter 259 10 1 2 2 260 10 1 2 2 10 1 3 10 1 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Audience This chapter applies to anyone who buys or develops desktop mobile or portable computer hardware products for the Postal Service i e Postal oervice employees suppliers contractors and business partners Desktop mobile and portable computer products range from traditional desktop computers to portable tablet computers and PDAs Structure and Use Each part of this chapter describes the specific requirements that support one or more provisions in the technical standards for desktop and portable computers The technical standards of Section 508 were written primarily from a technology perspective The Postal Service may consolidate some provisions to help Postal Service employees and business partners understand Postal Service compliance requirements from the perspective of designing for accessibility Each specific requirement includes a rationale techniques testing methods and references as shown below in section 10 2 10 1 Overview Mechanical or Touch Operated Controls Keys and Touch Screens Provisions 1194 26a and 1194 26b m Rationale E Techniques E Testing m References Biometric User Identification and Controls Provision 1194 26c Industry Standard Expansion Slots Ports and Connectors Provision 1194 26d Appendix 10 A Checklist Introduction to Desktop and Portable Computer
395. s with disabilities to have equivalent access to Postal Service information and interactive services comparable to that of persons without disabilities except in the event of exceptions or undue burdens as covered by Section 508 1 2 History of Section 508 1 21 Development of the Law September 2004 In 1986 Congress amended the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 to require Federal agencies and the Postal Service to make their electronic and information technology EIT accessible to people with disabilities Just as public buildings must be accessible e g entry and use by people in wheelchairs information technology must be designed and created so that people with disabilities can access the content of information systems Congress amended Section 508 to define specific standards to make information technology accessible These standards ensure that Postal oervice employees and customers with disabilities have access to information and data 1 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 1 22 Structure of the Law Technical Standards and Functional Performance Criteria Section 508 includes six technical standards with associated provisions and functional performance criteria These technical standards are defined in terms of classes of technology These standards are software applications and operating systems Web based intranet and internet information and applications telecommunications products video and multimedia products se
396. scription Requirements Requirements Must provide real time captioning services or alternate format access method Closed captioning preferred but open captioning OK If closed captioning provided must be user selectable Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Alternate Formats amp Access Methods Must provide real time audio description or alternate format access method Optional provide if needed or for replay Closed audio description preferred but open audio description OK If closed audio description provided must be user selectable Optional provide if needed Handbook AS 508 A 9 Self Contained Closed Products 9 1 Overview September 2004 9 1 1 Contents This chapter contains the specific electronic and information technology EIT performance requirements related to the following subpart of Section 508 EIT Technical Standard 1194 25 Self Contained Closed Products Provisions a thru j Summary Technology The term self contained is used to define a class of information technology Unlike personal computers which can have assistive technology installed closed products can be accessible only if they have been designed to be accessible by people with limited vision mobility or hearing The requirements in this chapter cover the following E Any products or systems that do not permit end user installed assistive technologies Such products often involve input
397. se settings are located in the operating system s accessibility features display appearance or both g Replace any problematic combinations with combinations that provide sufficient contrast i e combinations that differ significantly in hue intensity and value September 2004 73 5 8 3 5 8 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide References u Web Computer Color Chart for the Color Blind htto www toledo bend com colorblind colortable html m Considering the Color Blind Web Techniques http www webtechniques com archives 2000 08 newman H Microsoft Developer Network Can Color Blind People See Your Site htto msdn microsoft com library default asp url library en us dnhess html hess 1 0092000 asp a Human Computer Interaction Resource Network Color Vision Deficiencies http www hcirn com atoz atozc cvd php Note Postal Service developers and purchasing agents are strongly urged to obtain updated references for application or operating system accessibility references when designing or purchasing Postal Service applications 5 9 Animation o 9 1 74 When animation is displayed the information must be displayable in at least one nonanimated presentation mode at the option of the user Section 508 Provision 81194 21h Rationale Animations that are controlled and displayed by software applications or operating systems e g animated push button controls or status indicators are difficult for a
398. sed products each new development provides an opportunity to demonstrate the Postal Service s intent to provide the most accessible solution Accessibility experts and representatives of the disability community are a resource that can vastly enhance the designs of engineers and solution architects Finally Postal Service employees are required to register certain software applications and operating systems in the Enterprise Information Repository EIR http eir This information will be used to report compliance and includes any related Section 508 noncompliance issues September 2004 235 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 9 1 6 Testing for Compliance When testing self contained closed products for compliance it is crucial to be aware of the end user environment This includes an understanding of the product s stated accessibility features in the context of Postal Service use Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by disabled users Automated testing tools or integrated development environment IDE features useful in open environments are of little value for closed products Simulation of use by people with disabilities provides the clearest indication of accessibility 9 2 Usability Without Assistive Technology 236 9 2 2 9 2 2 1 Self contained products must be usable by people with disabilities without requiring an end user to attach assis
399. sers can see the progress via the animated progress bar the rectangular bar shown in the middle of this dialog with solid squares inside it There is also an animation that depicts information moving from the Internet represented by the world icon to a folder on the user s hard drive 5 9 2 2 September 2004 Offer User Preferences for Animation Because animated UI elements can interfere with activated accessibility features of the operating system or with assistive technologies operating systems or software applications must provide an option to disable the animated elements i e a preference setting Ensure that alternate formats or alternate access methods are available when animated Ul elements are disabled see Technique above For more information refer to Section 5 3 Activated Accessibility Features 75 5 9 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 5 9 2 2 Examples of Offering User Preferences for Disabling Animations Internet Options Some examples of offering a user preference option for disabling animations General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Figure A shows the Internet Options for the Microsoft Internet Explorer Web browser application This operating system level control panel allows the user to set Internet related options for security privacy connection helper applications and advanced options Included in the Advanc
400. settings a Access the operating system display preferences and select values for various individual display attributes e g large fonts nonstandard foreground background window element colors and high contrast b Navigate the software application manually or using a test suite through usage scenarios that cover all core functionality for the software application G As you do verify that the operating system level display settings are maintained i e color contrast background patterns fonts and font sizes for windows menus toolbars icons standard controls and display resolution If the application supports a magnification or zoom function verify that the display settings are maintained while being magnified d Note and document any user interface elements or areas of the application that disable or change the display attributes without selection by user e If the application offers nonstandard display settings verify that a Use oystem Display Settings option is available Also verify that the application offers at least three custom display settings that provide high contrast and at least one custom display setting that provides a soft background with low contrast f Ensure that problematic color combinations green and red green and blue red and brown and white and light green are not used Check the combinations used by setting the operating system or monitor display settings to high contrast Often the
401. settings a variety of color selections capable of producing a range of contrast levels must be provided Section 508 81194 21g and 81194 21j Animation When animation is displayed the information must be displayable in at least one non animated presentation mode at the option of the user Section 508 1194 21h Color Coding Operating systems and software applications must not use color as the only means of conveying information indicating an action prompting a response or distinguishing a visual element Section 508 81194 211 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Comments Handbook AS 508 A ooftware Applications and Operating Systems Accessibility Checklist Appendix 5 A Requirement Number and Summary Yes No or N A Comments 10 Video Frequency Software must not use flashing or blinking text objects or other user interface elements having a flash or blink frequency greater than 2 Hertz Hz and lower than 55 Hz If provided offer a way to change the frequency or disable flashing altogether Section 508 81194 21k 11 Forms When a form is included in software application the form must allow people using assistive technology to access the information controls i e input fields checkboxes radio buttons or push buttons and functionality required for completion review revision and submission of the form including all directions and cues Section 508 81194 211 September 2004 95 96
402. sing standard keyboard equivalents Conduct a manual inspection of the electronic form with and without assistive technology to verify that the on screen focus is well defined a Using only the keyboard and keyboard equivalents navigate through the electronic form user interface i e windows menus toolbars and controls to ensure that the focused object is tracked and that an Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 12 4 September 2004 5 12 4 e appropriate operating system standard cursor or highlight element is displayed for the various focused objects Use a screen reader to navigate through the electronic form user interface i e windows menus toolbars controls to ensure that the focused object is tracked and that appropriate object information is read by the screen reader for the various focused objects When the focus is on the object or control the assistive technology should be able to access and state the object label name its type role its state cursor position and its content or current value Use a screen magnifier to navigate through the electronic form user interface i e windows menus toolbars or controls to ensure that the focused object is tracked and that an appropriate operating system standard cursor is displayed for the various focused objects Note any object for which focus is not tracked for which object name role state cursor position and value is not
403. sion media players or a Web based presentation you must do the following Make sure that the information technology used to display the video or multimedia production offers a feature that allows the user to turn the captions on and off independently This feature must be documented and communicated to the user Handbook AS 508 A Video and Multimedia Products 8 6 4 m Make sure that the controls provided to turn captions on and off whether hardware or software comply with other specific requirements found in other chapters of this handbook E If the captions cannot be turned on and off if the controls used to do so are not compliant with applicable requirements in other chapters of this handbook or the feature is not documented and communicated use a different information technology to deliver the production or author and encode open captioning in the video or multimedia production before distributing it see sections 8 4 2 2 and 8 4 2 4 If the production is an audio described video or multimedia production that can be viewed by an individual user regardless of the display mechanism e g Postal Service television IP based television media players or a Web based presentation you must do the following u Make sure that the information technology used to display the video or multimedia production offers a feature that allows the user to turn the audio descriptions on and off independently This feature must be
404. sion is also consistent with the Telecommunications Act Accessibility Guidelines Hequirement 3 states that if key repeat is supported the delay before repeat must be adjustable to at least 2 seconds Key repeat rate must be adjustable to 2 seconds per character This requirement addresses a challenge encountered by some people without fine motor coordination Sometimes they accidentally don t release a key fast enough and get several auto repeated characters when they only intended to type 1 because the key repeat was faster than they can move This could potentially result in the same character displaying several times on the screen It could also result in the same function repeating e g causing the telephone volume to get too high The key repeat requirement only applies to controls that have a key repeat function Requirement 4 states that the status of all locking or toggle controls or keys e g caps lock scroll lock etc must be visually discernible and discernible either through touch or sound For example adding audio patterns such as ascending and descending pitch tones that indicate when a conirol is turned on or off would alleviate the problem of a person who is blind inadvertently pressing the locking or toggle controls Also buttons which remain depressed when activated and switches with distinct positions may meet this provision Requirement 5 addresses the specific challenges of touchscreen interface
405. spection or tool based testing methods may not be available for the specific requirements described in this chapter In lieu of standard testing methods Postal Service employees and representatives must ensure compliance with the techniques stated in the specific requirements as applicable Automated testing tools and methods may be available over time but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing For example a developer can use a development tool to test for valid syntax e g using an accessibility checker within a multimedia authoring program but a manual inspection must still be done to validate semantics and proper rendering In other words the meaningfulness of the captions or audio descriptions must also be considered for the end user who may have a physical disability and who may use assistive technology In many cases raw videotaped footage does not have to be captioned or audio described For example raw videotaped footage used to document a safety violation could be considered a video in support of the Postal Service s mission If the footage is used in a production however such as a Web based presentation or training video it does have to be captioned or audio described Handbook AS 508 A Video and Multimedia Products 8 1 6 September 2004 amp 16 Alternate Formats Alternate Access Methods and Reasonable Accommodation When compliance cannot be achieved using the techniques described in this
406. splayed Paste Special in the menu in addition to the menu item text Copy and the icon E that symbolizes the function Clear Select All l d Find Replace GoTo Figure C Accessing an Edit Copy function from a menu 46 Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 2 2 6 Exhibit 5 2 2 5 Examples of Keyboard Access to Commonly Used Functions p 2 Figure D shows an example of resizing a graphic using a mouse Here a user clicks on the graphic to select it then clicks and drags one of the control handles shown here in black on the border of the graphic Figure D Resizing a graphic using a mouse CURSUS Figure E Shows an example of resizing this graphic the same one shown in Figure D using a keyboard accessible control 3 Actual Size chen SRE ence Although the process for resizing is different the functionality Width provided is equivalent the size change is reflected in the software Height application regardless of whether the mouse or the keyboard accessible control was used Actual Size Buen svi Width 157 Height 25 Figure E Resizing the graphic shown in Figure D using a keyboard accessible control 5 226 Support Latched and Locked Keyboard Access Support keyboard equivalents that use operating system accessibility features that rely on latched and locked modifier keys e g StickyKeys on the Windows platform Deve
407. spot areas Section 508 Provision 1194 22f Rationale Screen readers cannot read images However image maps can be made accessible if a descriptive text equivalent is provided for each hot spot area A client side image map contains all of the information about the image map It is stored within the HTML document and interpreted through the browser The server side image map is external to the HTML document A server side image map requires a script on a Web server that identifies the hot spots and their corresponding uniform resource locators URL When a server side image map is used browsers cannot indicate to the user which URL will be followed when a region of the map is activated 117 6 6 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 6 6 2 Techniques Use the alt attribute within the lt IMG gt and AREA tags to provide a descriptive text equivalent for all hot spot areas of a client side image map Exhibit 6 6 2a Example of a Client Side Image Map Figure A Client side image map The following graphic is a screen shot of an image map The code for this client side image map immediately follows the screen shot ri t au Bo 5 ir mi a E am pi r 1 z L amp ee M M N Figure B HTML code for Figure A a href worldmap map gt img src worldmap gif width 180 height 100 alt World Map border 0 usemap worldmap
408. sraon eeaeee E EEE eae rA EEEE qx 5 11 1 Rationale MT Alke WeCNRIGUCS as aeg E rdicp UC ORE T E RUDSE GUERRE AERE GE io 8 eeraa aoa aeoea 5 11 2 1 Use Only Acceptable Flashing and Contrast Ranges 5 11 83 Testing 0 0 ccc ccc cece eee memes eaa ne nen nns 5 11 4 References 0 cee nnn n ren 5 12 Forms 1 ce eee ete eee ees Dues Rationale russes eee das nod nc etedo end erba weeded ceed aes vi Handbook AS 508 A Contents 5 12 2 Techniques 00 c cece ccc Ih ees 5 12 2 1 Provide Textual Information About Controls 00 ccc cece eee eee 5 12 2 2 Provide Keyboard Access to Controls 0 ccc ce ee 5 12 2 3 Expose On Screen Input Focus 0 00 e eee eee eee eens 5 12 2 4 Associating Labels with Controls llle 5 12 2 5 User Response Time and Timeouts 000 c cece cece eee 5 12 2 6 Support User Scanning of Forms and Confirmation of Input 5 12 2 7 DYNAMIC FormS uix ce Ruhk cet caw ee xn geben maru ee oe coe ew eee o nr s oo E oe ee ee ee EO NS id ee ee 5 12 4 References 0 0 ccc cece cece hh e nn bene ene nes Appendix 5 A Software Applications and Operating Systems Accessibility Checklist 2 0 2 2 000 c ccc cece IHR n Appendix 5 B Summary of Software Applications and Operating Systems Testing Methods 0 0 cece eee a 6 Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 1 Qu wo pect ores
409. ssistive listening devices and other types of hearing technologies These technologies pick up radio frequency signals that are radiated from digital wireless cellular telephones antennas using energy pulses that the hearing instrument circuitry picks up and demodulates as audible interference In addition magnetic fields generated by handset components such as battery leads may cause noise when hearing technology wearers are using the telecoil to couple inductively to the handset Many hearing technology users therefore hear significant buzzing or pounding sounds that may completely mask the speech of a call and make the wireless digital telephone unusable for voice conversations Some hearing technologies are more immune to interference than others Some digital wireless cellular telecommunications transmission technologies cause more annoying interference than others For example code division multiple access CDMA based technologies generally cause less bothersome interference in hearing aids than global system for mobile communications GSM technologies Compatibility ideally means that the hearing instrument and telecommunications product function well as a system That may require meeting both the magnetic coupling requirement and this minimized interference requirement Previously in the 1980s when the Federal Communications Commission FCC referred to hearing aid compatibility HAC it meant only magnetic coupling Provisio
410. ssistive technology to interpret They can therefore pose serious problems for users that rely on screen readers or other assistive technology ooftware applications and operating systems must ensure that animated user interface elements are displayable in at least one nonanimated presentation mode To do so applications must offer a disable feature or an alternate format or access method for all animated user interface elements This guideline pertains to animated user interface elements displayed or controlled by the software application or operating system Additional guidelines that relate to animation are in Chapter 6 Web Based Intranet and Chapter 8 Internet Information and Applications and Video and Multimedia Products Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 9 2 2 592 Techniques 5 9 2 1 Exhibit 5 9 2 1 Provide Alternate Formats or Access Methods for Animated Elements When operating systems or software applications use animated user interface elements to convey meaning they must offer nonanimated alternate formats that provide equivalent information e g user visible or programmatically accessible textual information Decorative animated user interface elements e g visual transition effects or menu animation do not require an alternate format if they are not used to convey meaning If animated user interface elements are used as a control or as an access method e g the Microsof
411. st be defined fully Three other actions must occur a The documentation must be summarized in the database s that track Postal Service compliance e g EIR ITK ADEPT etc to facilitate accurate reporting to the Department of Justice on a periodic basis b Analternate means must be provided to allow people with disabilities to access the functions or information c A plan must be defined for future reevaluation and eventual full compliance e g newer releases of the software or selection of a more compliant product that provides the same business solution The plan should specify reevaluation dates 4 10 Preparing Undue Burden Justification Undue burden justification is required when the EIT purchase meets the conditions stated in section 4 6 3 The rationale for such a determination must be based on the fact that purchase of the most compliant EIT would constitute an undue burden to the Postal Service The undue burden justification documentation addresses why and to what extent compliance with each applicable provision of Section 508 creates an undue burden An undue burden justification template is provided in appendix 4 Ajof this chapter The requiring organization must complete the template and include sufficient detail to establish that an undue burden exists The contracting office must retain a copy of the documentation with the necessary approvals in the contract file 34 Handbook AS 508 A Appendix 4 A Tem
412. st range of users including those with disabilities Listed below are some general requirements that will help the Postal Service ensure continued accessibility of software applications and operating systems E The Postal Service should develop and procure software applications that take advantage of hardware and operating system built in accessibility features when those features are available to both end users and software developers u The Postal Service will maintain standards for the following categories of assistive technologies that people with disabilities use to access software applications and operating systems u Screen magnifiers Help visually impaired people by allowing them to enlarge any part of the screen i e as with a magnifying glass E Screen readers Help people who are blind by making on screen information available as synthesized speech or for display as refreshable Braille 39 5 1 5 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Voice input aids Help mobility or dexterity impaired people by allowing them to control the computer with their voice instead of with a mouse or keyboard On screen keyboards Help people who are unable to use a standard keyboard by providing an on screen keyboard that can be used with a pointing device Keyboard filters Help people who have trouble typing by compensating for erratic motion tremors or slow response time Alternative input devices Help people who would prefer to
413. t including upgrades determine how the system provides caller ID information to the customer premises eEquipment CPE d For either kind of product equipment if the Caller ID or other function information is time sensitive as it is with Caller ID check to see that the information is immediately available to the user without requiring user action to access 175 7 6 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 764 References The following references apply to the specific requirements stated here m Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Guide to Section 508 Telecommunications http Wwww trace wisc edu docs 2002 508 collation index shtml style default telecomm E Microsoft Telephony Application Programming Interfaces TAPI TSPI MSPI htto msdn microsoft com library default asp url library en us ananchor html tapitspimspi asp 7 7 Volume Control For transmitted voice signals telecommunications products that provide telephone functions must provide a gain adjustable up to a minimum of 20 dB For incremental volume control at least one intermediate step of 12 dB of gain must be provided 1194 23 Provision f 771 Rationale People with hearing loss generally require additional volume to hear effectively A user may not be able to understand speech at default volume levels This provision enables people who are hard of hearing to increase their telephone volume gain to maximize their residual hearing Many pe
414. t Windows Office Assistant described in exhibit 5 9 2 2 the operating system or software application must offer an alternate access method For example the Microsoft Windows Office Assistant described inJexhibit 5 9 2 2 offers a redundant way to access the main help system that can also be accessed by pressing the F1 key or by selecting from the Help menu Example of Alternate Formats or Access Methods for Animated Elements 27 of pub223 pdf Completed Saving pub223 pdf from www usps com BEgBHEEHHSEHH Estimated time left 6 sec 208 KB of 1 50 MB copied Download to C Documents and Settin pub223 pdf Transfer rate 205 KB Sec d pen pen Bolder Cancel A screen reader user hears the progress percentage as this window updates the textual information shown in the window title and next to the Estimated time left element This text is updated constantly as the system redraws the progress bar and serves as an alternate format for the information conveyed by it The Download to element is an acceptable alternate format for the animation depicting the transfer of information from the Internet to the hard drive folder An example of providing alternate formats for animated user interface elements This figure shows a dialog window that communicates progress towards completion of a download from a Web browser application This window is frequently invoked when users download files from the Internet Sighted u
415. t and not the information the user wants to reference Additional problems include effectively disabling the back button on users browsers disabling printing of content only one of the frames prints lack of indexing by search engines and frames can be inaccessible to users of screen magnification software and some hand held devices 6 8 2 2 Provide Frame Titles Provide meaningful tit e attributes for each lt FRAMESET gt and lt FRAME gt tag The titles must describe the content of the frame page and individual frame HTML Code for Frames lt html gt lt head gt lt titlesUSPS lt head gt lt frameset c documents gt lt frame src lt frame src lt noframes gt lt noframes gt lt frameset gt lt html gt lt frame src Select to go to an index of the Company s Web site lt a gt Electronic Documents lt title gt ols 10 10 809 title Our library of electronic logo html1 title Company logo trame navigation html title navigation frame gt maincontent html title Company main content gt a href companyindex html title Company index gt September 2004 127 6 8 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Use Valid HTML 4 01 Frameset DTD HTML 4 01 specifies three document type definition DTDs with one specifically for Framesets Authors must include the following document type declarations in their frame documents lt
416. t services are clearly communicated b For support services delivered via the Web or Internet adhere to the requirements for Web based information stated in chapter 6 Web or internet based support services can include but are not limited to FAQs searchable knowledge bases downloads and updates interactive forms chat subscriptions online events training courses and newsgroups C For support services delivered using telecommunications products or services including live support or IVR adhere to the requirements for telecommunications products stated in chapter 7 d Regardless of delivery method use the functional performance criteria found in section 4 2 1 to ensure that the support services can be accessed by people with limited vision hearing speech or mobility Handbook AS 508 A Information Documentation and Support 11 4 4 e If an exception was taken for a product whose support services are not fully accessible define and clearly communicate the appropriate alternate formats or access methods that will be used to provide equivalent access to people with disabilities who can not readily use the product support services 11 44 References The following reference applies to the specific requirements stated in this section E Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Equivalent Facilitation http www access board gov sec508 guide scope htmZEquivalent 620 Facilitation
417. t system as well Such users may not be able to see the display of that information 1194 23 Provision e Volume Control For transmitted voice signals telecommunications products that provide telephone functions must provide a gain adjustable up to a minimum of 20 dB For incremental volume control at least one intermediate step of 12 dB of gain must be provided 1194 23 Provision f Automatic Volume Reset If a telecommunications product that provides telephone functions allows a user to adjust the receive volume a function must be provided to automatically reset the volume to the default level after every use 81194 23 Provision g September 2004 199 Appendix 7 A Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 200 Yes No Requirement Number and Summary or N A Comments Hearing Aid Compatibility Where a telecommunications product delivers output by an audio transducer that is normally held up to the ear a means for effective magnetic wireless coupling to hearing technologies must be provided 81194 23 Provision h Minimized Interference Interference with hearing technologies including hearing aids cochlear implants and assistive listening devices must be reduced to the lowest possible level that allows a user of hearing technologies to use the telecommunications product 81194 23 Provision i Transmission Conducting Information Products that transmit or conduct information or communication must pass through cross m
418. tant information the folder names that contain the unread messages i e Deleted Items boldfaced text message preview area shown in the lower right Inbox are also shown in September 2004 5 103 Testing Manual inspection based testing using the methods described in this chapter must accompany any automated tests Some of these manual tests may be automated using testing tools or Integrated Development Environment IDE features as long as testing occurs in the context of usage by assistive technology users Conduct a manual inspection of the operating system or software application without assistive technology to verify that critical information or calls to action are conveyed without dependence on color alone a Navigate through the operating system or software application through usage scenarios that cover all core functionality for the system or application Identify user interface elements that use color to convey meaning indicate an action prompt a response e g error messages or distinguish an important visual event Include elements that change color based on some event e g a new e mail message is red when unread and then changes to black when read Ensure that for all elements that use color to convey critical information or meaning there is an alternate method used to convey the same information that does not rely on color e g user visible or programmatically accessible textual info
419. tatus indicators for locking or toggle controls or keys Keys controls and switches Lack of error recovery features Reliance on voice or manual input 10 15 Testing for Compliance When testing desktop and portable computer products for compliance it is crucial to be aware of the end user environment This includes an understanding of product s stated accessibility features in addition to methods the products uses for input and output Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools or integrated development environment IDE features may help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing September 2004 261 10 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 10 2 Mechanical or Touch Operated Controls Keys and Touch Screens Desktop and portable computer products that have mechanically operated controls and keys must comply with the following requirements a Controls and keys must be tactilely discernible without activating the controls or keys b Controls and keys must be operable with one hand and must not require tight grasping pinching or twisting of the wrist The force required to activate controls and keys must be 5 Ibs 22 2 N maximum C If key repeat is supported the delay before repeat must be adjustable to at least 2 seconds Key repeat rate must be adjust
420. technique an initial message starts with a HD or HLD in Baudot to tell TTY users to hold After this the voice message plays followed by a 5 second pause during which the hearing caller should enter a key to enter the message tree After the pause and voice message to the hearing caller the voice message is repeated in TTY tones The hearing caller is thus routed to the audio messaging system and the TTY caller to the TTY messaging system This setup would need to be designed to minimize delay in the sending of an initial TTY greeting or TTY users will not recognize that they have called anything other than an exclusively voice based system 7 4 2 2 VRs Must Offer Access In a Way That Does Not Require User Speech IVRs that use speech recognition features must offer at least one mode of operation and information retrieval that does not require user speech or they must offer support for assistive technology used by people with disabilities For example speech enabled IVRs can ask users to speak an account or employee ID number or enter it using the telephone keys September 2004 167 7 4 2 3 168 7 4 2 3 7 4 2 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Notify User When Touch Tone Response Is Required Communicate clear requirements to the user for entering DTMF responses e g touch tones Interactive voice response systems often require a user to enter DTMF tones to access a customer service line e g enter th
421. ted accessibility features or assistive technology to process the change If this is not possible the software application must provide an alternate method to indicate the image change i e use of a dialog window with accessible textual information that communicates the change Exhibit 5 5 2 4 Example of How to Make Changed Images Accessible An example of making changed image information 27 of pub223 pdf Completed accessible This figure shows a dialog window that communicates progress toward completion of a nis download from a Web browser application This pubzz3 pdf from vwa usps cam FITTTTITITIT window is frequently invoked when users DE uc cH download files from the Internet and it receives Download to C Documents and Sektin pubzZ3 pdr i the on screen focus when the download is initiated Sighted users can see the progress via the graphical progress bar the rectangular bar shown in the middle of this dialog with solid squares inside it Transfer rate 205 KB 5ec pen Open Folder A user of a screen reader hears the progress percentage as this window updates the textual information Shown in the window title and next to the Estimated time left element This text is updated constantly as the system redraws the progress bar ensuring the accessibility of the progress information 60 Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 5 2 5 September 2004 5 25
422. tem on which it executes For example an application running on Microsoft Windows can provide all the graphical functionality that users have come to expect from the current generation of personal computers However if those same users operate their computers in MS DOS operating system mode they are restricted to a primarily character based environment with little graphical capabilities It is crucial to be aware of the software environment the user is accessing when considering review and accessibility compliance with Section 508 In addition it is important to be cognizant of the functionality available to users with disabilities via the accessibility aids available on the operating system in use Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools or integrated development environment IDE features can help automate these methods but automated testing must be accompanied by manual testing For example a developer can use IDE tools to test for valid syntax e g titling of all windows naming of all objects inclusion of alternative text or closing of tags but a manual inspection must still be done to validate semantics and proper rendering In other words the meaningfulness of the window titles or alternative text must also be considered for the end user who uses assistive technology 5 2 Keyboard Access September 2004 5 2
423. template for documenting undue burden is found injappendix 4 A 4 8 Roles and Responsibilities Chapter 2 of this handbook describes roles and responsibilities The officials named in Chapter 2 define what compliance means and evaluate compliance efforts in their respective areas of responsibility for the Postal Service The purchase development or maintenance of EIT occurs at the level of a specific functional organization At the functional level complex business needs often require multifaceted systems which span the technical areas of the law see section 4 2 4 above Consequently responsibility for evaluation of compliance for a complex solution may involve Postal Service personnel from the requiring organization business analysts portfolio managers etc Supply Management contracting officers the General Counsel s office and the Section 508 Program September 2004 33 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 4 9 Exception Documentation The purpose of exception documentation is to explain the business needs and to account for compliance of available solutions For General Exceptions a rare Postal Service need documentation will address one of the three valid reasons for such an exception For Undue Burden the exception report will require extensive documentation and will attract the attention of the Department of Justice see appendix 4 A For Specific Exceptions the reasons for the exception see section 4 6 2 mu
424. tems 5 1 QUI Ac H O 5 1 1 COMCIIS E E PUPPES PUSPTPUSEN P UTOUTIORIDOPEE CUSPE bene LUPENd E T USE S 5 1 2 SUMMA sx ood a gartonain debe wtntodd hehe ded cap hohe are ded da akoha gud n wade mios amid 5 1 2 1 TOGHNOIOOY exce uexrs domes danies dames tastes Seated seated heres wears EIUS ewe 5 1 2 2 PUIGICNCS bc cp yeu cee TOES OEDESqUEPE TES eles eeneee cise eases E TECELSAE S Handbook AS 508 A Contents 5 1 3 gruci and USG M m 5 1 4 Introduction to Software Accessibility llle 5 1 5 General Requirements 2 00 cc eee tenet tenes 5 1 6 Testing for Compliance 0 ccc eee ras 5 2 Keyboard Access 5 2 1 Rationale 5 2 2 Techniques 9 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 9 2 2 3 0 2 2 4 0 2 2 5 0 2 2 6 Provide Keyboard Access to Menus 0 000 ccc eee e eee eens Provide Keyboard Access to Toolbars 0 ccc ees Provide Keyboard Access to Window Elements 0000 eee eaes Provide Keyboard Access to Controls 0 ccc ccc eee eens Provide Keyboard Access to Commonly Used Functions Support Latched and Locked Keyboard Access 0000 eee eee ees 5 2 3 Testing 5 2 4 Heferences 5 3 Activated Accessibility Features eccle 5 3 1 Rationale 5 3 2 Techniques 9 3 2 1 9 3 2 2 9 3 2 3 9 3 2 4 Provide Operating System Accessibility Feat
425. ten integrated with these standards in order to ensure accessibility in self contained closed products standard kiosk shapes have been developed to meet appropriate reach specifications provision j Standards related to each specific requirement are shown in the References area under that requirement Where possible use standard hardware and software controls instead of custom controls These standard controls often already support product accessibility features Using them will often eliminate the need for additional configuration or programming to provide explicit accessibility support unless the behavior of the standard controls has been enhanced Full screen keyboards are well understood Many self contained closed products support the attachment of such input devices Telephone style key clusters are another de facto standard Provide flexibility in using a variety of input methods and output methods Many self contained closed products support only one mode of operation When such devices can be added to a network people with disabilities may be able to access these products from a personal computer that has assistive technology Consult with accessibility experts and representatives of the disability community when developing unique devices Assistive technology products for personal computers represent standard solutions to open products Since there are no comparable market tested standard solutions for self contained clo
426. teps lt h2 gt lt OL gt lt li gt Build XML Request lt a href Coding Process step 1 gt Review Coding Process step 1 lt a gt lt br gt lt li gt lt li gt Make Internet Connection to Server lt a href Coding Process step 2 gt Review Coding Process step 2 lt a gt lt li gt lt li gt Send XML Request lt a href Coding Process step 3 gt Review Coding Process step 3 lt a gt lt li gt lt li gt Unpack XML Response a href Coding Process step 4 gt Review Coding Process step 4 lt a gt lt li gt lt ol gt lt h2 gt lt a name Coding Process a Coding Process lt h2 gt eols lt li gt lt a name Coding Process step 1 a Cut amp amp Paste Code from the PDF File lt li gt s li a name Coding Process step 2 a Use HTTP Connection DLL or another interface lt li gt s lt li gt lt a name Coding Process step 3 a Cut amp amp Paste Code from this PDF File lt li gt lt li gt lt a name Coding Process step 4 a Cut amp amp Paste Code from this PDF File Use VB Example amp amp Decoding Example if necessary lt li gt lt ol gt lt body gt lt html gt 6 2 2 4 Use Descriptive Links Although using the ongdesc is the recommended approach another way to provide a more detailed description of an image is the description link D Link or D A D link is a link placed after the image itself to a page that describes the image In t
427. that provide telephone functions i e 2 way voice communication must minimize interference with hearing technologies to the lowest possible level that allows a user of hearing technologies to use telecommunications products while at the same time maintaining desired product performance The following practices may help manufacturers and developers to do so E Consider applying methodologies outlined in ANSI C63 19 2001 to inform the product design process ANSI C63 19 2001 provides procedures to measure electromagnetic emissions produced by wireless cellular handsets The ANSI standard provides two summary test results one for radio frequency emissions that create a buzzing noise in hearing aids primarily when they are in the microphone default setting and one for compatibility with the hearing aid s telecoil or similar assistive listening device component For each of these results there are four levels defined with category 4 being the best i e lowest emission category The FCC has set a minimum of category 3 for telephones that are to be considered and labeled as compatible with hearing aids rule goes into effect in 2005 Note that CDMA based technologies generally cause less bothersome interference in hearing aids than do GSM technologies m Consider applying information learned from the ICDR Summit on interference to hearing technologies see References In light of the FCC ruling mentioned above the Federal Inter
428. the Contacts py K M Deleted Items 8 z third pane the Message Preview window display pane H kd T et 4 shown in the lower right below the Message Listing Actions Help In Figure B the focus has been moved to the Message window display pane Pressing the F6 key again would US move the focus back to the Folder List window pane pane with focus highlighted Figure B The Message Listing window display shown in Figure A 5 2 2 4 44 Provide Keyboard Access to Controls Provide the ability to operate every control in application windows and dialogs using the keyboard and to navigate logically between controls Keyboard equivalents allow people to navigate between groups of controls such as index tabs and then select specific objects i e check boxes drop down selection or buttons by using a combination of ALT TAB CTRL TAB the F6 key and the ARROW keys Pressing ENTER and SPACEBAR are conventions for operating controls Design navigation between controls using a logical tab order so that the TAB key moves the keyboard focus from one control or item to the next Normally the tab order is from left to right and then top to bottom Allow users to scan the contents of application windows and dialogs before providing input by offering screen level validation instead of control level validation When control level input is required valid preselected default values prevent users
429. there are PDAs with telephone functionality and touchscreens as well as desk telephones with touchscreen enhanced features that cannot be operated via tactile controls Every attempt should be made to acquire technology that can comply with this requirement where possible and 193 7 12 2 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide practical Consider the following recommendations that support this requirement i Consider placing tactile marks on top of the keys not beside them and raising the marks a minimum of 0 5 mm m On telephone keypads the 5 key could have a tactile marker such as a nib or bar on the top surface m On QWERTY keyboards the F and J keys could have a raised bar on them m Recessed keys or keys with concave tops can be an aid to users operating them with a mouth stick or head stick Raised keys aid users with visual disabilities to locate keys E To help people with fine motor control problems a key guard or overlay option could be provided when practical m Making other important keys tactilely distinct shape size spacing tactile markings can make them easier to remember and find 7 12 2 2 Ensure That All Controls and Keys Are Easy to Use Ensure that all controls and keys can be activated with one hand using a maximum force of 5 Ibs 22 2 N and do not require tight grasping pinching or twisting of the wrist Adhere to the following recommendations that support this re
430. they are not using the recommended browser Using the commonly used standards and recommendations such as those created by the W3C is always preferred When creating scripts that detect specific browser versions ensure that you only identify user agent strings or browsers that you know do not function with the content of your Web page Do not require a specific browser for viewing the Web content The alternative format or access method must be used in addition to or in place of the primary Web content The alternate format must be equivalent to the primary Web source in both content and functionality and must be updated concurrently with the primary Web source Scripts Scripts that dynamically generate content that cannot be conveyed by assistive technology must have an equivalent alternate format or access method that can be read by assistive technology This is an issue primarily in client side scripting For example a script could dynamically generate drop down menus with hypertext links The script must follow the accessibility requirements to create descriptive text links using the TITLE attribute of the a href gt tag Do not use scripting to create graphics and menus that are inaccessible All scripts must follow the other requirements in this chapter Java Accessibility Accessibility enabled Java applications are not dependent on machines that require assistive technology support These applications will run on any Ja
431. time some telecommunications products with touchscreens and other contact sensitive controls do not conform with this provision For example there are PDAs with telephone functionality and touchscreens as well as desk telephones with touchscreen enhanced features that cannot be operated via tactile controls m Requirement 2 requires that controls and keys must be operable with one hand and must not require tight grasping pinching or twisting of the wrist Individuals with tremor cerebral palsy or other disabilities may have difficulty operating systems that require fine motor control a steady hand or require that two hands to be used simultaneously for operation Individuals with high spinal cord injuries arthritis and other conditions may have difficulty operating controls that require significant strength The requirement s force limit 5 pounds is based on section 4 27 4 of the ADA Accessibility Guidelines This provision is also consistent with the Telecommunications Act Accessibility Guidelines E Requirement 3 requires that if key repeat is supported the delay before repeat must be adjustable to at least 2 seconds Key repeat rate must be adjustable to 2 seconds per character This requirement addresses a challenge encountered by some people without fine motor coordination Sometimes they accidentally don t release a key fast enough and get several auto repeated characters when they only intended to type one because the key
432. ting them with a mouth stick or head stick Raised keys aid users with visual disabilities to locate keys E To help people with fine motor control problems a key guard or overlay option i e membrane could be provided when practical m Making other important keys tactilely distinct shape size spacing tactile markings can make them easier to remember and find Ensure That All Controls and Keys are Easy to Use Ensure that all controls and keys can be activated with one hand using a maximum force of 5 Ibs 22 2 N and do not require tight grasping pinching or twisting of the wrist Adhere to the following recommendations that support this requirement u Just as simultaneous two handed operation is prohibited multiple fingers and simultaneous operations of all types should be avoided and are prohibited by section 7 6 which prohibits simultaneous actions and applies to all products Handbook AS 508 A Desktop and Portable Computers 10 2 2 4 September 2004 10 2 2 3 10 2 2 4 E Using controls and latches which require light pressure to operate such as push buttons up down control buttons instead of side to side control buttons concave rocker switches or sliding controls would make it easier for users with different types of physical disabilities Hi It is recommended to avoid using controls that must be held down for a period of time if the period exceeds 5 seconds and there is no other way to achieve the functi
433. tion htto www tracecenter org world kiosks i Trace Research Center University of Wisconsin Ergonomics of a non visual touchscreen interface a case study htto trace wisc edu docs touchscreen_ergonomics2000 ergonomics htm This document provides information on touchscreen interfaces for people who are blind or have low vision m Tiresias International Information on Visual Disability guidelines for tactile identifiers on keys htto www tiresias org guidelines keys htm E Enable Tech Tools to Consider Keyboards http www enabletech ie Tools2 html Handbook AS 508 A Desktop and Portable Computers 10 3 2 10 3 Biometric User Identification and Controls September 2004 10 3 1 10 3 2 When biometric forms of user identification or control are used an alternative form of identification or activation which does not require the user to possess particular biological characteristics must also be provided 1194 26 Provision c Rationale Biometric controls refer to controls that are activated only if a particular biological feature of the end user exists and matches specific criteria e g voiceprint fingerprint retinal image Biometric controls are becoming more common as they can provide a high level of security or offer increased efficiencies in user interaction with computer systems Biometric controls are used for two primary purposes security i e user identification and authentication
434. tive receiver element located in a hearing aid It is activated either manually using a small switch located on the hearing aid or by using a remote control supplied with some hearing aids The input to the hearing aid will be through a magnetic field surrounding the telephone handset By using a T coil a hearing aid can receive the magnetic field and receive or demodulate the telephone speech from the signal The advantage of receiving the speech signal as a magnetic signal rather than an acoustic one is that there is no acoustic feedback or background noise to deal with This feature has made the T coil option very popular with some hearing aid users An estimated 20 percent of hearing aids in the U S are ordered with a T coil option This is what is meant by hearing aid compatibility HAC HAC is common in telephones due to the Hearing Aid Compatibility Act of 1988 which requires HAC in all essential wireline telephones That requirement is simply carried over to Section 508 181 7 9 2 182 7 9 2 7 9 2 1 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This concept is important because some people with severe hearing loss are able to use the telephone only if they couple the hearing aid inductively to the telephone It should not be assumed that a person who is hard of hearing will hear effectively with volume control alone The use of T coils has widened to other applications Some theaters and auditoriums have installed transmission lo
435. tive technology The use of equipment or systems which normally reside on the user s desktop to present text and data in a manner suitable to someone with a disability See above b Alternate formats The use of formats such as Braille ASCII text audio which can be used by people with disabilities Handbook AS 508 A Section 508 Overview of Accessibility 3 5 3 5 What is Compliance Compliance is defined as meeting the requirements set forth in the Section 508 Technical Standards and Functional Performance Criteria Proposed EIT solutions may fully comply best meet or not comply as defined below September 2004 a Fully complies An EIT product is fully compliant if the text or data it provides is accessible and usable by a person with disabilities in the manner the law requires and meets the Section 508 EIT Technical Standards and functional performance criteria Such compliance may or may not be enabled by the use of assistive technology or alternate formats or methods EIT built by the Postal Service should be fully compliant Best meets compliance Best meets applies only to EIT products that the Postal Service purchases A product best meets compliance requirements when it does not meet all relevant standards but is the most compliant product available at the time of purchase In that event the organization purchasing the product would do the following 1 Document the market research used to determine the
436. tive technology to the product Personal headsets for private listening are not assistive technology 81194 25 Provision a Rationale Self contained products unlike personal computers do not support assistive technology software Consequently unlike other provisions that allow a product to meet the standards by being compatible with assistive technology this provision requires self contained closed products to contain built in accessibility Most of the technical standards for Subpart B of the law 1194 21 Software applications and operating systems 1194 22 Web based Intranet and Internet information and applications 1194 24 Video and multimedia products to the extent that they are embedded in a Web page or application 1194 26 Desktop and portable computers assume that part of the solution to accessibility is the installation of assistive technology e g speech synthesis or voice recognition For people with disabilities to use self contained products the functionality of assistive technology must be an integral part of the design That is the functional performance criteria of Subpart C 1194 31 apply that input and output must be available for people with limited mobility hearing speech and vision A personal headset is considered a personal device for audio output since it is not considered installed assistive technology Headsets might be also used for privacy in addition to accessibility reasons Techniques
437. to be responsible for the multimedia stewardship 2 10 All Postal Service Officers All Postal Service officers do the following a September 2004 Designate a liaison to coordinate Section 508 activities within and among their respective organizations Champion Section 508 compliance within their organizations Fund the cost of compliance and litigation for their organizations 11 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide d Authorize exception or undue burden documents for the requiring functional organization if a solution is not completely Section 508 compliant see 2 11 All Functional Organizations Functional organizations have the responsibility and legal liability for Section 508 compliance This ensures all products including those a contractor develops or supplies in accordance with contract requirements comply with oection 508 Contracts should include requirements for contractors to comply and may include contractor responsibility for testing but acceptance of a product or service as compliant is the legal responsibility of the Postal Service All functional organizations that require EIT do the following a Follow the requirements of the law and of this handbook when they use develop procure or maintain EIT products and services b Hespond to Section 508 inquiries or complaints from the public according to 39 CFR 255 Access of Persons with Disabilities regarding EIT controlled by their functional org
438. to meet the provisions in this handbook Provide a text equivalent for animations using the alt attribute If a longer description is necessary use the ongdesc attribute or a D Link alternative 103 6 2 2 1 104 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 6 2 2 1 p 1 Example of Alternate Text for an Organization Chart ney Ht l Tial Rah paio Ko Leadership Team of the United States Postal Inspection Service August 2003 Epen map frein Ting ingarion i Cha Durs Fari ii APT ERIT M Hall ul Belz Y Abn A Bash ba rg ar Baim Harin 3 mt Limia irai K Jones R Dx Vacant Tem arae Daran Darm zu o NPE CAH c E Akim rm i D katt Mri hey eu on A Sara LE i MEE Firth I Cirio D Gol its A kkka A vai salta D Wn va N Harris Lot Prop J Sonia ihag Kod per nage T Brady ap t Sahay 5 Saver D T F Caleb Y Figure A Chart of the Leadership Team of the United States Postal Inspection Service Figure B The text alternative for the chart in Figure A 1 Chief Postal Inspector L Heath 2 Executive Ombudsman M Freso 3 Inspector in Charge Office of Counsel L Katz 4 Deputy Chief Inspector Headquarters Operations J Rowan 4 Deputy Chief Inspector Field Operations East K Burke 4 1 Inspector in Charge Charlotte W Hall 4 1 Inspector in Charge Boston K Jones 4 1 Inspector in Charge New Jersey Caribbean M Phanco 4 1 I
439. to provide a magnetic signal sufficient to support the use of a T coil The FCC enforces this industry requirement in Part 68 of its rules FCC Part 68 316 In its rules the FCC adopted EIA RS 504 as the technical requirements for hearing aid compatibility HAC Cellular Telephones Must Support Hearing Aid Compatibility Cellular telephones must follow special requirements in order to support hearing aid compatibility Currently there is no FCC requirement or industry standard specifically concerned with defining HAC for wireless telephones However on July 10 2003 the FCC modified the exemption for wireless telephones under the Hearing Aid Compatibility Act of 1988 to require that wireless telephone manufacturers and wireless telephone service providers make digital wireless telephones accessible to individuals who use hearing aids The FCC ruling requires the following E Digital cellular telephone manufacturers must make at least two HAC compliant handsets with reduced radio frequency emissions for each air interface e g CDMA TDMA GSM they offer available to carriers within 2 years Each carrier providing digital wireless services except for nationwide Tier wireless carriers must make at least two HAC compliant handset models with reduced radio frequency emissions for each air interface it offers available to consumers within 2 years E Nationwide Tier I wireless carriers must offer two HAC compliant handset models wit
440. tocol allowing exchange of information between telecommunications equipment and information technology equipment i e telephones and computers see References Through a newer version of the TAPI protocol known as Extended TAPI telephone function information can be transmitted and presented on a personal computer using a softphone or other software application Software that will translate the information from the Extended TAPI protocol to a form usable by assistive software is now available If the software is left running in the Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 6 3 7 6 2 3 7 6 3 September 2004 background the user may access audibly or tactilely using assistive technology the telephone number of an incoming call in the same length of time as someone looking at the telephone LCD display A TAPI interface on a telephone not connected to a computer would probably not satisfy this provision unless the telephone had voice output of the visual information on its display Provide Time Sensitive Telephone Information Immediately When telephone function information is time sensitive as it is with Caller ID the information must be immediately available to the user without requiring action on the part of the user to access it When Caller ID and similar telephone function information is provided devices must provide equivalent and timely access to the information using either a direct approach such as talking Cal
441. training docs caption VendorQC Checklist doc Includes considerations for selecting evaluating suppliers preparations and quality control elements E Apple Computer s Quicktime and SMIL Page http www apple com quicktime authoring qtsmil html Bi aption Center ttp www wgbh org wgbh pages captioncenter a aptioned Media Program tto www cfv org PB WGBH National Center for Accessible Media Captioning FAQ http ncam wgbh org dtv basics captioning html CPB WGBH National Center for Accessible Media Media Access lx a E C D 5 D m Q lt D C U D htto ncam wgbh org webaccess magpie DVS Theatrical is the technology that provides video and performance description htto www wgbh org wgbh pages ncam mopix aboutproject html dvs Macromedia Flash Player Home htto www macromedia con software flash Microsoft Windows Media Home Page htto www microsoft com windows windowsmedia default aspx NCAM National Center for Accessible Media htto www wgbh org wgbh pages ncan NCAM s Motion Picture Accessibility Project htto ncam wgbh org mopix index html E Heal Networks SMIL Basics Tutorial http www realnetworks com resources howto smil smilbasics html i Hear window technology is explained at htto www wgbh org wgbh pages ncam mopix aboutproject htmli rwc E World Wide Web W3 Consortium s Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language Standard htto www w3 org Audio Video September
442. trol E Insufficient audio quality for both analog digital synthesized output and recording input not addressed in Section 508 a Lack of playback control such as repeat and rewind functions not addressed in Section 508 i People with visual disabilities are typically faced with challenges such as E Inaccessible LCD output for visually presented telephone function information such as caller ID call logs and internal directories E Inaccessible hardware controls keys and switches m People with dexterity or mobility disabilities are typically faced with challenges such as E Lack of timeout controls and saving of user input upon timeout m Inaccessible hardware controls keys and switches m Lack of error recovery features Handbook AS 508 A Telecommunications Products 7 1 5 September 2004 E Reliance on only one mode of input e g voice or manual input E Lack of playback control including transcription not addressed in Section 508 a Speech impaired persons are typically faced with challenges such as E Dependency on speech recognition u Reliance on only speech based input a Incompatibility with communication aids While making telecommunications products accessible presents many challenges the greatest barrier to compliance with Section 508 is lack of knowledge Telecommunications products can often be made accessible with minimal difficulty and expense In addition buying or building accessible tel
443. ts 11 3 2 2 For Developed Products Provide Description of Accessibility Features in Alternate Formats ssa 3e s scade n edo imme tends e pede pad aon irons UE OEER LT gQoTe r 113 4 Beleren6GeS c ouod mdr 9 TR sued eens RR pube EUROS es Rede Ed rex eds 11 4 Accommodate Various Communication Needs in Support Services 11 4 1 ANON T ene 11 4 2 Techniques ueeeseeeeeeee RR hr hrs 11 4 2 1 For Purchased Products Evaluate Whether Support Services Are Accessible to People with Disabilities l llle 11 4 2 2 For Developed Products All Support Services Must Be Accessible to People with Disabilities sere teens AS TN ee ene a ee ee ee 11 4 4 References nc cetoe n6 oe cao e TIT Appendix 11 A Information Documentation and Support Accessibility Questions September 2004 xvii Section 508 Technical Reference Guide This page intentionally left blank xviii Handbook AS 508 A Exhibits Exhibits Exhibit 1 2 2 Access to Technology and Function 0 ccc tenets Exhibit 2 3 Exhibit 4 2 5 Example of Complex Business Solution Involving Various Section 508 Standards Exhibit 4 5 1 Purchase or Lease of IT Section 508 Considerations in the EIT Life Cycle Exhibit 4 5 2 Development or Customization of IT Section 508 Considerations i
444. tual label or text formatting to convey the equivalent information e g use color and boldface text to indicate highlighted information Handbook AS 508 A Software Applications and Operating Systems 5 10 3 Exhibit 5 10 2 1 Example of Combining Color With Alternate Formatting Fille Edit view Piw amp 49 4 Back n Back Ta Folder List C Calendar 2 Contacts Ch Drafts pumo Favorites Ca Deleted Items 5 E NBR FORWARDEDZIBM E admin systems communication training 3 guidelines stewardships purchasing listing area shown on the CE self contained closed products IISPSHEWSLIHN upper right and a um TN 3 ME z 5 trs E IM means zii convey important information x v Fron This figure shows three E USPS News Link Washi distinct window display Karl Hebenstreit Jr areas separated by Actions Help An example of combining color with another zh Send Receive S Find alternate format to Lj 0 Sherry Carla F Washingto panes in an e mail client Robinson Norman B Wash software application The iy Brinkley Jeffrey A Washin window areas include a From LSPS News Link Washington Folder List area shown Subject USPS NEWS LINK Nov 3 2c On the left a message In the Folder List area a number in parentheses is shown in blue to indicate the number of unread messages in the folder Color is not used here alone to convey this impor
445. ult level after every use 81194 25 Provision f Rationale People who are hard of hearing generally speaking can understand speech only if voice levels are 20 dB above the ambient sound level This means that as long as the noise level in the surrounding environment is below 45 dB a 65 dB output level would be sufficient To comply with this position a Postal Service engineer or other appropriate responsible party must determine the volume of background noise at the location of the machine specifically whether it is above 45 dB so that the machine can be selected or calibrated for that specific environment To comply with this provision consideration needs to be given to the fact that ambient noise levels may vary in certain environments Techniques This provision is an engineering specification rather than a performance standard Therefore the technique is to insure that the specification is met Testing a Verify that the voice output is appropriate to the ambient noise level b Insure that the audio is adjustable and that the accessible controls are clearly marked c Verify that the product automatically resets the volume to the default level after every use d If an exception was taken when procuring a device that is not fully accessible define the alternate format or alternate method needed to provide equivalent access to people with disabilities who can not readily use the device References The followin
446. ures eee ee Support Accessibility Features Through Use of Standard Controls Frameworks and APIS 0 cc cece eee eee ee eee eee ns Support Audio Accessibility Features 0 ccc cee ees Testing 5 3 3 References 5 4 On Screen Focus 5 4 1 Rationale 5 4 2 Techniques 0 4 2 1 0 4 2 2 Use Standard Controls to Expose Focus Information Expose Information for Associated Controls 0 c cece es 5 4 3 Testing 5 4 4 References 5 5 User Interface and Programmatic Elements eee eens 5 5 1 Rationale 5 5 2 Techniques 9 5 2 1 9 5 2 2 9 5 2 3 9 5 2 4 9 5 2 5 September 2004 Use Standard UI Controls 0 0 cc eee ene nes Use Reliable Accessibility Frameworks for Nonstandard Controls Make Other Key UI Objects Accessible 0 0 cc ccc eee Make Information About Changed Images Accessible Use Caution with Timeouts Automatic Updates and Refreshes 5 5 3 Testing 5 5 4 References Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 5 6 Consistent Use of Images 00 ccc cece eee 5 6 1 Rationale 0 ccc ccc RH ern 5 6 Techniques 00 c ccc cece eas DOS TESNO zecsiaex bote dan hir Et Edad idend bead tah 5 6 4 References 0 c ccc cece eee ee 5 7 Textual Information u 0 00 c cc cece cece IRI m rre 5 7 1 Rationale 00 c
447. use of the longdesc attribute In this exhibit the longdesc attribute refers to the following Web content September 2004 107 6 2 2 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 6 2 2 3 p 2 Using Long Descriptions Figure C Long description of chart in Figure A This process describes the administrative steps technical steps and coding process for canned and live requests Administrative Steps Register Sign License Agreement of API Connector Code if desired Run Canned Test trom Test Server Follow Technical Steps Cal ICCC for Access to Production Server Run Live XML from Production Server Follow Technical Steps E LR Ni un Technical Steps l Build XML Request Rewew Coding Process step 1 2 Make Internet Connection to Server Review Coding Process step 2 5 pend XML Request Rewew Coding Process step 3 4 Unpack XML Response Review Coding Process step 4 Coding Process l Cut amp Paste Code trom the PDF File 2 Use HITE Connection DLL or another interface 4 Cut amp Paste Code from this PDF File 4 Cut amp Paste Code trom this PDF File Use VB Example amp Decoding Example i necessary Figure D HTML code for Figure C Content of FlowchartExample LD html is below lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv content type content text html charset ISO 8859 1 title
448. user interface and programmatic elements is covered in Section 5 5 User Interface and Programmatic Elements In addition dynamic forms themselves can serve as applications i e they can contain user interface and programmatic elements that help a user perform specific tasks Often these elements are nonstandard controls that must comply with all applicable requirements in this chapter Dynamic forms should also be locked to prevent unintentional modification by end users September 2004 89 5 12 3 90 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 5 123 Testing Manual inspection based testing using the methods described in this chapter must accompany any automated tests Some of these manual tests may be automated using testing tools or Integrated Development Environment IDE features as long as testing occurs in the context of usage by assistive technology users Conduct a manual inspection of the electronic form with assistive technology to verify that text information is accessible and exposed programmatically a Navigate all screens that comprise the electronic form using a screen reader e g JAWS including access point s completion screens review screens and revision submission screens and including all directions and cues b As you do verify that the screen reader reads and provides meaningful information about all form user interface elements inputs and controls i e headings text instructions radio button
449. user to indicate that more time is required 3 Does the product provide sufficient time for the user to indicate that more time is required 4 Does the product provide additional time as requested 239 9 3 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide C If an exception was taken when procuring a device that is not fully accessible define the alternate format or alternate method needed to provide equivalent access to people with disabilities who can not readily use the device 9 34 References The following references apply to the specific requirements stated in this section E Trace Center Research on Kiosk accommodation Note sub page for unique approach EZ Access keys htto www tracecenter org world kiosks E Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Self Contained Closed Products 1194 25 htto www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 25 htm 9 4 Touch Screens or Contact Sensitive Controls 240 9 4 1 Where a product uses touch screens or contact sensitive controls an input method must be provided that complies with 1194 23 k 1 through 4 81194 25 Provision c Rationale Touch screens and other controls that operate by sensing a person s touch pose access problems for a range of persons with disabilities This provision does not prohibit the use of touch screens and contact sensitive controls but as modified the final rule requires a redundant set of controls that
450. ust be compliant If color displays are developed by the Postal Service they must meet all provisions Self contained closed products when they provide contrast adjustments must provide a full range of adjustment 249 9 9 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide 993 Testing a Inspect the product to determine whether it follows the convention of appropriate contrast adjustment b If an exception was taken when procuring a device that is not fully accessible define the alternate format or alternate method needed to provide equivalent access to people with disabilities who can not readily use the device 9 94 References The following references are applicable to the specific requirements stated here u Web Computer Color Chart for the Color Blind htto www toledo bend com colorblind colortable html B Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Self Contained Closed Products 1194 25 htto www access board gov sec508 guide 1194 25 htm 9 10 Screen Flickering Products must be designed to avoid causing the screen to flicker with a frequency greater than 2 Hz and lower than 55 Hz 1194 25 Provision i 9 10 1 Rationale This requirement is specified because some individuals with photosensitive epilepsy can have a seizure triggered by displays that flicker or flash particularly if the flash has a high intensity and is within certain frequency ranges The 2 Hz limit was chosen to
451. utions Evaluate and update Section 508 exception documents when solutions are appendix 4 A modified see People or Organizations Responsible Functional Organization Client own IT Portfolio Managers support Business Solution Services IBSSCs support Development Teams and Vendors support Contracting Officer own IT Portfolio Manager support Vendors support System Documentation Caretaker support Functional Organization Client own Contracting Officer own IT Portfolio Manager own Development Teams and Vendors support System Documentation Caretaker support Functional Organization Client own IT Portfolio Manager own System Documentation Caretaker support 29 Exhibit 4 5 2 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Development or Customization of IT Section 508 Considerations in the EIT Life Cycle This chart clarifies key Section 508 considerations that must be factored into mandatory EIT life cycle tasks by the various roles described in Chapter 2 Roles and Responsibilities This information is aligned with the Information Technology Division s Integrated Systems Methodology ISM but can be used in other current or future EIT governance processes Boldface text indicates formal work products for which Section 508 considerations must be documented Phase Concept Define business need and solution concept Planning Develop business case and p
452. va platform with or without assistive technologies However to provide access to Java applications assistive technology requires more than the Java Accessibility API Sun s Java Accessibility Utilities help assistive technologies interact with applications developed using the Java Accessibility Application Program Interface API An application developer can use these APIs directly or indirectly using the Swing toolkit Developers can create Java applications capable of interacting with assistive technologies such as screen readers speech recognition systems and Braille terminals Ensure that the version number of the Java Accessibility Utilities matches the version number of the Java Platform For example Java Accessibility Utilities v 1 3 should be used if Java 2 Platform Standard Edition v 1 3 JDK 1 3 is the version installed on the system where the evaluation is occurring Although accessibility support became available in SDK JDK 1 1 x it is best to use the Swing user interface development kit that is included in SDK 1 3 or higher This will provide the highest level of accessibility functions Handbook AS 508 A Web Based Information and Applications Accessibility Guidelines 6 11 4 6 11 3 6 11 4 September 2004 Testing Manual testing using the testing methods described in this chapter is mandatory because it simulates use by assistive technology users Automated testing tools and methods can help automate thes
453. value are accessible to assistive technology For example the highlight and line around the F6 Next Window object indicate that it has focus and the label or ToolTip of Next Window would be read by a screen An example of using reliable accessibility frameworks to make information about nonstandard user interface controls accessible to assistive technology This figure shows a floating toolbar in a word processing application This toolbar uses 5 23 Make Other Key UI Objects Accessible Other user interface objects that are critical to the use of an application i e images of text in a password locked screen an About this Software or other dialog box must be accompanied by an accessible alternate text equivalent in content and meaning September 2004 59 5 5 2 4 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Exhibit 5 5 2 3 Example of Key UI Object Accessibility aE NEE An example of an About this Software dialog box Microsoft Outlook 2002 10 4219 4219 SP 2 that provides critical application version Copyright Microsoft Corporation 1995 2001 All rights reserved infor mation E Portions of International CorrectSpell spelling correction system 1993 by Lemout amp Hauspie Speech Products N Y All rights reserved French Spelling checker and Th IS d ialog box provides Version info rm ation that dictionaries 1994 2000 SYNAPSE D veloppement Toulouse France All rights reserved
454. ver as described in this chapter to the requirement to purchase compliant EIT see 4 4 Guiding Steps for the Purchase of an EIT Business 24 Solution While it may seem that Section 508 compliance is daunting because of the range of activities it covers a simplified look at the pieces reveals how to fit it into a Postal Service business solution Step 1 Learn About 508 To learn about Section 508 requirements see the following sources m HBK AS 508 Section 508 Handbook http www usps com cpim fto hand as508 welcome htm H Postal Service Intranet or Internet search on Section 508 m Purchasing Manual http blue usps gov cpim manuals htm Handbook AS 508 A Section 508 Postal Service Processes to Comply September 2004 EIT Accessibility Standards includes a definition of EIT E http www section508 gov E http www access board gov 508 htm The Goal Make text and data as accessible to people with disabilities as it is to people without them Step 2 Determine whether EIT is part of the business solution If EIT is not part of the business solution Section 508 does not apply okip the remaining steps and continue with the normal purchasing process If EIT is part of the solution determine whether a general exception applies If a general exception is justified document the exception and include it in the contract file Step 3 Identify the applicable EIT standards and then conduct market research
455. will be used to provide equivalent access to people with disabilities who can not readily use the product documentation 11 34 References The following reference applies to the specific requirements stated in this section Guide to the Section 508 Standards for Electronic and Information Technology Equivalent Facilitation htto www access board gov sec508 guide scope htm Equivalent 20 Facilitation 11 4 Accommodate Various Communication Needs in Support Services 11 4 1 September 2004 Support services for products must accommodate the communication needs of end users with disabilities 1194 25 Provision c Rationale Support services can include telephone support live and IVR Web support FAQs searchable knowledge bases downloads and updates interactive forms chat subscriptions online events training courses and newsgroups and dispatched technicians Each of these presents somewhat different challenges to people with diverse functional limitations see section 11 1 4 Awareness of needs and provisions for accessible formats is the clear goal 283 11 4 2 284 11 4 2 11 4 2 1 11 4 2 2 11 4 3 Section 508 Technical Reference Guide Techniques For Purchased Products Evaluate Whether Support Services Are Accessible to People with Disabilities For purchased products evaluate the supplier s VPAT or similar statement that describes how the product support services regardless of type are
456. xample of Keyboard Access to Window Elements File Edit View Favorites Tools Gi New g SB h Back zn Back rm Folder List gt Calendar Contacts Deleted Items i5 lt Drafts mmo i MBR FORWARDEDZIBM SE admin systems En communication Eraininq SE3 guidelines stewardships qE purchasing Actions Help gt RO Messages E self contained closed products US An example of keyboard access to three distinct window display areas separated by panes in an e mail client software application In Figure A the focus is currently on the Inbox folder in the Folder List window pane as indicated by the blue solid highlight around the word Inbox This software application allows users to navigate i e move the focus between the three distinct window areas mm by pressing a standard keyboard equivalent for the Subject us Windows operating system the F6 key focus highlighted Figure A The Folder window display pane with File Edit wiew Favorites Tools qE NMBR FORWARDEDZIBM q admin systems om communication Eraining GplMew 48 X Coheply y Reply to All SE Forward I Listing window display pane in the upper right by gi pack SA e Sy Messages pressing the F6 key This is indicated by the blue solid highlight around the message from USPS News lt D Back m Link Washington Falder List Xx Dgr C Calendar NES Pressing the F6 key again would move the focus to
457. yboard shortcut for FilterKeys is to press and hold the SHIFT key for eight seconds The shortcut for ToggleKeys is to press and hold the NUM LOCK key for five seconds These default keyboard shortcuts can be disabled under advanced options using the Accessibility Options control panel Show extra keyboard help in programs Although this example could also be used to illustrate activated accessibility features section 5 3 the key concept is to be aware that keyboard access can perform actions equivalent to using a mouse Cane 5 23 Testing Manual inspection based testing using the methods described in this chapter must accompany any automated tests Some of these manual tests may be automated using testing tools or Integrated Development Environment IDE features as long as testing occurs in the context of usage by assistive technology users Conduct a manual inspection of the software application without assistive technology to verify keyboard access Unplug or disable all input devices except the keyboard then attempt to access and operate the identified user interface elements that must be accessible using only the keyboard See the references listed below for standard keyboard equivalents that should be tested on each platform When nonstandard keyboard equivalents are used ensure that they are communicated to the user via the application s user assistance Whether using standard or nonstand

Handbook AS-508-A - Section 508 Technical

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents